Food, beverage, and pharmaceutical industries

www.ghm-group.de
Food, beverage, and
pharmaceutical industries.
Product catalogue 2018
Editorial. Specialists by Competence.
„The monitoring of food production is not based
on gut feeling, but on hard facts and standards.
Our measuring devices are designed specifically
for the requirements and needs of the market."
If you have any questions do not hesitate to contact us:
Phone: +49 7354 937233-0
info@ghm-group.de
Additional information is provided on our website at:
https://www.ghm-group.de/en/industry-sectors/food-beverage/
2
Dear readers,
Uncompromising cleanliness and hygiene are the basic
prerequisites for avoidance of microbiological contamination in the industrial manufacturing and processing of
foodstuffs and beverages.
Moreover, close or continuous inspection ensures the
uniform high-quality of your products, and guarantees a
consistent taste experience for the consumer. In addition,
through seamless monitoring of the overall process you
provide validation of the rigorous hygienic standards of
your production, and with documentation of the measured
data, you also place the likelihood of faulty batches on file.
Quality assurance plays an essential role as part of the
overall process. Consequently, the measuring instruments
used must satisfy the most rigorous requirements relative
to hygiene and many other factors.
and plant availability.
The list of possible applications for the technologies and
devices we use is long. You have the choice between
various high-quality in-line sensors for temperature, flow
rate, pressure, level, limit level, turbidity, conductivity, pH/
Redox and analysis, as well as handheld measuring devices
or laboratory instruments and data loggers. Our measuring devices are designed especially for your requirements
and needs.
Thus, we enable you to save costs, ensure as well as
increase quality, reduce waste and easily upgrade the
existing plant.
We support you in your individual projects and applications. Contact us, we are “Specialists by Competence”.
E5 Leistungselektronik
As GHM GROUP we offer an extensive range of sensors for
hygienic and sterile applications in the area of groceries,
beverages, dairy products, confectionery, pharmacy and
cosmetics. Through many years of know-how, our exceptional ability to innovate, and technical opportunities
across many sectors, we not only offer individual sensors
or components but, rather entire systems or system solutions that guarantee the highest level of process security
3
4
GHMadapt
Temperature
GHMadapt, process connetction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Flow, magnetic-conductive
Page
Flow, calorimetric
Index Hygienic Design
Flow, calorimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Point level, calorimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Level, calorimetric
Flow, magnetic-conductive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Level, potentiometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Level, hydrostatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Turbidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Process pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Level, potentiometric
Further products of GHM portfolio to be used in food & pharmaceutical industry can be found in
our catalogues:
Point level, conductive
Point level, conductive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Point level, capacitive
Point level, capacitive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Analysis product catalogue
pH / ORP, Conductivity, O2 / CO / CO2
Measurement Data Accquisition product catalogue
Calibration and Testing:
GHM SensorSimulator SIM-1
5
Process pressure
Turbidity
Level, hydrostatic
Industrial Electronic product catalogue
Multifunctional controller :
GHM-ONE
Displays:
GA9648, EP9648, T9648, TA9648, UZ9648, LF9648, UNICON®-LF, pH9648,
UNICON®-pH, TA1010, T1010, UZ1010, LF1010, SG9648, SG1010
Transmitter / Signal conditioning:
MU125, MU500, MU500L, MU500Ex, FT500, RT500, UT125, PMT50-2/-3,
PMT50Ex-2/-3,
Isolating converter:
TV125M/ST125M, TV125L, TV500/ST500, TV500Ex/ST500Ex, TV500H, TV500L,
TV500P, TW500, TV501Ex, TS125/TS225, TS500, TS500-Ex
Safety and monitoring:
MR50, MR50Ex, GS500, GS125, TG50, TG50Ex, TB225, STL50, STL50Ex
Power electronic:
Wireless data loggers HD35
6
GHMadapt
Hygienic Design
Page
GHMadapt, process connetction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
7
GHMadapt
www.ghm-group.de
Product information
Hygienic Design
GHMadapt / Accessories
Product information GHMadapt / Accessories
Characteristics
Applications
GHMadapt
Food-, beverage and
pharmaceutical industry
○
○
○
○
○
Welding sleeves without / with leakage holes
Adapters
Welding fittings
CIP-/SIP-cleaning
EHEDG certified
○ Tube systems
○ Tanks
○ Vessels and other containers
Connection cables
○ P67, IP69K
○ 4-, 5- and 8-pole
Function
With the process adaptation it is a matter according to the use in
the tanks or in the tubes of choosing a flawless, hygienic process
connection.
Diameters, volumes and construction form mark size and type of
the connection. Medium, temperature and pressure the possible
principle.
10
Advantage
○
○
○
○
Thread types M12, G ½, G 1
Leakage holes
Modular adaption at all common process connections
Hygienic-connection cables
pi-ma-Food-accessories_e V3.02-00
GHMadapt
Product information GHMadapt / Accessories
Device overview
Accessories
Mounting notes
Page
12
Welding sleeve
APH112, APH113, APH121, APH122, APH123, APH132, APH133, APH141, APH142, APH151, APH152
13
Welding tool
AMH121, AMH122, AMH123
14
Blind gland
AMH111, AMH112, AMH113
14
Reducing bush
AMH131, AMH132, AMH133, AMH134
14
Process adapter
APH2X1, APH2X2, APH2X3, APH3X1, APH3X2, APH3X3, APH4X1, APH4X2, APH4X3
15
Welding fitting
APH501, APH502, APH503
16
Hygienic connection cable
ACH111, ACH112, ACH121, ACH122
ACH113, ACH123
17
18
Certicates and Protocols
Test Report 2.2, Inspection Certificate 3.1
16
Errors and technical changes reserved.
pi-ma-Food-accessories_e V3.02-00
11
Product information GHMadapt / Accessories
Process Adaptation and Accessories
Application field
Approvals / conformities
Hygienic requirements for dead spot free and elastomer free
process adaptation in a wide application field of food and beverage
industry.
Function GHMadapt
The hygienically designed cone of the sensor, will be pressed with
a defined stud torque against the sealing edge of the welding
sleeve.
Welding sleeve
Sealing edge
Characteristics
● Defined position of the cable- or plug entry (sensor) with a mark
on the welding fitting
● Only 3 thread types for all sensors: M12, G ½”, G 1”
● Adaptation for all popular process connection as:
VARINLINE® ,Tri-Camp, milk-pipe, DRD, ...
● Reducing adapter for the replacement of existing sensors e.g.
vibration limiter
● Models with leakage holes
Technical data
Process connection
Material
Operating temperature
Sealing metal-metal
Sealing metal-PEEK
Process pressure
Sealing metal-metal
Sealing metal-PEEK
: thread M12, G ½”, G 1”
stud torque values see table below
: stainless steel 1.4404, AISI 316L
2.2 or 3.1 certification optional
: max. 250 °C
: max. 150 °C
Marks for plug
direction
: max. 50 bar
: max. 10 bar
Mounting notes for fittings
Butt welding in tanks
1. drilling the hole with outer diameter of the sleeve,
•
max. tolerance +0.2 mm
2. tacking the fitting with 4 point (Figure 1)
•
take care for the tacking sequence
•
for G 1 are 8 tacking points necessary (Figure 2)
3. screw in welding tool (see AMH121, -122, -123)
4. welding the sectors between the tacks
•
4 sectors for thread M12 and G ½”
•
8 sectors for thread G 1”
Butt welding in tubes
Besides the APH tube-system we also offer ball sleeves or sleeves with
welding shoulder for pipes with collar.

Figure 1
Figure 2
4 sectors with M12 and G ½
8 sectors with G 1
To prevent a glowing through or warping the sleeve during the welding process, it is necessary between the single sections to take a break,
to cool down the sleeve.
Tightening torque
Thread
Sensor / sleeve
Min. torque [Nm]
Max. torque [Nm}
M12x1.5 hygienic
PEEK / metal
5
10
G ½” hygienic
PEEK / metal
5
10
G ½” hygienic
metal / metal
5
20
G 1” hygienic
PEEK / metal
10
20
12
pi-ma-Process-adaption_E V3.02-00
1
pi-ma-Food-accessories_e V3.02-00
GHMadapt
Product information GHMadapt / Accessories
Product Information
Hygienic Design
Hygienic welding sleeves
4
pi-ma-Food-accessories_e V3.02-00
13
pi-ma-Food-accessories_e V3.02-00
Product information GHMadapt / Accessories
Additional accessories
14
pi-ma-Process-adaption_E V3.02-00
3
pi-ma-Food-accessories_e V3.02-00
GHMadapt
Product information GHMadapt / Accessories
Product Information
Hygienic Design
Process adapters (material 1.4404)
Processconnection
VARINLINE®
incl. O-Ring
Tri-Camp
APH211-001)
APH411-00
Milk pipe DIN 11851
DRD
(clamping ring
optional)
DRD clamping ring
APH651-00
APH659-00
APH652-00
APH659-00
APH653-00
APH659-00
M12
Nominal diameter
(DN)
10
15
25
APH231-002)
40
50
APH431-00
APH311-00
APH321-00
APH331-00
APH341-00
APH451-00
APH351-00
APH461-00
APH361-00
80
APH471-00
APH371-00
100
APH481-00
APH381-00
65
APH241-003)
G ½”
Nominal diameter
(DN)
25
APH232-002)
32
-
APH322-00
APH432-00
APH332-00
APH342-00
40
50
APH452-00
APH352-00
APH462-00
APH362-00
80
APH472-00
APH372-00
100
APH482-00
APH382-00
65
APH242-00
3)
G 1”
Nominal diameter
(DN)
25
APH233-002)
32
-
APH323-00
APH433-00
40
APH333-00
APH343-00
50
APH453-00
APH353-00
APH463-00
APH363-00
80
APH473-00
APH373-00
100
APH483-00
APH383-00
65
APH243-00
3)
Other process adapters on request
VARIVENT/VARINLINE® Process connection
Type B
Type F
3)
Type N
Varinline and Varivent are registered trademarks of GEA Tuchenhagen GmbH.
1)
2)
6
pi-ma-Food-accessories_e V3.02-00
15
pi-ma-Food-accessories_e V3.02-00
Product information GHMadapt / Accessories
Product Information
Hygienic Design
Hygienic welding fittings series APH material 1.4404 ● DIN 11850 series 2
Hygienic welding fittings can also be customized and delivered according to DIN 11850 series 1, DIN 11866 series C (OD Tube) or
DIN 11866 series B (EN ISO 1127).
Process thread
M12
DN
L
A
Da x W
APH501-015-00
15
70
10
19 x 1.5
APH501-025-00
25
100
15
29 x 1.5
APH501-040-00
40
120
22
41 x 1.5
APH501-050-00
50
140
29
53 x 1.5
APH501-065-00
65
160
38
70 x 2.0
APH501-080-00
80
180
46
85 x 2.0
APH502-025-00
25
100
15
29 x 1.5
APH502-040-00
40
120
22
41 x 1.5
APH502-050-00
50
140
29
53 x 1.5
APH502-065-00
65
160
38
70 x 2.0
APH502-080-00
80
180
46
85 x 2.0
APH502-100-00
100
200
55
104 x 2.0
APH503-025-00
25
100
15
29 x 1.5
APH503-040-00
40
120
22
41 x 1.5
APH503-050-00
50
140
29
53 x 1.5
APH503-065-00
65
160
38
70 x 2.0
APH503-080-00
80
180
46
85 x 2.0
APH503-100-00
100
200
55
104 x 2.0
Process thread
G ½”
Process thread
G 1”
Certificates and protocols for all APH articles
The above-named welding sleeves, fittings and process adapters can be also delivered with below-listed test reports, inspection certificates
or measurement protocols for surfaces according to DIN EN 10204
Test report 2.2
Option: WZ2.2
Inspection certificate 3.1 material in contact with products
Option: APZMAT
Measurement protocol for surface roughness incl. inspection
certificate 3.1 material
Ra≤ 0,8 µm
Option: RA08
Ra≤ 0,6 µm
Option: RA06
Option: RA04
Ra≤ 0,4 µm
These options will be added to the article number on request, whereby multiple responses are possible. E.g. APH501-015-00-WZ2.2
APH501-015-00-WZ2.2-RA06
Note: All above-listed welding sleeves, fittings and process adapters can be also delivered in stainless steel 1.4435.
16
pi-ma-Food-accessories_e V3.02-00
7
pi-ma-Food-accessories_e V3.02-00
GHMadapt
Product information GHMadapt / Accessories
Hygienic
Connection Cable
Series ACH
(4- and 5-pole)
4-pole
Ordering code for straight sockets
1.
ACH111 -
2.
-
3.
-
1. Cable length
005
5 meter (standard)
010
10 meter
2. Shield
0
without shield
3. Options
00
without option
Ordering code for angular sockets
1.
ACH121 Cable socket M12x1
PVC-cable flexcord grey
Straight or angular type
4- or 5- pole, wire-end sleeve
Material stainless steel union nut
IP67 according to IEC 60529/A1
IP69K protected against high pressure and steam-cleaning
according to IEC 60529/A1
● Heat- and cold-resistant, operating range -25..70°C
● Vibration lock
● Industry-standard-cable colors
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
The connection cable is suitable for middle mechanical strain. High
reliability against acids and caustics.
Therefore the cables are ideal for application in food and beverage
industry.
Conditional abrasion characteristics, dependent arising oil and
chemical resistance.
Technical data
Mechanical life
3.
-
1. Cable length
005
5 meter (standard)
010
10 meter
020
20 meter
0
without shield
2. Shield
0
without shield
3. Options
00
without option
5-pole
Characteristics
Connector
Handle body
Cap nut
Contact retainer
Contacts
Seal
Current load
Rated voltage
Isolation resistance
Degree of pollution
Ambient temperature
Protection class
2.
-
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
socket M12x1
plastic, PVC
stainless steel 1.4404
plastic PVC grey
metal, Cu Zn, gold-plated
plastic, FPM, FKM
max. 4 A
max. 250 V
≥ 109 MΩ
3/2, according to DIN VDE 0110
-25..70 °C
IP67/IP69K
(only in closed conditions)
: minimal 100 mating cycles
Cable colors:
1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black, 5 = grey
pi-ma-Connection-cable_E
V3.02-00
pi-ma-Food-accessories_e
V3.02-00
Ordering code for straight sockets
1.
ACH112 -
2.
-
3.
-
1. Cable length
005
5 meter (standard)
010
10 meter
2. Shield
0
without shield
3. Options
00
without option
Ordering code for angular sockets
1.
ACH122 -
2.
-
3.
-
1. Cable length
005
5 meter (standard)
010
10 meter
020
20 meter
2. Shield
0
without shield
3. Options
00
without option
17
1
Product information GHMadapt / Accessories
Hygienic
Connection Cable
Series ACH
(8-pole, shielded)
Cable socket M12x1
PVC- and halogen-free cable, dove-blue, matt
Straight or angular type
8-pole, wire-end sleeve
stainless steel union nut
IP67 according to IEC 60529/A1
IP69K protected against high-pressure and steam-cleaning
according to IEC 60529/A1
● Heat- and cold-resistant, operating temp. -40..+105 °C
● Vibration lock
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Characteristics
This shielded, flexible, flame-resistant and halogen-free sensor
cable is perfectly suitable for industrial mechanical and plant
engineering with highest demands, especially for the application in
the food and beverage industry (packaging and filling machines).
8-pole, straight
Ordering code
1.
ACH113 -
2.
-
3.
-
Location Martens
1. Cable length
005
5 meter
010
10 meter
2. Shield
1
shield
(not placed on the union nut)
3. Options
00
without option
8-pole, angular
Ordering code
1.
ACH123 -
2.
-
3.
-
Location Martens
1. Cable length
005
5 meter
010
10 meter
2. Shield
1
shield
(not placed on the union nut)
3. Options
00
without option
Resistant against all common acidic and alkaline detergents and
disinfection agents.
Technical data
Connector
Handle body
Cap nut
Contact retainer
Contacts
Seal
Current load
Rated voltage
Isolation resistance
Degree of pollution
Ambient temperature
Protection class
Mechanical life
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
socket M12x1
plastic, PVC
stainless steel 1.4404
plastic PVC grey
metal, Cu Zn, gold-plated
plastic, FPM, FKM
max. 4 A
max. 250 V
≥ 109 MΩ
3/2, according to DIN VDE 0110
-25..70 °C
IP67/IP69K
(only in closed conditions)
: minimal 100 mating cycles
Cable colors:
1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black, 5 = gray, 6 = pink,
7 = blue, 8 = red, shield = black
18
2
pi-ma-Connection-cable_E
pi-ma-Food-accessories_e V3.02-00
19
Temperature
20
Temperature
Hygienic Design
Page
Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
21
22
Temperature
www.ghm-group.de
Product information
Hygienic Design
Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Features
Field of application
System
○ Food and beverage industry
○ Temperature probes / - switches,
○ hygienic design
○ Breweries
Process connections
○ M12, G ½, G ½ (flush mounted), G ½ standard
○ G ⅜ union nut, without thread, clamp-on adapter
(no media contact)
Temperature range
○ -40..+200 °C
○ CIP- / SIP- capable
○ Dairies
○ Chemical industry
○ Pharmaceutical industry
○ Cosmetics industry
○ Biotechnology
High flexibility
○ Modular design,
○ probe length acc. to customer specification
Accuracy
○ Class A or better
Programming tool
○ Parameters freely programmable via GTL - Configuration tool
System features
Measuring probes
Our products largely meet the specific requirements of the food,
beverage and pharmaceutical industry.
○ Process connection M12, G½″ or without thread but with
compression fitting
○ Compact design
○ Design types with neck tube available
○ Electric connection via M12-plug, M16 x 1.5 (PG) or fixed cable
○ Front-flush installation and several probe lengths depending on
○ design type
○ Several probe lengths and diameters
○ Process connection and protection tube made of stainless steel
○ 1.4404
○ Clamp-on probes, fast responding, for DN 10..80
○
○
○
○
○
„Hygienic Design“ for cleaning and sterilization processes
CIP- / SIP- capable
Probes made of stainless steel
FDA conform materials
EHEDG certificate (in preparation)
Advantages
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Temperature range -40..+200 °C
Several design types
Optional with integrated transducer and on-site display
Short response time due to tapered measuring tip
High accuracy (class A, class AA, others upon request)
Certificate of calibration available
Variable fitting length
Protection class IP67 / IP69K
Available with calibration certificate
Optionally with acceptance test certificate 3.1 acc. to EN 1020
for part in contact with media
24
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Measuring principle for Pt100
Accuracy classes of Pt elements:
The correlation between temperature and resistance is not directly
Pt100 / Pt1000:
proportional, but includes terms of higher order.
Sensor accuracies acc. to EN 60751:2008
R(t) = R0 (1+ A*t + B*t2 + C*t3 + ...)
Pt100 values:
-40 °C 84,27
PT-100 curve
Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
DIN Klasse
Validity range
Accuracy
DIN Kl. A
-30..+300 °C
±0,15 °C at 0 °C
DIN Kl. AA = 1/3 DIN Kl. B 0..150 °C
±0,1 °C at 0 °C
-20 °C 92,16
0 °C 100,00
Response time
20 °C 107,79
40 °C 115,54
60 °C 123,24
80 °C 130,90
100 °C 138,51
120 °C 146,07
140 °C 153,58
T90 ≤ 1,5 s
160 °C 161,05
Other used Pt elements:
T90 ≤ 3,6 s
T90 ≤ 7,4 s
Process connection
Pt500 (0 °C = 500 Ω)
Principle of elastomer and dead-space-free process connection
Pt1000 (0 °C = 1000 Ω)
Electrical connection
2-wire technology
Einschweißmuffe
3-/4-wire technology
Dichtkonus am Sensor
Dichtkante aus Metall
Display
Controller
RL = Line resistance
I = constant IRL = IPt100
voltage measurement via
separate circuit.
The equation R = U / I allows
the determination of measuring
resistance
Design types (basic version)
Overview. temperature sensors without / with transducer (head transmitter)
Field housing without
on-site display
Field housing with
on-site display
Compact design with
M12- plug
Compact design
with M12- plug and
transducer
Compact design with
cable fixed
Compact design
with fixed cable and
transducer
M12 hygienic
G ½ hygienic
G ½ flush mounted
G ½ standard
without thread
G⅜
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
25
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product overview
Electric connection Page
Clamp-on
Design
G ⅜ union nut
without thread
G ½ standard
G ½ flush mounted
G½
Process connection
M12
Type
Temperature probes (*optionally with transducer / integrated on-site display)
GTL142
●
Ø 59 mm probe head *
Ø 59 mm probe head with neck tube *
M12 orPG
28
GTL162
GTL162M
GTL182
GTL182M
●
●
●
●
Ø 18 mm probe head
Ø 18 mm probe head incl. transducer
Ø 18 mm probe head
Ø 18 mm probe head incl. transducer
M12
M12
PG
PG
31
GTL240
●
Ø 59 mm probe head *
Ø 59 mm probe head with neck tube *
M12 or PG
34
GTL260
GTL260M
GTL280
GTL280M
●
●
●
●
Ø 18 mm probe head
Ø 18 mm probe head incl. transducer
Ø 18 mm probe head
Ø 18 mm probe head incl. transducer
M12
M12
PG
PG
37
GTL241
●
Ø 59 mm probe head *
Ø 59 mm probe head with neck tube *
M12 orPG
40
GTL261
GTL261M
GTL281
GTL281M
●
●
●
●
Ø 18 mm probe head
Ø 18 mm probe head incl. transducer
Ø 18 mm probe head
Ø 18 mm probe head incl. transducer
M12
M12
PG
PG
43
GTL244
●
Ø 59 mm probe head *
M12 or PG
GTL264
GTL264M
GTL284
GTL284M
●
●
●
●
Ø 18 mm probe head
Ø 18 mm probe head incl. transducer
Ø 18 mm probe head
Ø 18 mm probe head incl. transducer
M12
M12
PG
PG
48
GTL 263
GTL 263M
●
●
Ø 18 mm probe head
Ø 18 mm probe head incl. transducer
M12
M12
50
GTL349
●
Ø 59 mm probe head *
M12 or PG
GTL369
GTL369M
GTL389
GTL389M
●
●
●
●
Ø 18 mm probe head
Ø 18 mm probe head incl. transducer
Ø 18 mm probe head
Ø 18 mm probe head incl. transducer
M12
M12
PG
PG
54
GTL459
●
Ø 59 mm probe head *
M12 or PG
GTL479
GTL479M
GTL499
GTL499M
●
●
●
●
Ø 18 mm probe head
Ø 18 mm probe head incl. transducer
Ø 18 mm probe head
Ø 18 mm probe head incl. transducer
M12
M12
PG
PG
59
DoublesPt100 Ø59
●
●
●
●
●
Ø 59 mm probe head *
Ø 59 mm probe head with neck tube *
M12 orPG
62
DoublesPt100 Ø18
●
●
●
●
●
Ø 18 mm probe head
Ø 18 mm probe head incl. transducer
M12 or PG
65
GTL720
GTL723
●
●
Ø 18 mm probe head
Ø 18 mm probe head incl. transducer
M12
M12
68
GTL737
●
Ø 59 probe head incl. transducer
M12
71
Errors and misprints excepted. Subject to technical modifications.
26
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Geräteübersicht
Design
Electric connection Page
Clamp-on
G ⅜ union nut
without thread
G ½ standard
G ½ flush mounted
G½
Process connection
M12
Type
Temperature probes (*optionally with transducer / integrated on-site display)
HTK12-I/U/F
●
M 12 mm – housing
HTK12-S
●
M 12 mm – housing
Ø 30 mm probe head
HTK30
●
HTK35
Accessories
Ø 45 mm probe head ,
with integrated on-site display
●
● GTL - Configuration tool
● GKEV-25/76
● GEMK-25/76
● APHG12
● APHK25
● APHZ18
● APHZ30-G12S
● APHK35-G12S
● WLP10S
● ECI-1
● KH-PV
Device configurator for GTL
Compression fitting for GTL
Compression fitting for GTL
Adapter sleeve
Weld-in sleeve
Weld-in sleeve
Weld-in sleeve for G ½ standard
Weld-in sleeve for G ½ standard
Heat transfer paste
Device configurator for HTK
Screened cables for HTK
M12
M12
M12
74
76
79
M12
82
85
● For further accessories see product information “GHMadapt / Accessories” in register: Process measuring technology in “Hygienic Design”
Errors and misprints excepted. Subject to technical modifications.
Overview head transducer
Head transducer RT 420
GTML1
Measuring input
PT100
PT100
Sensor connection
2-, 3- or 4-wire circuit
2-, 3-, or 4-wire circuit
Measuring range
-200..-825 °C, programmable
-40..+200 °C, programmable
Electrical connection
screw terminals
terminals with
cable connection
Output signal
4..20.mA, 2-wire technology
4..20 mA, 2-wire technology
Supply voltage UB
8..35 V DC
10..30 V DC
Perm burden RA
RA ≤ (UB - 8 V) / 0,023 A (RA in Ohm)
RA ≤ (UB -10 V) / 0,023 A
Working temperature
-40..+85 °C
-40..+70 °C
Display
none
with or without LCD display
Protection class
housing IP40, terminals IP10
-
Installation in RG59
exchangeable
not exchangeable
Miscellaneous
programmable via programming tool for RT420
programmable via GTL - Configurations tool or
via buttons (only with on-site display)
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
27
Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Temperature sensor
GTL 142
Tightening torque
: 5..10 Nm
Insertion length
: 50, 100, 150, 250 mm
Sensor head
: Ø 59 mm
Spacer
: length 100 mm
Thermowell and senor tip:
Ø 6 mm, Ø 4 mm
thermowell without taper
Ø 3 mm
thermowell Ø 6 mm and
sensor tip Ø 3 mm
Response time
: tip Ø 3 mm: T90 ≤ 1.5 s
tip Ø 4 mm: T90 ≤ 3.6 s
tip Ø 6 mm: T90 ≤ 7.4 s
Operating pressure
: max. 10 bar
Material
Sensor head
: 1.4305
Spacer
: 1.4305
Thermowell and
sensor tip
: 1.4404
Protection class
CE conformity
: IP67 / IP69K
: EN 61326-1:2013 / -2-3:2013
Transducer GTML1
Measuring range
GTL 142
standard
Power supply
Output
Output signal in case
of error
Filter
Response time
Ambient temperature
Accuracy
Temperature drift
GTL 142 with
spacer
● Hygienic M12 process connection
● Hygienic design and easy-to-sterilize measuring point
● Sensor completely made of stainless steel
Characteristic
: -10..+40 °C * / 0..50 °C * / 0..100 °C *
0..150 °C * / 0..200 °C *
or freely in range -20..200 °C **
: 10..30 V DC
: analog, 4..20 mA, 2-wire
: < 3.75 mA or > 21.5 mA, selectable *
: integrated low-pass, 4-step *
: < 150 ms (filter 0), < 300 ms (filter 1)
< 800 ms (filter 2), < 3 s (filter 3)
: -40..+70 °C
: < 0.2 % FS
: < 0.01 % FS / K
Transducer GTML1 with on-site display
Transducer with integrated on-site display (LCD) only in combination with electric connection: cable connection M12 plug and integrated transducer (for further information see transducer GTML1).
Display
:
Displayed unit
:
Resolution
:
Background illumination :
Ambient temperature
:
4-digit LCD
°C or °F, selectable *
0.1 °C or 1 °C, selectable *
activatable, deactivatable *
-20..+60 °C
The temperature sensor GTL 142 is designed for temperature measurements in pipes or thin-walled tanks.
They can be used for example for process monitoring at tube curvatures, temperature measurements in pressure pipes or at measurements of pasty media in pipes.
The probes can be provided with different electric connections and
with or without integrated head transmitter. The probes of design
type “with neck tube” are applicable at permanent ambient temperatures up to 200 °C.
Specifications
Temperature ranges
Measuring resistor
Accuracy
Electrical connection
Process connection
*
**
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories) or
buttons (only with on-site display)
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories)
Note: The default settings are marked in bold.
: ambient:
-40..+80 °C
process:
-40..+200 °C
CIP- / SIP-temperature:140 °C < 30 min.
: Pt100
: class A, class AA
: cable gland M16x1.5
M12 plug (1.4305)
: hygienic M12
28
pi_gr_GTL142_e V2.01-00
continued on next page
1
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Temperature
Dimensions
GTL 142
Thermowell
Connection
Electrical connection: cable gland M16x1.5 (PG)
with transducer (2-wire):
Immersion length
without transducer (4-wire):
1: auxiliary voltage +
2: auxiliary voltage - / output
Clamps for Pt100
GTL 142 with spacer
Electrical connection: M12-plug (1.4305)
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
auxiliary
voltage - /
output
Immersion length
20
100
auxiliary
voltage +
continued on next page
2
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
29
pi_gr_GTL142_e V2.01-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product key
1.
GTL
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
1.
Design type
2.
Electric connection
3.
142
P
V
M
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
9.
-
with hygienic M12 process connection
Information on suitable weld-in sleeves can be found in product information GHMadapt/Accessories.
cable gland M16x1.5
V2A cable gland M16x1.5
M12-plug
Immersion length EL
0020
0050
0100
0150
0250
xxxx
20 mm
50 mm
100 mm
150 mm
250 mm
any EL in mm (surcharge from 250 mm for each
100 mm started, up to max. immersion length:
Ø 6: max. 1000 mm; Ø 4: max. 500 mm)
4.
Diameter thermowell and sensor tip
5.
Accuracy class
6.
Transducer
6
4
3
A
D
0
M
V
R
T
7.
8.
-
Notes on on-site display (LCD):
Permanently integrated transducer GTML1 (programmable) with
on-site display only in combination with electrical connection: cable
connection M12 plug.
Ø 6 mm, without taper
Ø 4 mm, without taper
Ø 6 mm, with tapered probe tip Ø 3 mm
class A
class AA (1/3 class B)
without transducer
permanently integrated transducer GTML1,
without display
permanently integrated transducer GTML1,
on-site display (LCD)
exchangeable head transducer RT420
exchangeable head transducer T19
Measuring range
0
1
2
3
4
5
B
without transducer
measuring range -10..+40 °C
(-50..+50 °C for head transducer T19)
measuring range 0..50 °C
measuring range 0..100 °C
measuring range 0..150 °C
measuring range 0..200 °C
transducer with special measuring range in °C (not
possible for head transducer T19),
state special measuring range separately e.g.: 0..75
°C or -20..+30 °C; Mind the minimum range of 50 °C.
8.
Option
9.
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
00
H
WZ2.2
APZMAT
APZ2P
APZ3P
APZ4P
without option
with spacer
factory certification 2.2
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 2 measuring
points (0°C / 70°C)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 3 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 1 test point freely
selectable)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 4 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 2 test points freely
selectable)
30
pi_gr_GTL142_e V2.01-00
3
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Tightening torque
: 5..10 Nm
Insertion length
: 50, 100, 150 or 250 mm
Sensor head
: Ø 18 mm
Thermowell and sensor tip:
Ø 6 mm, Ø 4 mm
Thermowell without taper
Ø 3 mm
Thermowell Ø 6 mm and
sensor tip Ø 3 mm
Response time
: tip Ø 3 mm: T90 ≤ 1.5 s
tip Ø 4 mm: T90 ≤ 3.6 s
tip Ø 6 mm: T90 ≤ 7.4 s
Operating pressure
: max. 10 bar
Material
Sensor head
: 1.4305 (V2A)
Thermowell and
sensor tip
: 1.4404 (V4A)
Protection class
CE conformity
Temperature
Temperature sensor
GTL 162 / 162M
GTL 182 / 182M
: IP67 / IP69K
: EN 61326-1:2013 / -2-3:2013
Design type
GTL 162 / 162M
Electrical connection M12-plug, 4-pin
(1.4305)
GTL 182 / 182M
fixed cable 2.5 m,
PVC LIYY
182: 4 x 0.25 mm²
182M: 2 x 0.25 mm²
Transducer GTML2 (only for GTL 162M / GTL 182M)
Measuring range
GTL 162M
GTL 182
GTL 162
GTL 182M
● Hygienic M12 process connection
● Hygienic design and easy-to-sterilize measuring point
● Sensor completely made of stainless steel
Power supply
Output
Output signal in case
of error
Filter
Response time
Ambient temperature
Accuracy
Temperature drift
*
: -10..+40 °C * / 0..50 °C * / 0..100 °C *
0..150 °C * / 0..200 °C *
or freely in range -20..200 °C *
: 10..30 V DC
: analog, 4..20 mA, 2-wire
: < 3.75 mA or > 21.5 mA, selectable *
: integrated low-pass, 4-step *
: < 150 ms (filter 0), < 300 ms (filter 1)
< 800 ms (filter 2), < 3 s (filter 3)
: -40..+70 °C
: < 0.2 % FS
: < 0.01 % FS / K
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories)
Note: The default settings are marked in bold.
Characteristic
The temperature sensors are designed for temperature measurements in pipes or thin-walled tanks.
They can be used for example for process monitoring at tube curvatures, temperature measurements in pressure pipes or at measurements of pasty media in pipes.
The sensors can be provided with different electric connections and
with or without integrated head transmitter.
Specifications
Temperature ranges
Measuring resistor
Accuracy
: ambiance:
-40..+80 °C
probe tip:
-40..+200 °C
CIP- / SIP-temperature:140 °C < 30 min.
: Pt100
: class A, class AA
Process connection
: hygienic M12
pi_gr_GTL162_182_e V4.00-00
V2.01-00
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
continued on next page
31
1
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Dimensions
GTL 162
GTL 162M
Thermowell
Immersion length
Immersion length
Connection
GTL 182
Design type GTL 162 or GTL 162M:
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
auxiliary
voltage -
GTL 182M
Design type GTL 182 or GTL 182M:
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
auxiliary
voltage +
auxiliary
voltage - /
output
Options
Immersion length
Immersion length
TK
Design type GTL 182 and GTL 182M with Teflon cable
GTL 182: 4 x 0.14 mm²
GTL 182M: 2 x 0.14 mm²
Teflon cable up to 200 °C
continued on next page
32
2
pi_gr_GTL162_182_e
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V2.01-00
V4.00-00
Product key
1.
GTL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
Information on suitable weld-in sleeves can be found in product information GHMadapt/Accessories.
-
Design type
162
M12-plug, without integrated transducer
162M
M12-plug, with integrated transducer
182
fixed cable (PVC) connection 2.5m,
without integrated transducer
182M
fixed cable (PVC) connection 2.5m,
with integrated transducer
Insertion length EL
0020
20 mm
0050
50 mm
0100
100 mm
0150
150 mm
0250
250 mm
xxxx
any EL in mm
(surcharge from 250 mm for each 100 mm
started, up to max. insertion length:
Ø 6: max. 1000 mm
Ø 4: max. 500 mm)
Diameter thermowell and sensor tip
6
Ø 6 mm, without taper
4
Ø 4 mm, without taper
3
Ø 6 mm, with tapered sensor tip Ø 3 mm
Accuracy class
A
class A
D
class AA (1/3 class B)
Transducer GTML2 (programmable)
ONLY for design types 162M and 182M
00
without transducer (design types 162 / 182)
M1
measuring range -10..+40 °C
M2
measuring range 0..50 °C
M3
measuring range 0..100 °C
M4
measuring range 0..150 °C
M5
measuring range 0..200 °C
MB
transducer with special measuring range in °C
(state special measuring range separately e.g.:
0..75 °C or -20..+30 °C)
Mind the minimum range of 50 °C.
Option
00
without option
H
with neck tube
TK
Teflon cable for connection via fixed cable
(only available for GTL 182 / 182M)
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
APZMAT
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
APZ2P
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 2 measuring
points (0°C / 70°C)
APZ3P
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 3 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 1 test point freely
selectable)
APZ4P
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 4 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 2 test points freely
selectable)
pi_gr_GTL162_182_e V4.00-00
V2.01-00
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
33
3
Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Temperature probe
GTL 240
Specifications
Temperature ranges
Measuring resistor
Accuracy
Electric connection
: ambiance:
-40..+80 °C
probe tip:
-40..+200 °C
CIP- / SIP-temperature:140 °C < 30 min.
: Pt100
: class A, class AA
: G ½” standard
suitable weld-in sleeves
APHZ30-G12S, APHK35-G12S
(see accessories)
Fitting length
: 50, 100, 150, 250 mm
Probe head
: Ø 59 mm
Neck tube
: length 100 mm
Protection tube and probe tip:
Ø 6 mm
protection tube Ø 6 mm without taper
Ø 3 mm
protection tube Ø 6 mm and tapered
probe tip Ø 3 mm
Response time
: FS Ø 3 mm: T90 ≤ 1.5 s
FS Ø 6 mm: T90 ≤ 7.4 s
Working pressure
: max. 10 bar
Material
Probe head
: 1.4305
Neck tube
: 1.4305
Protection tube and tip : 1.4404
GTL 240
standard
Protection class
CE conformity
: IP67 / IP69K
: EN 61326-1:2013 / -2-3:2013
Transducer GTML1
GTL 240
with neck
tube
● G ½” standard process connection hygienic
● Sensor completely made of stainless steel
Characteristic
The temperature probes are designed for temperature monitoring in
pipes and tanks, temperature measurements in steam and pressure pipes and for monitoring of CIP- / SIP- processes.
Integrated head transmitter
Measuring range
: -10..+40 °C * / 0..50 °C * / 0..100 °C *
0..150 °C * / 0..200 °C *
or freely in range -20..200 °C **
Power supply
: 10..30 V DC
Measuring output
: analog, 4..20 mA, 2-wire
Output signal in case
of error
: < 3.75 mA or > 21.5 mA, selectable *
Filter
: integrated low-pass, 4-step *
Reaction time
: < 150 ms (filter 0), < 300 ms (filter 1)
< 800 ms (filter 2), < 3 s (filter 3)
Working temperature
: -40..+70 °C
Accuracy
: < 0.2 % FS
Temperature drift
: < 0.01 % FS / K
Suitable weld-in sleeves ensures disassembling of the temperature
probe without process opening or interruption.
The probes can be provided with different electric connections and
with or without integrated head transmitter.
continued on next page
34
pi_gr_GTL240_e V1.01-00
1
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Temperature
Transducer GTML1 with on-site display
Transducer with integrated on-site display (LCD) only in combination with electric connection: cable connection M12 plug and integrated transducer (for further information see transducer GTML1).
Display
:
Displayed unit
:
Resolution
:
Background illumination :
Working temperature
:
4-digit LCD
°C or °F, selectable *
0.1 °C or 1 °C, selectable *
activatable, deactivatable *
-20..+60 °C
Connection
Electric connection: cable screwing M16x1.5 (PG)
without transducer (4-wire):
*
**
with transducer (2-wire):
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories) or
buttons (only with on-site display)
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories)
Note: The default settings are marked in bold.
Dimensions
GTL 240
standard
Electric connection: cable connection M12-plug (1.4305)
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
GTL 240 with neck tube
continued on next page
2
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
35
pi_gr_GTL240_e V1.01-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product key
1.
GTL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
9.
-
Notes on on-site display (LCD):
Permanently integrated transducer GTML1 (programmable) with
on-site display only in combination with electric connection: cable
connection M12 plug.
Information on suitable weld-in sleeves can be found in product information GHMadapt/Accessories.
Design type
240
without neck tube
Electric connection
P
cable screwing M16x1.5 (PG)
V
V2A cable screwing M16x1.5 (PG)
M
cable connection M12-plug
Immersion length TL
0050
50 mm
0100
100 mm
0150
150 mm
0250
250 mm
xxxx
any EL in mm (e.g. 320 = 320 mm)
Ø 6: max. 1000 mm
Diameter protection tube and probe tip
6
Ø 6 mm, without taper
3
Ø 6 mm, with tapered probe tip Ø 3 mm
Accuracy class
A
class A
D
class AA (1/3 class B)
Transducer
0
without transducer
M
permanently integrated transducer GTML1,
without display
V
permanently integrated transducer GTML1,
on-site display (LCD)
R
exchangeable head transducer RT420
T
exchangeable head transducer T19
Measuring range
0
without transducer
1
measuring range -10..+40 °C
(-50..+50 °C for head transducer T19)
2
measuring range 0..50 °C
3
measuring range 0..100 °C
4
measuring range 0..150 °C
5
measuring range 0..200 °C
B
transducer with special measuring range in °C
(not possible for head transducer T19),
state special measuring range separately e.g.:
0..75 °C or -20..+30 °C
Mind the minimum range of 50 °C.
Option
00
without option
H
with neck tube (100 mm)
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
WZ2.2
APZMAT
APZ2P
APZ3P
APZ4P
factory certification 2.2
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 2 measuring
points (0°C / 70°C)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 3 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 1 test point freely
selectable)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 4 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 2 test points freely
selectable)
36
pi_gr_GTL240_e V1.01-00
3
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Temperature probe
GTL 260 / 260M
GTL 280 / 280M
Specifications
Temperature ranges
: ambiance:
-40..+80 °C
probe tip:
-40..+200 °C
CIP- / SIP-temperature:140 °C < 30 min.
: Pt100
: class A, class AA
: G ½” standard hygienic
suitable weld-in sleeves
APHZ30-G12S, APHK35-G12S
(see accessories)
Measuring resistor
Accuracy
Electric connection
Fitting length
: 50, 100, 150, 250 mm
Probe head
: Ø 18 mm
Protection tube and probe tip:
Ø 6 mm
protection tube Ø 6 mm without taper
Ø 3 mm
protection tube Ø 6 mm and tapered
probe tip Ø 3 mm
Response time
: FS Ø 3 mm: T90 ≤ 1.5 s
FS Ø 6 mm: T90 ≤ 7.4 s
Working pressure
: max. 10 bar
Material
Probe head
: 1.4305
Protection tube and tip : 1.4404
Protection class
CE conformity
: IP67 / IP69K
: EN 61326-1:2013 / -2-3:2013
Design types
Electric connection
GTL 260M
GTL 280M
● G ½” standard process connection hygienic
● Sensor completely made of stainless steel
Characteristic
The temperature probes are designed for temperature monitoring in
pipes and tanks, temperature measurements in steam and pressure pipes and for monitoring of CIP- / SIP- processes.
Suitable weld-in sleeves ensures disassembling of the temperature
probe without process opening or interruption.
The probes can be provided with different electric connections and
with or without integrated head transmitter.
GTL 260 / 260M
GTL 280 / 280M
cable connection
M12-plug, 4-pin
(1.4305)
fixed cable 2.5 m,
PVC LIYY
281: 4 x 0.25 mm²
281M: 2 x 0.25 mm²
Transducer GTML2 (only for GTL 260M / GTL 280M)
Integrated head transmitter
Measuring range
: -10..+40 °C * / 0..50 °C * / 0..100 °C *
0..150 °C * / 0..200 °C *
or freely in range -20..200 °C *
Power supply
: 10..30 V DC
Measuring output
: analog, 4..20 mA, 2-wire
Output signal in case
of error
: < 3.75 mA or > 21.5 mA, selectable *
Filter
: integrated low-pass, 4-step *
Reaction time
: < 150 ms (filter 0), < 300 ms (filter 1)
< 800 ms (filter 2), < 3 s (filter 3)
Working temperature
: -40..+70 °C
Measurement accuracy : < 0.2 % FS
Temperature drift
: < 0.01 % FS / K
*
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories)
Note: The default settings are marked in bold.
continued on next page
pi_gr_GTL260_280_e V4.00-00
V1.01-00
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
37
1
Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Dimensions
GTL 260
Connection
GTL 260M
Design type GTL 260 or GTL 260M:
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
Design type GTL 280 or GTL 280M:
without transducer (4-wire):
GTL 280
with transducer (2-wire):
GTL 280M
Option
TK
Design type GTL 280 and GTL 280M with Teflon cable
GTL 280: 4 x 0.14 mm²
GTL 280M: 2 x 0.14 mm²
Teflon cable up to 200 °C
continued on next page
38
2
pi_gr_GTL260_280_e
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V1.01-00
V4.00-00
Product key
1.
GTL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Information on suitable weld-in sleeves can be found in product information GHMadapt/Accessories.
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
Design type
260
cable connection M12-plug,
without integrated transducer
260M
cable connection M12-plug
with integrated transducer
280
fixed cable (PVC) connection 2.5m,
without integrated transducer
280M
fixed cable (PVC) connection 2.5m,
with integrated transducer
Immersion length TL
0050
50 mm
0100
100 mm
0150
150 mm
0250
250 mm
xxxx
any EL in mm
(e.g. 320 = 320 mm)
Ø 6: max. 1000 mm
Diameter protection tube and probe tip
6
Ø 6 mm, without taper
3
Ø 6 mm, with tapered probe tip Ø 3 mm
Accuracy class
A
class A
D
class AA (1/3 class B)
Transducer GTML2 (programmable)
ONLY for design types 260M and 280M
00
without transducer (design types 260 / 280)
M1
measuring range -10..+40 °C
M2
measuring range 0..50 °C
M3
measuring range 0..100 °C
M4
measuring range 0..150 °C
M5
measuring range 0..200 °C
MB
transducer with special measuring range in °C
(state special measuring range separately e.g.:
0..75 °C or -20..+30 °C
Mind the minimum range of 50 °C.)
Option
00
without option
H
with neck tube
TK
Teflon cable for connection via fixed cable
(only available for GTL 280 / 280M)
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
WZ2.2
APZMAT
APZ2P
APZ3P
APZ4P
factory certification 2.2
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 2 measuring
points (0°C / 70°C)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 3 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 1 test point freely
selectable)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 4 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 2 test points freely
selectable)
pi_gr_GTL260_280_e V4.00-00
V1.01-00
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
39
3
Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Temperature probe
GTL 241
Process connection
: G½
Clamping torque
: 5..20 Nm
Fitting length
: 50, 100, 150, 250 mm
Probe head
: Ø 59 mm
Neck tube
: length 100 mm
Protection tube and probe tip:
Ø 6 mm
protection tube Ø 6 mm without taper
Ø 3 mm
protection tube Ø 6 mm and tapered
probe tip Ø 3 mm
Response time
: FS Ø 3 mm: T90 ≤ 1.5 s
FS Ø 6 mm: T90 ≤ 7.4 s
Working pressure
: max. 10 bar
Material
Probe head
: 1.4305
Neck tube
: 1.4305
Protection tube and tip : 1.4404
Protection class
CE conformity
: IP67 / IP69K
: EN 61326-1:2013 / -2-3:2013
Transducer GTML1
Integrated head transmitter
Measuring range
: -10..+40 °C * / 0..50 °C * / 0..100 °C *
0..150 °C * / 0..200 °C *
or freely in range -20..200 °C **
Power supply
: 10..30 V DC
Measuring output
: analog, 4..20 mA, 2-wire
Output signal in case
of error
: < 3.75 mA or > 21.5 mA, selectable *
Filter
: integrated low-pass, 4-step *
Reaction time
: < 150 ms (filter 0), < 300 ms (filter 1)
< 800 ms (filter 2), < 3 s (filter 3)
Working temperature
: -40..+70 °C
Accuracy
: < 0.2 % FS
Temperature drift
: < 0.01 % FS / K
GTL 241
standard
Transducer GTML1 with on-site display
GTL 241
with neck
tube
● G ½” standard process connection hygienic
● Hygienic design and easy-to-sterilize measuring point
● Sensor completely made of stainless steel
Transducer with integrated on-site display (LCD) only in combination with electric connection: cable connection M12 plug and integrated transducer (for further information see transducer GTML1).
Display
:
Displayed unit
:
Resolution
:
Background illumination :
Working temperature
:
4-digit LCD
°C or °F, selectable *
0.1 °C or 1 °C, selectable *
activatable, deactivatable *
-20..+60 °C
Characteristic
The temperature probes GTL 241 and GTL 251 are designed for
temperature measurements in pipes or tanks.
They can be used for example for monitoring the CIP / SIP procedures or temperature measurements in milk tanks.
The probes can be provided with different electric connections and
with or without integrated head transmitter. The probes of design
type “with neck tube” are applicable at permanent ambient temperatures up to 200 °C.
Measuring resistor
Accuracy
Electric connection
**
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories) or
buttons (only with on-site display)
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories)
Note: The default settings are marked in bold.
Specifications
Temperature ranges
*
: ambiance:
-40..+80 °C
probe tip:
-40..+200 °C
CIP- / SIP-temperature:140 °C < 30 min.
: Pt100
: class A, class AA
: cable screwing M16x1.5 (PG)
cable connection M12- plug (1.4305)
40
pi_gr_GTL241_e V2.01-00
1
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Temperature
Dimensions
GTL 241
standard
Connection
Electric connection: cable screwing M16x1.5 (PG)
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
GTL 241 with neck tube
Electric connection: cable connection M12-plug (1.4305)
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
continued on next page
2
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
41
pi_gr_GTL241_e V2.01-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product key
1.
GTL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
9.
-
Design type
241
without neck tube
Electric connection
P
cable screwing M16x1.5 (PG)
V
V2A cable screwing M16x1.5 (PG)
M
cable connection M12-plug
Fitting length EL
0050
50 mm
0100
100 mm
0150
150 mm
0250
250 mm
xxxx
any EL in mm
(surcharge from 250 mm for each 100 mm
started, up to max. fitting length:
Ø 6: max. 1000 mm)
Diameter protection tube and probe tip
6
Ø 6 mm, without taper
3
Ø 6 mm, with tapered probe tip Ø 3 mm
Accuracy class
A
class A
D
class AA (1/3 class B)
Transducer
0
without transducer
M
permanently integrated transducer GTML1,
without display
V
permanently integrated transducer GTML1,
on-site display (LCD)
R
exchangeable head transducer RT420
T
exchangeable head transducer T19
Measuring range
0
without transducer
1
measuring range -10..+40 °C
(-50..+50 °C for head transducer T19)
2
measuring range 0..50 °C
3
measuring range 0..100 °C
4
measuring range 0..150 °C
5
measuring range 0..200 °C
B
transducer with special measuring range in °C
(not possible for head transducer T19),
state special measuring range separately e.g.:
0..75 °C or -20..+30 °C
Mind the minimum range of 50 °C.
Option
00
without Option
H
with neck tube
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
WZ2.2
APZMAT
APZ2P
APZ3P
APZ4P
Notes on on-site display (LCD):
Permanently integrated transducer GTML1 (programmable) with
on-site display only in combination with electric connection: cable
connection M12 plug.
Information on suitable weld-in sleeves can be found in product information GHMadapt/Accessories.
factory certification 2.2
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 2 measuring
points (0°C / 70°C)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 3 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 1 test point freely
selectable)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 4 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 2 test points freely
selectable)
42
pi_gr_GTL241_e V2.01-00
3
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Accuracy
: class A, class AA
Electric connection
: G ½”
Clamping torque
: 5..20 Nm
Fitting length
: 50, 100, 150, 250 mm
Probe head
: Ø 18 mm
Protection tube and probe tip:
Ø 6 mm
protection tube Ø 6 mm without taper
Ø 3 mm
protection tube Ø 6 mm and tapered
probe tip Ø 3 mm
Response time
: FS Ø 3 mm: T90 ≤ 1.5 s
FS Ø 6 mm: T90 ≤ 7.4 s
Working pressure
: max. 10 bar
Material
Probe head
: 1.4305
Protection tube and tip : 1.4404
Protection class
CE conformity
Temperature
Temperature probe
GTL 261 / 261M
GTL 281 / 281M
: IP67 / IP69K
: EN 61326-1:2013 / -2-3:2013
Design types
Electric connection
GTL 261 / 261M
GTL 281 / 281M
cable connection
M12-plug, 4-pin
(1.4305)
fixed cable 2.5 m,
PVC LIYY
281: 4 x 0.25 mm²
281M: 2 x 0.25 mm²
Transducer GTML2 (only for GTL 261M / GTL 281M)
GTL 261
GTL 261M
GTL 281
GTL 281M
Integrated head transmitter
Measuring range
: -10..+40 °C * / 0..50 °C * / 0..100 °C *
0..150 °C * / 0..200 °C *
or freely in range -20..200 °C *
Power supply
: 10..30 V DC
Measuring output
: analog, 4..20 mA, 2-wire
Output signal in case
of error
: < 3.75 mA or > 21.5 mA, selectable *
Filter
: integrated low-pass, 4-step *
Reaction time
: < 150 ms (filter 0), < 300 ms (filter 1)
< 800 ms (filter 2), < 3 s (filter 3)
Working temperature
: -40..+70 °C
Measurement accuracy : < 0.2 % FS
Temperature drift
: < 0.01 % FS / K
*
● G ½” process connection hygienic
● Hygienic design and easy-to-sterilize measuring point
● Sensor completely made of stainless steel
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories)
Note: The default settings are marked in bold.
Characteristic
The temperature probes are designed for temperature measurements in pipes or tanks.
They can be used for example for monitoring the CIP / SIP procedures or temperature measurements in milk tanks.
The probes can be provided with different electric connections and
with or without integrated head transmitter.
Specifications
Temperature ranges
Measuring resistor
: ambiance:
-40..+80 °C
probe tip:
-40..+200 °C
CIP- / SIP-temperature:140 °C < 30 min.
: Pt100
pi_gr_GTL261_281_e V4.00-00
V2.01-00
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
continued on next page
43
1
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Dimensions
GTL 261
GTL 261M
Connection
Design type GTL 261 or GTL 261M:
without transducer (4-wire):
GTL 281
GTL 281M
with transducer (2-wire):
Design type GTL 281 or GTL 281M:
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
Option
TK
44
2
Design type GTL 281 and GTL 281M with Teflon cable
GTL 280: 4 x 0.14 mm²
GTL 280M: 2 x 0.14 mm²
Teflon cable up to 200 °C
pi_gr_GTL261_281_e
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V2.01-00
V4.00-00
Product key
1.
GTL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Information on suitable weld-in sleeves can be found in product information GHMadapt/Accessories.
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
Design type
261
cable connection M12-plug,
without integrated transducer
261M
cable connection M12-plug
with integrated transducer
281
fixed cable (PVC) connection 2.5m,
without integrated transducer
281M
fixed cable (PVC) connection 2.5m,
with integrated transducer
Fitting length EL
0050
50 mm
0100
100 mm
0150
150 mm
0250
250 mm
xxxx
any EL in mm
(surcharge from 250 mm for each 100 mm
started, up to max. fitting length:
Ø 6: max. 1000 mm)
Diameter protection tube and probe tip
6
Ø 6 mm, without taper
3
Ø 6 mm, with tapered probe tip Ø 3 mm
Accuracy class
A
class A
D
class AA (1/3 class B)
Transducer GTML2 (programmable)
ONLY for design types 261M and 281M
00
without transducer (design types 261 / 281)
M1
measuring range -10..+40 °C
M2
measuring range 0..50 °C
M3
measuring range 0..100 °C
M4
measuring range 0..150 °C
M5
measuring range 0..200 °C
MB
transducer with special measuring range in °C
(state special measuring range separately e.g.:
0..75 °C or -20..+30 °C
Mind the minimum range of 50 °C.)
Option
00
without option
H
with neck tube (100 mm)
TK
Teflon cable for connection via fixed cable
(only available for GTL 281 / 281M)
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
WZ2.2
APZMAT
APZ2P
APZ3P
APZ4P
factory certification 2.2
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 2 measuring
points (0°C / 70°C)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 3 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 1 test point freely
selectable)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 4 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 2 test points freely
selectable)
pi_gr_GTL261_281_e V4.00-00
V2.01-00
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
45
3
Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Temperature probe
GTL 244
Material
Probe head
Tip
: 1.4305
: 1.4404, PEEK
Protection class
CE conformity
: IP67 / IP69K
: EN 61326-1:2013 / -2-3:2013
Transducer GTML1
Integrated head transmitter
Measuring range
: -10..+40 °C * / 0..50 °C * / 0..100 °C *
0..150 °C *
or freely in range -20..150 °C **
Power supply
: 10..30 V DC
Measuring output
: analog, 4..20 mA, 2-wire
Output signal in case
of error
: < 3.75 mA or > 21.5 mA, selectable *
Filter
: integrated low-pass, 4-step *
Reaction time
: < 150 ms (filter 0), < 300 ms (filter 1)
< 800 ms (filter 2), < 3 s (filter 3)
Working temperature
: -40..+70 °C
Accuracy
: < 0.2 % FS
Temperature drift
: < 0.01 % FS / K
Transducer GTML1 with on-site display
Transducer with integrated on-site display (LCD) only in combination with electric connection: cable connection M12 plug and integrated transducer (for further information see transducer GTML1).
Display
:
Displayed unit
:
Resolution
:
Background illumination :
Working temperature
:
4-digit LCD
°C or °F, selectable *
0.1 °C or 1 °C, selectable *
activatable, deactivatable *
-20..+60 °C
● Hygienic design and easy-to-sterilize measuring point
● Sensor made of stainless steel and PEEK
● Thermally decoupled
Characteristic
The flush mounted temperature probes are designed for e.g. temperature monitoring in CIP- / SIP- circuits and temperature measurements in tanks with stirrer or in milk tanks.
The probes can be provided with or without integrated head transmitter.
Measuring resistor
Accuracy
Electric connection
Process connection
Clamping torque
Probe head
Probe tip
Response time
Working pressure
**
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories) or
buttons (only with on-site display)
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories)
Note: The default settings are marked in bold.
Specifications
Temperature ranges
*
: ambiance:
-40..+80 °C
probe tip:
-40..+150 °C
CIP- / SIP-temperature:140 °C < 30 min.
: Pt100
: class A, class AA
: cable screwing M16x1.5 (PG)
cable connection M12- plug (1.4305)
: G ½” hygienic
: 5..10 Nm
: Ø 59 mm
: Ø 10 mm
: T90 ≤ 15 s
: max. 10 bar
continued on next page
46
pi_gr_GTL244_e V2.01-00
1
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Dimensions
Product key
1.
GTL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connection
5.
Electric connection: cable screwing M16x1.5 (PG)
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
6.
7.
2.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
Design type
244
G ½” flush mounted
Electric connection
P
cable screwing M16x1.5 (PG)
V
V2A cable screwing M16x1.5 (PG)
M
cable connection M12-plug
Accuracy class
A
class A
D
class AA (1/3 class B)
Transducer
0
without transducer
M
permanently integrated transducer GTML1,
without display
V
permanently integrated transducer GTML1,
on-site display (LCD)
R
exchangeable head transducer RT420
T
exchangeable head transducer T19
Measuring range
0
without transducer
1
measuring range -10..+40 °C
(-50..+50 °C for head transducer T19)
2
measuring range 0..50 °C
3
measuring range 0..100 °C
4
measuring range 0..150 °C
B
transducer with special measuring range in °C
(not possible for head transducer T19),
state special measuring range separately e.g.:
0..75 °C or -20..+30 °C
Mind the minimum range of 50 °C.
Option
00
without option
H
with neck tube
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
Electric connection: cable connection M12-plug (1.4305)
WZ2.2
APZMAT
without transducer (4-wire):
APZ2P
with transducer (2-wire):
3.
-
APZ3P
APZ4P
factory certification 2.2
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 2 measuring
points (0°C / 70°C)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 3 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 1 test point freely
selectable)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 4 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 2 test points freely
selectable)
Notes on on-site display (LCD):
Permanently integrated transducer GTML1 (programmable) with
on-site display only in combination with electric connection: cable
connection M12 plug.
Information on suitable weld-in sleeves can be found in product information GHMadapt/Accessories.
2
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
47
pi_gr_GTL244_e V2.01-00
Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Temperature sensor
GTL 264 / 264M
GTL 284 / 284M
Material
Sensor head
Sensor tip
: 1.4305
: 1.4404, PEEK
Protection class
CE conformity
: IP67 / IP69K
: EN 61326-1:2013 / -2-3:2013
Ausführungen
GTL 264 / 264M
Electrical connection M12-plug, 4-pin
(1.4305)
GTL 284 / 284M
fixed cable 2.5 m,
PVC LIYY
281: 4 x 0,25 mm²
281M: 2 x 0,25 mm²
Transducer GTML2 (only for GTL 264M / GTL 284M)
Measuring range
Power supply
Measuring output
Output signal in case
of error
Filter
Response time
GTL 264
GTL 264M
GTL 284
GTL 284M
: -10..+40 °C * / 0..50 °C * / 0..100 °C *
0..150 °C *
or freely in range -20..150 °C *
: 10..30 V DC
: analog, 4..20 mA, 2-wire
: < 3.75 mA or > 21.5 mA, selectable *
: integrated low-pass, 4-step *
: < 150 ms (filter 0), < 300 ms (filter 1)
< 800 ms (filter 2), < 3 s (filter 3)
Working temperature
: -40..+70 °C
Measurement accuracy : < 0.2 % FS
Temperature drift
: < 0.01 % FS / K
*
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories)
Note: The default settings are marked in bold.
Dimensions
●
●
●
●
Hygienic G ½” process connection, flush mounted
Hygienic design and easy-to-sterilize measuring point
Sensor made of stainless steel and PEEK
Thermally decoupled
Characteristic
The flush mounted temperature sensors are designed for e.g. temperature monitoring in CIP- / SIP- circuits and temperature measurements in tanks with stirrer or in milk tanks.
The sensors can be provided with different electric connections and
with or without integrated head transmitter.
Specifications
Temperature ranges
GTL 264
Measuring resistor
Accuracy
Process connection
Tightening torque
Sensor head
: ambiance:
-40..+80 °C
sensor tip:
-40..+150 °C
CIP- / SIP-temperature:140 °C < 30 min.
: Pt100
: class A, class AA
: G½
: 5..10 Nm
: Ø 18 mm
Sensor tip
Response time
Ambient pressure
: Ø 10 mm
: T90 ≤ 15 s
: max. 10 bar
48
pi_gr_GTL264_284_e V1.01-00
GTL 264M
continued on next page
1
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Option
Design type GTL 284 and GTL 284M with Teflon cable
GTL 284: 4 x 0.14 mm²
GTL 284M: 2 x 0.14 mm²
Teflon cable up to 200 °C
TK
Product key
1.
GTL
1.
2.
GTL 284
GTL 284M
3.
Connection
Design type GTL 264 or GTL 264M:
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
auxiliary
voltage +
auxiliary
voltage - /
output
4.
Design type GTL 284 or GTL 284M:
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
auxiliary
voltage +
auxiliary
voltage - /
output
5.
2.
-
4.
-
5.
-
Design type (electric connection)
264
cable connection M12-plug
264M
cable connection M12-plug
with integrated transducer
284
fixed cable (PVC) connection 2.5m,
without integrated transducer
284M
fixed cable (PVC) connection 2.5m,
with integrated transducer
Accuracy class
A
class A
D
class AA (1/3 class B)
Transducer GTML2 (programmable)
ONLY for design types 264M and 284M
00
without transducer (design types 264 / 284)
M1
measuring range -10..+40 °C
M2
measuring range 0..50 °C
M3
measuring range 0..100 °C
M4
measuring range 0..150 °C
MB
transducer with special measuring range in °C,
max range: -20...+150 °C
(state special measuring range separately e.g.:
0..75 °C or -20..+30 °C
Mind the minimum range of 50 °C.)
Option
00
without option
H
with spacer (100 mm)
TK
Teflon cable for connection via fixed cable
(only available for GTL 284 / 284M)
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
WZ2.2
APZMAT
APZ2P
APZ3P
2
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
3.
-
factory certification 2.2
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 2 measuring
points (0°C / 70°C)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 3 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 1 test point freely
selectable)
49
pi_gr_GTL264_284_e V1.01-00
Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Temperature probe
GTL 263 / 263M
Transducer GTML2 GTML2 (only for GTL 263M)
Integrated head transmitter
Measuring range
: -10..+40 °C * / 0..50 °C * / 0..100 °C *
0..150 °C *
or freely in range -20..150 °C *
Power supply
: 10..30 V DC
Measuring output
: analog, 4..20 mA, 2-wire
Output signal in case
of error
: < 3.75 mA or > 21.5 mA, selectable *
Filter
: integrated low-pass, 4-step *
Reaction time
: < 150 ms (filter 0), < 300 ms (filter 1)
< 800 ms (filter 2), < 3 s (filter 3)
Working temperature
: -40..+70 °C
Measurement accuracy : < 0.2 % FS
Temperature drift
: < 0.01 % FS / K
*
GTL 263M
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories)
Note: The default settings are marked in bold.
Dimensions
● G ½” process connection hygienic, flush mounted
● Sensor made of stainless steel and PEEK
● Thermally decoupled
Characteristic
The flush mounted temperature probes with short sensor tip are designed for e.g. temperature measurements or monitoring in tanks
with stirrer or for operation monitoring of pumps.
The probes can be provided with or without integrated head transmitter.
Specifications
Temperature ranges
Measuring resistor
Accuracy
Process connection
Clamping torque
Probe head
: ambiance:
-40..+80 °C
probe tip:
-40..+150 °C
CIP- / SIP-temperature:140 °C < 30 min.
: Pt100
: class A, class AA
: G ½” hygienic
: 5..10 Nm
: Ø 18 mm
Probe tip
Response time
Working pressure
Material
Probe head
Tip
: Ø 10 mm
: T90 ≤ 15 s
: max. 10 bar
Protection class
CE conformity
: IP67 / IP69K
: EN 61326-1:2013 / -2-3:2013
Connection
Design type GTL 263 or GTL 263M:
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
: 1.4305
: 1.4404, PEEK
Design types
GTL 263 / 263M
Electric connection
cable connection M12-plug, 4-pin (1.4305)
continued on next page
50
pi_gr_GTL263_263_e V1.01-00
1
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
1.
GTL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
Temperature
Product key
5.
-
Design type (electric connection)
263
cable connection M12-plug
263M
cable connection M12-plug
with integrated transducer
Accuracy class
A
class A
D
class AA (1/3 class B)
Transducer GTML2 (programmable)
ONLY for design type 263M
00
without transducer (design types 263)
M1
measuring range -10..+40 °C
M2
measuring range 0..50 °C
M3
measuring range 0..100 °C
M4
measuring range 0..150 °C
MB
transducer with special measuring range in °C,
max range: -20...+150 °C
(state special measuring range separately e.g.:
0..75 °C or -20..+30 °C
Mind the minimum range of 50 °C.)
Option
00
without option
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
WZ2.2
APZMAT
APZ2P
APZ3P
APZ4P
factory certification 2.2
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 2 measuring
points (0°C / 70°C)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 3 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 1 test point freely
selectable)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 4 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 2 test points freely
selectable)
2
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
51
pi_gr_GTL263_263_e V1.01-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Temperature sensor
GTL 349
Process connection
: no thread
suitable weld-in sleeves e.g.:
GKEV-25/76, GEMK-25/76
( see accessories page 63)
Insertion length
: 50, 100, 150, 250 mm
Sensor head
: Ø 59 mm
Thermowell and sensor tip:
Ø 6 mm
thermowell Ø 6 mm without taper
Ø 3 mm
thermowell Ø 6 mm and sensor
tip Ø 3 mm
Response time
: tip Ø 3 mm: T90 ≤ 1.5 s
tip Ø 6 mm: T90 ≤ 7.4 s
Operating pressure
: max. 10 bar
Material
Sensor head
: 1.4305
Thermowell and
sensor tip
: 1.4404
Protection class
CE conformity
: IP67 / IP69K
: EN 61326-1:2013 / -2-3:2013
Transducer GMTL1
Measuring range
● Without tread
● Hygienic design and easy-to-sterilize measuring point
● Sensor completely made of stainless steel
Characteristic
The temperature sensor GTL 349 is designed for temperature measurements in pipes of different nominal diameters or thin-walled
tubes and tanks.
They can be used for example for process monitoring at tube curvatures, temperature measurements in pressure pipes or at measurements of pasty media in pipes
The fitting length can be varied by use of compression fitting. The
probes can be provided with different electric connections and with
or without integrated head transmitter.
Power supply
Output
Output signal in case
of error
Filter
Response time
Ambient temperature
Accuracy
Temperature drift
: -10..+40 °C * / 0..50 °C * / 0..100 °C *
0..150 °C * / 0..200 °C *
or freely in range -20..200 °C **
: 10..30 V DC
: analog, 4..20 mA, 2-wire
: < 3.75 mA or > 21.5 mA, selectable *
: integrated low-pass, 4-step *
: < 150 ms (filter 0), < 300 ms (filter 1)
< 800 ms (filter 2), < 3 s (filter 3)
: -40..+70 °C
: < 0.2 % FS
: < 0.01 % FS / K
Transducer GTML1 with on-site display
Transducer with integrated on-site display (LCD) only in combination with electric connection: cable connection M12 plug and integrated transducer (for further information see transducer GTML1).
Display
:
Displayed unit
:
Resolution
:
Background illumination :
Working temperature
:
4-digit LCD
°C or °F, selectable *
0.1 °C or 1 °C, selectable *
activatable, deactivatable *
-20..+60 °C
Specifications
Temperature ranges
Measuring resistor
Accuracy
Electrical connection
: ambiance
:
-40..+80 °C
sensor tip
:
-40..+200 °C
CIP- / SIP-temperature:140 °C < 30 min.
: Pt100
: class A, class AA
: cable gland M16x1.5
M12-plug (1.4305)
*
**
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories) or
buttons (only with on-site display)
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories)
Note: The default settings are marked in bold.
52
pi_gr_GTL349_e V2.01-00
1
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Dimensions
Product key
1.
GTL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Connection
Electrical connection: cable gland M16x1.5 (PG)
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
7.
Electrical connection: M12-plug (1.4305)
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
8.
9.
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
9.
-
Design type
349
without thread
Electrical connection
P
cable screwing M16x1.5 (PG)
V
V2A cable screwing M16x1.5 (PG)
M
cable connection M12-plug
Insertion length EL
0050
50 mm
0100
100 mm
0150
150 mm
0250
250 mm
xxxx
any EL in mm (surcharge from 250 mm for each
100 mm started, up to max. fitting length:
Ø 6: max. 1000 mm)
Diameter thermowell and sensor tip
6
Ø 6 mm, without taper
3
Ø 6 mm, with sensor tip Ø 3 mm
Accuracy class
A
class A
D
class AA (1/3 class B)
Transducer
0
without transducer
M
permanently integrated transducer GTML1,
without display
V
permanently integrated transducer GTML1,
on-site display (LCD)
R
exchangeable head transducer RT420
T
exchangeable head transducer T19
Measuring range
0
without transducer
1
measuring range -10..+40 °C
(-50..+50 °C for head transducer T19)
2
measuring range 0..50 °C
3
measuring range 0..100 °C
4
measuring range 0..150 °C
5
measuring range 0..200 °C
B
transducer with special measuring range in °C
(not possible for head transducer T19),
state special measuring range separately e.g.:
0..75 °C or -20..+30 °C
Mind the minimum range of 50 °C.
Option
0
without transducer
H
mit Halsrohr (100 mm)
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
WZ2.2
APZMAT
APZ2P
APZ3P
factory certification 2.2
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 2 measuring
points (0°C / 70°C)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 3 measuring points
(0°C, 70°C + 1 test point freely selectable)
Notes on on-site display (LCD):
Permanently integrated transducer GTML1 (programmable) with
on-site display only in combination with electrical connection: M12
plug. Information on suitable compression insertions can be found
in section Accessories.
2
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
53
pi_gr_GTL349_e V2.01-00
Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Temperature sensor
GTL 369 / 369M
GTL 389 / 389M
Process connection
: no thread
suitable weld-in sleeves e.g.:
GKEV-25/76, GEMK-25/76
Immersion length
: 50, 100, 150, 250 mm
Sensor head
: Ø 18 mm
Thermowell and sensor tip:
Ø 6 mm
thermowell Ø 6 mm without taper
Ø 3 mm
thermowell Ø 6 mm and
sensor tip Ø 3 mm
Response time
: FS Ø 3 mm: T90 ≤ 1.5 s
FS Ø 6 mm: T90 ≤ 7.4 s
Operating pressure
: max. 10 bar
Material
Sensor head
: 1.4305
Thermowell and tip
: 1.4404
Protection class
CE conformity
: IP67 / IP69K
: EN 61326-1:2013 / -2-3:2013
Design type
GTL 369
GTL 389
Electrical connection M12-plug, 4-pin
(1.4305)
fixed cable 2.5 m,
LIYY
389: 4 x 0,25 mm²
389M: 2 x 0,25 mm²
Transducer GTML2 (only for GTL 369M / GTL 389M)
GTL 369
Measuring range
GTL 389
GTL 369M
GTL 389M
● Without tread
● Hygienic design and easy-to-sterilize measuring point
● Sensor completely made of stainless steel
Characteristic
Power supply
Output
Output signal in case
of error
Filter
Response time
: -10..+40 °C * / 0..50 °C * / 0..100 °C *
0..150 °C * / 0..200 °C *
or freely in range -20..200 °C *
: 10..30 V DC
: analog, 4..20 mA, 2-wire
: < 3.75 mA or > 21.5 mA, selectable *
: integrated low-pass, 4-step *
: < 150 ms (filter 0), < 300 ms (filter 1)
< 800 ms (filter 2), < 3 s (filter 3)
Ambient temperature
: -40..+70 °C
Measurement accuracy : < 0.2 % FS
Temperature drift
: < 0.01 % FS / K
*
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories)
Note: The default settings are marked in bold.
The temperature senors are designed for temperature measurements in pipes of different nominal diameters or thin-walled tubes
and tanks.
They can be used for example for process monitoring at tube curvatures, temperature measurements in pressure pipes or at measurements of pasty media in pipes
The immersion length can be varied by use of compression fitting.
The probes can be provided with different electric connections and
with or without integrated head transmitter.
Specifications
Temperature ranges
Measuring resistor
Accuracy
: ambient
:
-40..+80 °C
sensor tip
:
-40..+200 °C
CIP- / SIP-temperature:140 °C < 30 min.
: Pt100
: class A, class AA
54
pi_gr_GTL369_389_e V2.01-00
continued on next page
1
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Dimensions
Connection
GTL 369M
GTL 369
Design type GTL 369 or GTL 369M:
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
auxiliary
voltage - /
output
Design type GTL 389 or GTL 389M:
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
Immersion length
Immersion length
auxiliary
voltage +
auxiliary
voltage +
auxiliary
voltage - /
output
GTL 389M
GTL 389
Option
Design type GTL 389 and GTL 389M with Teflon cable
GTL 389: 4 x 0.14 mm² / GTL 389M: 2 x 0.14 mm²
Teflon cable up to 200 °C
Immersion length
Immersion length
TK
continued on next page
2
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
55
pi_gr_GTL369_389_e V2.01-00
Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product key
1.
GTL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
Design type
369
cable connection M12-plug,
369M
cable connection M12-plug
with integrated transducer
389
fixed cable (PVC) connection 2.5m
389M
fixed cable (PVC) connection 2.5m,
with integrated transducer
Fitting length EL
0050
50 mm
0100
100 mm
0150
150 mm
0250
250 mm
xxxx
any EL in mm
(surcharge from 250 mm for each 100 mm
started, up to max. fitting length:
Ø 6: max. 1000 mm)
Diameter protection tube and probe tip
6
Ø 6 mm, without taper
3
Ø 6 mm, with tapered probe tip Ø 3 mm
Accuracy class
A
class A
D
class AA (1/3 class B)
Transducer GTML2 (programmable)
ONLY for design types 369M and 389M
00
without transducer (design types 369 / 389)
M1
measuring range -10..+40 °C
M2
measuring range 0..50 °C
M3
measuring range 0..100 °C
M4
measuring range 0..150 °C
M5
measuring range 0..200 °C
MB
transducer with special measuring range in °C
(state special measuring range separately e.g.:
0..75 °C or -20..+30 °C
Mind the minimum range of 50 °C.)
Option
00
without option
H
with spacer
TK
Teflon cable for connection via fixed cable
(only available for 389 and 389M)
(surcharge per meter)
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
WZ2.2
APZMAT
APZ2P
APZ3P
factory certification 2.2
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 2 measuring
points (0°C / 70°C)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 3 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 1 test point freely
selectable)
Information on suitable compression fittings can be found in section
Accessories.
56
pi_gr_GTL369_389_e V2.01-00
3
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Temperature sensor
GTL 459
Tightening torque
Insertion length
Sensor head
: hand-tight
: 37, 83, 97, 160 mm
: Ø 59 mm
Thermowell and sensor tip:
Ø 3 mm
: protection tube Ø 3 mm
Response time
: T90 ≤ 1.5 s (without immersion sleeve)
T90 ≤ 15 s (with immersion sleeve: The
use of heat transfer paste is recommended, because this can reduce the stated
time by up to 50 %)
Operating pressure
: max. 10 bar
Material
Sensor head
Thermowell and tip
Union nut
: 1.4305 (V2A)
: 1.4404 (V4A)
: 1.4408 (V4A)
Protection class
CE conformity
: IP67 / IP69K
: EN 61326-1:2013 / -2-3:2013
Transducer GMTL1
Measuring range
Power supply
Output
Output signal in case
of error
Filter
Response time
In combination
with APH G12
Ambient temperature
Accuracy
Temperature drift
● G 3/8 union nut
● Hygienic design and easy-to-sterilize measuring point
● Sensor completely made of stainless steel
Characteristic
The temperature sensor are designed for temperature monitoring in
pipes and tanks, temperature measurements in steam and pressure pipes (closed process) and for monitoring of CIP- / SIP- processes.
: -10..+40 °C * / 0..50 °C * / 0..100 °C *
0..150 °C * / 0..200 °C *
or freely in range -20..200 °C **
: 10..30 V DC
: analog, 4..20 mA, 2-wire
: < 3.75 mA or > 21.5 mA, selectable *
: integrated low-pass, 4-step *
: < 150 ms (filter 0), < 300 ms (filter 1)
< 800 ms (filter 2), < 3 s (filter 3)
: -40..+70 °C
: < 0.2 % FS
: < 0.01 % FS / K
Transducer GTML1 with on-site display
Transducer with integrated on-site display (LCD) only in combination with electric connection: cable connection M12 plug and integrated transducer (for further information see transducer GTML1).
Display
:
Displayed unit
:
Resolution
:
Background illumination :
Ambient temperature
:
4-digit LCD
°C or °F, selectable *
0.1 °C or 1 °C, selectable *
activatable, deactivatable *
-20..+60 °C
The sensor can be provided with different electric connections and
with or without integrated head transmitter.
Specifications
Temperature ranges
Measuring resistor
Accuracy
Electrical connection
Process connection
: ambiance:
-40..+80 °C
sensor tip:
-40..+200 °C
CIP- / SIP-temperature:140 °C < 30 min.
: Pt100
: class A, class AA
: cable gland M16x1.5
M12- plug (1.4305)
: immersion sleeve, G 3/8 outside thread
suitable adapter and weld-in sleeves
APHG12, APHK25, APHZ18
(see accessories page 64)
*
**
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories) or
buttons (only with on-site display)
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories)
Note: The default settings are marked in bold.
continued on next page
pi_gr_GTL459_e V2.01-00
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
57
1
Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Dimensions
Product key
1.
GTL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Connection
Electrical connection: cable gland M16x1.5
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
7.
Clamps for Pt100
1: auxiliary voltage +
2: auxiliary voltage - / output
Electrical connection: M12-plug (1.4305)
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
8.
9.
2.
-
auxiliary
voltage - /
output
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
9.
-
Design type
459
G 3/8 with union nut
Electrical connection
P
cable gland M16x1.5
V
V2A cable gland M16x1.5
M
M12-plug
Immersion length TL
0037
37 mm
0083
83 mm
0097
97 mm
0160
160 mm
xxxx
any TL in mm:
from 200 mm till max. 500 mm,
(surcharge from 200 mm for each 100 mm
started)
Diameter thermowell and sensor tip
3
Ø 3 mm
Accuracy class
A
class A
D
class AA (1/3 class B)
Transducer
0
without transducer
M
permanently integrated transducer GTML1,
without display
V
permanently integrated transducer GTML1,
on-site display (LCD)
R
exchangeable head transducer RT420
T
exchangeable head transducer T19
Measuring range
0
without transducer
1
measuring range -10..+40 °C
(-50..+50 °C for head transducer T19)
2
measuring range 0..50 °C
3
measuring range 0..100 °C
4
measuring range 0..150 °C
5
measuring range 0..200 °C
B
transducer with special measuring range in °C
(not possible for head transducer T19),
state special measuring range separately e.g.:
0..75 °C or -20..+30 °C
Mind the minimum range of 50 °C.
Option
00
without Option
H
With spacer
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
WZ2.2
APZMAT
auxiliary
voltage +
3.
-
APZ2P
APZ3P
factory certification 2.2
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 2 measuring
points (0°C / 70°C)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 3 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 1 test point freely
selectable)
Notes on on-site display (LCD): Permanently integrated transducer GTML1 (programmable) with on-site display only in combination with electrical connection: M12 plug. Information on suitable
adapter and weld-in sleeves can be found in section Accessories.
58
2
pi_gr_GTL459_e V2.01-00
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
Temperature sensor
GTL 479 / 479M
GTL 499 / 499M
Tighting torque
Immersion length
Sensor head
: hand-tight
: 37, 83, 97, 160 mm
: Ø 18 mm
Thermowell and sensor tip:
Ø 3 mm
: thermowell Ø 3 mm
Response time
: T90 ≤ 1.5 s (without immersion sleeve)
T90 ≤ 15 s (with immersion sleeve: The
use of heat transfer paste is recommended, because this can reduce the stated
time by up to 50 %)
Operating pressure
: max. 10 bar
Material
Sensor head
: 1.4305
Thermowell and
sensor tip
: 1.4404
Union nut
: 1.4408
Protection class
CE conformity
: IP67 / IP69K
: EN 61326-1:2013 / -2-3:2013
Design type
GTL 479 / 479M
Electrical connection M12-plug, 4-pin
(1.4305)
GTL 499 / 499M
fixed cable 2.5 m
LIYY
499: 4 x 0.25 mm²
499M: 2 x 0.25 mm²
Transducer GTML2 (only for GTL 479M / GTL 499M)
Measuring range
GTL 479
GTL 479M
GTL 499
GTL 499M
● G 3/8” union nut
● Hygienic design and easy-to-sterilize measuring point
● Sensor completely made of stainless steel
Characteristic
The temperature sensors are designed for temperature monitoring
in pipes and tanks, temperature measurements in steam and pressure pipes (closed process) and for monitoring of CIP- / SIP- processes.
Power supply
Output
Output signal in case
of error
Filter
Response time
Ambient temperature
Accuracy
Temperature drift
*
: -10..+40 °C * / 0..50 °C * / 0..100 °C *
0..150 °C * / 0..200 °C *
or freely in range -20..200 °C *
: 10..30 V DC
: analog, 4..20 mA, 2-wire
: < 3.75 mA or > 21.5 mA, selectable *
: integrated low-pass, 4-step *
: < 150 ms (filter 0), < 300 ms (filter 1)
< 800 ms (filter 2), < 3 s (filter 3)
: -40..+70 °C
: < 0.2 % FS
: < 0.01 % FS / K
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories)
Note: The default settings are marked in bold.
The sensors can be provided with different electric connections and
with or without integrated head transmitter.
Specifications
Temperature ranges
Measuring resistor
Accuracy
Process connection
: ambient:
-40..+80 °C
process:
-40..+200 °C
CIP- / SIP-temperature:140 °C < 30 min.
: Pt100
: class A, class AA
: immersion sleeve, G 3/8” outside thread
suitable adapter and weld-in sleeves
APHG12, APHK25, APHZ18
(see accessories page 64)
continued on next page
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
1
pi_gr_GTL479_499_e V1.01-00 59
Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Dimensions
Connection
Design type GTL 479 or GTL 479M:
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
auxiliary
voltage +
auxiliary
voltage - /
output
Design type GTL 499 or GTL 499M:
without transducer (4-wire):
with transducer (2-wire):
auxiliary
voltage +
GTL 479
auxiliary voltage - /
output
GTL 479M
Option
TK
GTL 499
Design type GTL 499 and GTL 499M with Teflon cable
GTL 499: 4 x 0.14 mm² / GTL 499M: 2 x 0.14 mm²
Teflon cable up to 200 °C
GTL 499M
continued on next page
60
2
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
pi_gr_GTL479_499_e
V1.01-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
1.
GTL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
Temperature
Product key
7.
-
Design type (electrical connection)
479
M12-plug
479M
M12-plug with integrated transducer
499
fixed cable (PVC) connection 2.5m
499M
fixed cable (PVC) connection 2.5m,
with integrated transducer
Immersion length TL
0037
37 mm
0083
83 mm
0097
97 mm
0160
160 mm
xxxx
any TL in mm:
from 200 mm till max. 500 mm,
(surcharge from 200 mm for each 100 mm
started)
Diameter thermowell and sensor tip
3
Ø 3 mm
Accuracy class
A
class A
D
class AA (1/3 class B)
Transducer GTML2 (programmable)
ONLY for design types 479M and 499M
00
without transducer (design types 369 / 389)
M1
measuring range -10..+40 °C
M2
measuring range 0..50 °C
M3
measuring range 0..100 °C
M4
measuring range 0..150 °C
M5
measuring range 0..200 °C
MB
transducer with special measuring range in °C
(state special measuring range separately e.g.:
0..75 °C or -20..+30 °C
Mind the minimum range of 50 °C.)
Option
00
without option
H
with spacer
TK
Teflon cable for connection via fixed cable
(only available for 499 and 499M)
(surcharge per meter)
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
WZ2.2
APZMAT
APZ2P
APZ3P
factory certification 2.2
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 2 measuring
points (0°C / 70°C)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 3 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 1 test point freely
selectable)
Information on suitable adapter and weld-in sleeves can be found
in section Accessories.
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
3
pi_gr_GTL479_499_e V1.01-00 61
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Temperature probe
with double-Pt100
Head Ø 59 mm
Specifications
Temperature ranges
: ambiance:
-40..+80 °C
probe tip:
-40..+200 °C
CIP- / SIP-temperature:140 °C < 30 min.
Measuring resistor
: 2 x Pt100
Accuracy
: class A, class AA
Process connection
: M12, G ½, G ½ standard,
without thread, G ⅜
Clamping torque
: M12 - 5..10 Nm
: G ½ - 5..20 Nm
: G ⅜ - hand-tight
Fitting length
: 50, 100, 150, 250 mm
Probe head
: Ø 59 mm
Protection tube and probe tip:
Ø 6 mm
: protection tube without taper
Ø 4 mm
: protection tube without taper
(only for GTL 142.2 and GTL 152.2)
Ø 3 mm
: protection tube Ø 6 mm and tapered
probe tip Ø 3 mm
Response time
: FS Ø 3 mm: T90 ≤ 1.5 s
FS Ø 4 mm: T90 ≤ 3.6 s
FS Ø 6 mm: T90 ≤ 7.4 s
Working pressure
: max. 10 bar
Material
Probe head
: 1.4305 (V2A)
Neck tube
: 1.4305 (V2A)
Protection tube and tip : 1.4404 (V4A)
Protection class
CE conformity
: IP67 / IP69K
: EN 61326-1:2006 / -2-3:2006
Transducer GTML1
● Hygienic design and easy-to-sterilize measuring point
● Sensor completely made of stainless steel
● Redundant temperature measurement in one sensor
Characteristic
The temperature probes are designed for temperature monitoring in
pipes and tanks, temperature measurements in steam and pressure pipes and for monitoring of CIP- / SIP- processes.
Integrated head transmitter
Measuring range
: -10..+40 °C * / 0..50 °C * / 0..100 °C *
0..150 °C * / 0..200 °C *
or freely in range -20..200 °C **
Power supply
: 10..30 V DC
Measuring output
: analog, 4..20 mA, 2-wire
Output signal in case
of error
: < 3.75 mA or > 21.5 mA, selectable *
Filter
: integrated low-pass, 4-step *
Reaction time
: < 150 ms (filter 0), < 300 ms (filter 1)
< 800 ms (filter 2), < 3 s (filter 3)
Working temperature
: -40..+70 °C
Accuracy
: < 0.2 % FS
Temperature drift
: < 0.01 % FS / K
The probes can be provided with different electric connections and
with or without integrated head transmitter.
continued on next page
62
pi_gr_doppelpt100_59_e V1.00-00
1
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Temperature
Transducer GTML1 with on-site display
Transducer with integrated on-site display (LCD) only in combination with electric connection: cable connection M12 plug and integrated transducer (for further information see transducer GTML1).
Display
:
Displayed unit
:
Resolution
:
Background illumination :
Working temperature
:
*
**
4-digit LCD
°C or °F, selectable *
0.1 °C or 1 °C, selectable *
activatable, deactivatable *
-20..+60 °C
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories) or
buttons (only with on-site display)
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories)
Note: The default settings are marked in bold.
Dimensions
Probe head
Process connection
Connection
Electric connection: cable connection M12-plug
without transducer:
with transducer:
with 1 x 8-Pol-M12-plug:
with 1 x M12-plug
with 2 x M12-plug
with 2 x M12-plug
(sensor 1 and 2)
Electric connection: cable screwing M16x1.5 (PG)
without transducer
continued on next page
2
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
63
pi_gr_doppelpt100_59_e V1.00-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product key
1.
GTL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
9.
-
10.
-
Design type
142.2
thread M12 hygienic, without neck tube
152.2
thread M12 hygienic, with neck tube (100 mm)
241.2
thread G ½ hygienic, without neck tube
251.2
thread G ½ hygienic, with neck tube (100 mm)
240.2
thread G ½ standard, without neck tube
250.2
thread G ½ standard, with neck tube (100 mm)
349.2
without thread
459.2
G ⅜ with union nut
Electric connection
P
1 x cable screwing M16x1.5 (PG)
(see note below)
V
1 x V2A cable screwing M16x1.5 (PG)
(see note below)
M
1 x cable connection M12 plug (at design type
without transducer: 8-pole M12 plug)
2P
2 x cable screwing M16x1.5 (PG)
(see note below)
2V
2 x V2A cable screwing M16x1.5 (PG)
(see note below)
2M
2 x cable connection M12 plug
Fitting length EL or immersion length TL
(not for GTL 459.2: see product information GTL 459)
0050
50 mm
0100
100 mm
0150
150 mm
0250
250 mm
xxxx
any EL in mm (e.g. 320 = 320 mm) Ø 6: max.
1000 mm, Ø 4: max. 500 mm
Diameter protection tube and probe tip
(not for GTL 459.2: see product information GTL 459)
6
Ø 6 mm, without taper
4
Ø 4 mm, without taper
(not for GTL 142.2 and GTL 152.2)
3
Ø 6 mm, with tapered probe tip Ø 3 mm
Accuracy class
A
class A
D
class AA (1/3 class B)
1st Transducer
0
without transducer
M
permanently integrated transducer GTML1,
without display
V
permanently integrated transducer GTML1,
on-site display (LCD)
64
pi_gr_doppelpt100_59_e V1.00-00
Measuring range 1st transducer
0
without transducer
1
measuring range -10..+40 °C
(-50..+50 °C for head transducer T19)
2
measuring range 0..50 °C
3
measuring range 0..100 °C
4
measuring range 0..150 °C
5
measuring range 0..200 °C
B
transducer with special measuring range in °C,
state special measuring range separately e.g.:
0..75 °C or -20..+30 °C
Mind the minimum range of 50 °C.
8. 2nd transducer
0
without transducer
M
permanently integrated transducer GTML1,
without display
09. Measuring range 2nd transducer
09.
13
0
without transducer
1
measuring range -10..+40 °C
(-50..+50 °C for head transducer T19)
2
measuring range 0..50 °C
3
measuring range 0..100 °C
4
measuring range 0..150 °C
5
measuring range 0..200 °C
B
transducer with special measuring range in °C,
state special measuring range separately e.g.:
0..75 °C or -20..+30 °C
Mind the minimum range of 50 °C.
10. Option
00
without option
Note:
1) Design type with 2 x transducer only in combination with electrical connection: cable connection M12 plug
2) For the configuration of the second transducer via GTL Configuration tool at design type 1 x cable connection M12 plug a connection cable KM4P-GTL34 is necessary (see accessories at the end
of this PI).
Information on suitable weld-in sleeves for “tread M12 hygienic”
and “thread G ½ hygienic” can be found in product information GHMadapt/Accessories. Suitable compression fittings for design type
“without thread” can be found in chapter accessories at page 63.
Suitable adapter / weld-in sleeves for design type “G ⅜ with union
nut” can be found in chapter accessories at page 64 and for design
type “G ½ standard” at page 65.
3
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Temperature probe
with double-Pt100
Head Ø 18 mm
Specifications
Temperature ranges
: ambiance:
-40..+80 °C
probe tip:
-40..+200 °C
CIP- / SIP-temperature:140 °C < 30 min.
Measuring resistor
: 2 x Pt100
Accuracy
: class A, class AA
Process connection
: M12, G ½, G ½ standard,
without thread, G ⅜
Clamping torque
: M12 - 5..10 Nm
: G ½ - 5..20 Nm
: G ⅜ - hand-tight
Fitting length
: 50, 100, 150, 250 mm
Probe head
: Ø 18 mm
Protection tube and probe tip:
Ø 6 mm
protection tube without taper
Ø 4 mm
Ø 4 mm, without taper
(only for M12 thread hygienic)
Ø 3 mm
protection tube Ø 6 mm and tapered
probe tip Ø 3 mm
Response time
: FS Ø 3 mm: T90 ≤ 1.5 s
FS Ø 4 mm: T90 ≤ 3.6 s
FS Ø 6 mm: T90 ≤ 7.4 s
Working pressure
: max. 10 bar
Material
Probe head
: 1.4305 (V2A)
Protection tube and tip : 1.4404 (V4A)
Protection class
CE conformity
: IP67 / IP69K
: EN 61326-1:2006 / -2-3:2006
Transducer GTML2
● Hygienic design and easy-to-sterilize measuring point
● Sensor completely made of stainless steel
● Redundant temperature measurement in one sensor
Integrated head transmitter
Measuring range
: -10..+40 °C * / 0..50 °C * / 0..100 °C *
0..150 °C * / 0..200 °C *
or freely in range -20..200 °C *
Power supply
: 10..30 V DC
Measuring output
: analog, 4..20 mA, 2-wire
Output signal in case
of error
: < 3.75 mA or > 21.5 mA, selectable *
Filter
: integrated low-pass, 4-step *
Reaction time
: < 150 ms (filter 0), < 300 ms (filter 1)
< 800 ms (filter 2), < 3 s (filter 3)
Working temperature
: -40..+70 °C
Accuracy
: < 0.2 % FS
Temperature drift
: < 0.01 % FS / K
Characteristic
*
The temperature probes are designed for temperature monitoring in
pipes and tanks, temperature measurements in steam and pressure pipes and for monitoring of CIP- / SIP- processes.
Note: The default settings are marked in bold.
Programmable via GTL - Configuration tool (accessories)
The probes can be provided with different electric connections and
with or without integrated head transmitter.
continued on next page
pi_gr_doppelpt100_18_e
V2.01-00
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
65
1
Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Dimensions
Probe head
Connection
Electric connection: cable connection M12-plug
without transducer:
with transducer:
with 1 x 8-Pol-M12-plug:
with 1 x MR-plug:
Process connection
Electric connection: fixed cable (PVC)
without transducer:
with transducer:
2 x Pt100 (3-wire):
2 x Pt100:
Option
TK
66
2
with Teflon cable up to 200 °C
pi_gr_doppelpt100_18_e
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V2.01-00
V4.00-00
Product key
1.
GTL
1.
2.
3.
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
Design type
162.2
thread M12 hygienic, connection via 8-pole M12plug, no transducer
162M.2
thread M12 hygienic, connection via M12-plug,
2 x integrated transducer
182.2
thread M12 hygienic, connection via fixed cable
(PVC) 2.5 m, no transducer
182M.2
thread M12 hygienic, connection via fixed cable
(PVC) 2.5 m, 2 x integrated transducer
261.2
thread G ½ hygienic, connection via 8- pole
M12-plug, no transducer
261M.2
thread G ½ hygienic, connection via M12-plug,
2 x integrated transducer
281.2
thread G ½ hygienic, connection via fixed cable
(PVC) 2.5 m, no transducer
281M.2
thread G ½ hygienic, connection via fixed cable
(PVC) 2.5 m, 2 x integrated transducer
260.2
thread G ½ standard, connection via 8- pole
M12-plug, no transducer
260M.2
thread G ½ standard, connection via M12-plug,
2 x integrated transducer
280.2
thread G ½ standard, connection via fixed cable
(PVC) 2.5 m, no transducer
280M.2
thread G ½ standard, connection via fixed cable
(PVC) 2.5 m, 2 x integrated transducer
369.2
without thread, connection via 8- pole M12-plug,
no transducer
369M.2
without thread, connection via M12-plug, 2 x integrated transducer
389.2
without thread, connection via fixed cable (PVC)
2.5 m, no transducer
389M.2
without thread, connection via fixed cable (PVC)
2.5 m, 2 x integrated transducer
479.2
G ⅜ with union nut, connection via 8- pole M12plug, no transducer
479M.2
G ⅜ with union nut, connection via M12-plug,
2 x integrated transducer
499.2
G ⅜with union nut , connection via fixed cable
(PVC) 2.5 m, no transducer
499M.2
G ⅜ with union nut, connection via fixed cable
(PVC) 2.5 m, 2 x integrated transducer
Fitting length EL or immersion length TL
(not for design type with G ⅜ thread:
see product information GTL 479)
0050
50 mm
0100
100 mm
0150
150 mm
0250
250 mm
xxxx
any EL in mm (e.g. 320 = 320 mm) Ø 6: max.
1000 mm, Ø 4: max. 500 mm
pi_gr_doppelpt100_18_e
V2.01-00
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
4.
5.
6.
7.
Diameter protection tube and probe tip
(not for design type with G ⅜ thread:
see product information GTL 479)
6
Ø 6 mm, without taper
4
Ø 4 mm, without taper
3
Ø 6 mm, with tapered probe tip Ø 3 mm
Accuracy class
A
class A
D
class AA (1/3 class B)
1st transducer GTML2 (programmable)
00
without transducer
M1
measuring range -10..+40 °C
M2
measuring range 0..50 °C
M3
measuring range 0..100 °C
M4
measuring range 0..150 °C
M5
measuring range 0..200 °C
MB
transducer with special measuring range in °C
(state special measuring range separately e.g.:
0..75 °C or -20..+30 °C)
Mind the minimum range of 50 °C.
2nd Transducer GTML2 (programmable)
00
without transducer
M1
measuring range -10..+40 °C
M2
measuring range 0..50 °C
M3
measuring range 0..100 °C
M4
measuring range 0..150 °C
M5
measuring range 0..200 °C
MB
transducer with special measuring range in °C
(state special measuring range separately e.g.:
0..75 °C or -20..+30 °C)
Mind the minimum range of 50 °C.
Option
00
without option
H
with neck tube (100 mm)
TK
Teflon cable for connection via fixed cable (not
for design type with M12 plug)
Note:
1) Information on suitable compression fittings and weld-in sleeves
can be found in product information GHMadapt/Accessories.
2) For the configuration of the second transducer via GTL Configuration tool at design type 1 x cable connection M12 plug a connection cable KM4P-GTL34 is necessary (see accessories at the end
of this PI).
Information on suitable weld-in sleeves for “tread M12 hygienic”
and “thread G ½ hygienic” can be found in product information GHMadapt/Accessories. Suitable compression fittings for design type
“without thread” can be found in chapter accessories at page 63.
Suitable adapter / weld-in sleeves for design type “G ⅜ with union
nut” can be found in chapter accessories at page 64 and for design
type “G ½ standard” at page 65.
67
3
Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Clamp-on temperature
sensor GTL720/GTL723
GTL720
Pt100 sensor current : max. 10 mA (recommended 0.3..1 mA)
GTL723
Supply voltage
: 10..30 V DC, 2-wire connection
Error indication
: programmable
Load
: (Ub – 10V) /23 mA
Response time/accuracy 1)
Data without thermal compound, medium temperature 120 °C
Response time T90 : approx. 10 s
Accuracy
: up to 2.5 % f.s. without pipe wall adjustment
: up to 0.6 % f.s. with pipe wall adjustment 2)
Data with thermal compound, medium temperature 120 °C
Response time T90 : approx. 3 s
Accuracy
: up to 1 % f.s. without pipe wall adjustment
: up to 0.2 % f.s. with pipe wall adjustment 2)
Temperature
coefficient
: 0.02 %/°C
1)
2)
Measurement results depending on the mounting situation.
See next page
Measuring values are valid for GTL723
Output
● Simple mounting via clamp-on adapter without media
contact
● High accuracy even without thermal compound
● Fast response time
● Replacing/cleaning of the sensor without process
interruption
● Pt100 Sensor 3-wire connection of
transmitter 4..20 mA, 2-wire connection
● Transmitter programmable via GTL Configuration tool
● GTL720 applicable for Ex areas
Characteristics
Clamp-on temperature sensors GTL720 and GTL723 are specified
to measure temperatures without media contact.
The measuring tip is directly located at the pipe wall and will be
fixed by the clamp-on adapter on the pipe. This measuring process
provides a high accuracy and a fast response time, which is often
better than a measuring principle with media contact.
: 4..20 mA
Material
Sensor
Spring
Sensor usage
Sensor tip
Lid
M12 plug
Weight
Clamp-on adapter
Adapter
Housing
Adapter insertion
Weight
Frame size 1
Frame size 2
Frame size 3
Frame size 4
Protection class
: IP67
(in connection with mounted M12 plug)
Electrical connection
Round plug
: 4-pole M12x1
tightening torque 0,6 Nm
68
pi-ma-GTL72X_E V3.03-00
1.4310
PEEK
935er silver
1.4305
PA/gold plated contacts
17 g
: 1.4405
: 1.4305
: silicone HTV/PTFE
: 120 g
: 170 g
: 395 g
: 955 g
Dimensions
66,5 (GTL720, GTL723
up to 100 °C)
102,5 (GTL723 from 100 °C)
Technical data
SW
SW
Pipe
Temperature sensor
: Pt100, class A acc. to DIN EN 60751
GTL720 without transmitter
Measuring range
: -20..+160 °C
Working temperature : -20..+85 °C
Storing conditions
: with yellow protective cap
Temp. : -20..+70 °C
max. rel. humidity 70%
Ex protection
: Ex II 2G [Ex ia] IIC T3/T4/T5
(simple apparatus)
Ui = 30 V, Ii = 25 mA, Pi = 30 mW
GTL723 with transmitter
Measuring range
: -20..+100 °C, short time 160 °C < 30 min,
(option 01 = max. 160 °C permanent)
programmable,
minimal measuring span 50 °C
Working temperature : -20..+60 °C
Storing conditions
: with yellow protective cap
Temp. : -20..+70 °C
max. rel. humidity 70%
:
:
:
:
:
:
Frame size
(Bg)
1
2
3
4a
4b
Pipe Ø
[mm]
13.0..19.9
20.0..33.9
34.0..53.0
60.3..75.9
76.0..88.9
B
[mm]
51
64
92
133
133
h
[mm]
26
32
46
68
68
A/F
[mm]
11
11
14
14
14
1
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Connection diagrams
GTL720 passive sensor
Connection variant 1
(GHM standard)
Connection variant 2
(customized)
1.
RLA
1.
120
130
135
172
180
GTL723 Transmitter
Supply voltage
190
213
230
254
269
280
290
Analog output
Ordering code
Note: In place order please specify the clamp-on sensor and the
clamp-on adapter.
Order example:
Clamp-on sensor GTL without transmitter,
with clamp-on adapter RLA for DN32:
GTL720-0-00-0-00 + RLA424-00
Clamp-on temperature sensor
1.
GTL
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
1. Design / input
720
Pt100 (applicable in Ex-areas)
723
Pt100 with transmitter 4..20 mA
2. Electrical connection
0
GTL720 variant 1 (GHM standard), M12 plug
1
GTL720 variant 2 (customized), M12 plug
2
GTL723 2-wire, 4..20 mA, M12 plug
3. Transmitter GTL723, default ranges
(programmable with GTL - Configuration tool via PC )
00
without transmitter (only GTL720)
M1
measuring range -10..+40 °C
M2
measuring range 0..50 °C
M3
measuring range 0..100 °C
M4
measuring range 0..150 °C
temperatures > 100 °C max. 30 min
transmitter with special measuring range in °C
(state special measuring range separately e.g.:
20..130 °C)
MB
4. Pipe wall adjustment for stainless steel type pipes
0
not active
1
without thermal compound (only GTL723)
2
with thermal compound (only GTL723)
5. Options
00
without option
high temperature version for GTL723;
01
max. permanent temperature 160°C
6. Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
WZ2.2
APZ3P
2
factory certification 2.2
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 3 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 1 test point freely selectable)
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
337
350
381
400
410
424
483
508
520
530
603
635
700
761
850
889
999
2.
Temperature
Clamp-on adapter
2.
Pipe diameter
12,0 mm: DN10
DIN 11850 Reihe 1
13,0 mm: DN10
DIN 11850 Reihe 2
12,7 mm: ½“
DIN 11866 Reihe C / ASME-BPE
13,5 mm: DN8
DIN 11866 Reihe B (ISO 1127)
17,2 mm: DN10
DIN 11866 Reihe B (ISO 1127)
18,0 mm: DN15
DIN 11850 Reihe 1
19,0 mm: DN15
DIN 11850 Reihe 2
19,0 mm: ¾“
DIN 11866 Reihe C / ASME-BPE
21,3 mm: DN15
DIN11866 Reihe B
23,0 mm: DN20
DIN11850 Reihe 2
25,4 mm: 1 "
DIN11866 Reihe C / ASME-BPE
26,9 mm: DN20
DIN11866 Reihe B
28,0 mm: DN25
DIN11850 Reihe 1
29,0 mm: DN25
DIN11850 Reihe 2
33,7 mm: DN25
DIN11866 Reihe B
34,0 mm: DN32
DIN11850 Reihe 1
35,0 mm: DN32
DIN11850 Reihe 2
38,1 mm: 1 ½ "
DIN11866 Reihe C / ASME-BPE
40,0 mm: DN40
DIN11850 Reihe 1
41,0 mm: DN40
DIN11850 Reihe 2
42,4 mm: DN32
DIN11866 Reihe B
48,3 mm: DN40
DIN11866 Reihe B
50,8 mm: 2 "
DIN11866 Reihe C / ASME-BPE
52,0 mm: DN50
DIN11850 Reihe 1
53,0 mm: DN50
DIN11850 Reihe 2
60,3 mm: DN50
DIN11866 Reihe B
63,5 mm: 2 ½“
DIN11866 Reihe C / ASME-BPE
70,0 mm: DN65
DIN11850 Reihe 2
76,1 mm: DN65
DIN11866 Reihe B
76,2 mm: 3“
DIN11866 Reihe C / ASME-BPE
85,0 mm: DN80
DIN11850 Reihe 2
88,9 mm: DN80
DIN11866 Reihe B
customized diameter on request
Options
00 without option
Accessories:
Thermal compound
Type
WLP10S, containing silicone,
•
high thermal conductivity of 10.0 W/mK
•
not drying out, silicone parts not fleeting
•
storage time up to 12 months at normal ambient conditions,
from production date
•
syringe containing 3 ml + pipette
•
color: silver gray
GTL – Configuration tool
•
programming the GTL7xx via PC
Calibration certificate: on request
For the evaluation of Pt100 signals we recommend our transmitter
and temperature displays (PI transmitter, PI displays and PI temperature).
The temperature curves can be seen next page.
69
pi-ma-GTL72X_E V3.03-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Response time at different conditions
Note: measured with SS-type pipe Ø 29 mm, 1.5 mm pipe wall
GTL – response time (with thermal compound)
Measured medium (water)
GTL720, GTL723
GTL723 with activated pipe wall correction
GTL – response time (without thermal compound)
Measured medium (water)
GTL720, GTL723
GTL723 with activated pipe wall correction
70
pi-ma-GTL72X_E V3.03-00
3
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Simple mounting via clamp-on adapter
Process connection without media contact
High accuracy even without thermal compound
Fast response time
Replacing/cleaning of the sensor without process
interruption
Pt100 sensor with integrated transmitter
Transmitter programmable via GTL Configuration tool or
buttons
LCD on-site display, background illumination
Output 4..20 mA, 2-wire connection
Output
: 4..20 mA
Material
Sensor
Spring
Sensor usage
Sensor tip
Lid
M12 plug
Weight
Clamp-on adapter
Adapter
Housing
Adapter insertion
Weight
Frame size 1
Frame size 2
Frame size 3
Frame size 4
:
:
:
:
:
:
Temperature
Clamp-on temperature
sensor GTL737
1.4310
PEEK
935er silver
1.4305
PA/gold plated contacts
500 g
: 1.4405
: 1.4305
: silicone HTV/PTFE
: not available
: 170 g
: 395 g
: 955 g
Dimensions
Characteristics
Clamp-on temperature sensor GTL737 is specified to measure
temperatures without media contact.
The measuring tip is directly located at the pipe wall and will be
fixed by the clamp-on adapter on the pipe. This measuring process
provides a high accuracy and a fast response time, which is often
better than a measuring principle with media contact.
Technical data
Temperature sensor : Pt100, class A acc. to DIN EN 60751
Measuring range
: -20..+160 °C, programmable,
minimal measuring span 50 °C
Working temperature : -20..+60 °C
Protection class
: IP67
(in connection with mounted M12 plug)
Display
: LCD, 3 ½ -digit, background illuminated
Electrical connection
Round plug
: 4-pole, M12x1
Supply voltage
: 10..30 V DC, 2-wire connection
Error indication
: programmable
-break of sensor
: I > 22 mA (default setting)
-short circuit
: I < 3.7 mA
Response time/accuracy 1)
Data without thermal compound, medium temperature 120 °C
Response time T90
: approx. 10 s
Accuracy
: up to 2.5 % f.s. without pipe wall adjustment
: up to 0.6 % f.s. with pipe wall adjustment
Data with thermal compound, medium temperature 120 °C
Response time T90
: ca. 3 s
Accuracy
: up to 1 % f.s. without pipe wall adjustment
: up to 0.3 % f.s. with pipe wall adjustment
Temperature
coefficient
: 0.02 %/°C
1)
Measurement results depending on the mounting situation.
The data are valid for horizontally assembled pipes.
pi-ma-GTL737_E
V3.01-00
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
SW
Frame size
(Bg)
1
2
3
4a
4b
Pipe Ø
[mm]
20.0..33.9
34.0..53.0
60.3..75.9
76.0..88.9
SW
B
h
[mm]
[mm]
not available
64
32
92
46
133
68
133
68
A/F
[mm]
11
14
14
14
continued on next page
71
1
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Connection diagram
Clamp-on adapter
1.
RLA
Supply voltage
Analog output
Ordering code
Note:
In place order please specify the clamp-on sensor and the clampon adapter.
Order example:
Transmitter, GTL measuring range 0..100 °C
with clamp-on adapter RLA for DN32
GTL737-2-M3-00 + RLA424-00
Clamp-on temperature sensor
1.
GTL
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
1. Design / input
737
Pt100 with transmitter and display
2. Electric connection
2
2-wire, 4..20 mA, M12 plug
3. Transmitter GTL737, default ranges
(programming possible with GTL – Configuration tool via PC)
M1
measuring range -10..+40 °C
M2
measuring range 0..50 °C
M3
measuring range 0..100 °C
M4
measuring range 0..150 °C
MB
transmitter with special measuring range in °C
(state special measuring range separately e.g.:
20..130 °C)
4. Pipe wall adjustment for SS-type pipes (only GTL737)
0
not active
1
without thermal compound
2
with thermal compound
5. Options
00
without option
6. Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
WZ2.2
APZ3P
factory certification 2.2
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 3 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 1 test point freely
selectable)
2.
-
1. Pipe diameter
120*) 12,0 mm: DN10
DIN 11850 Reihe 1
13,0 mm: DN10
DIN 11850 Reihe 2
130*)
12,7 mm: ½“
DIN 11866 Reihe C / ASME-BPE
135*) 13,5 mm: DN8
DIN 11866 Reihe B (ISO 1127)
172*) 17,2 mm: DN10
DIN 11866 Reihe B (ISO 1127)
180*) 18,0 mm: DN15
DIN 11850 Reihe 1
19,0 mm: DN15
DIN 11850 Reihe 2
190*)
19,0 mm: ¾“
DIN 11866 Reihe C / ASME-BPE
213
21,3 mm: DN15
DIN11866 Reihe B
230
23,0 mm: DN20
DIN11850 Reihe 2
254
25,4 mm: 1 "
DIN11866 Reihe C / ASME-BPE
269
26,9 mm: DN20
DIN11866 Reihe B
280
28,0 mm: DN25
DIN11850 Reihe 1
290
29,0 mm: DN25
DIN11850 Reihe 2
33,7 mm: DN25
DIN11866 Reihe B
337
34,0 mm: DN32
DIN11850 Reihe 1
350
35,0 mm: DN32
DIN11850 Reihe 2
381
38,1 mm: 1 ½ "
DIN11866 Reihe C / ASME-BPE
400
40,0 mm: DN40
DIN11850 Reihe 1
410
41,0 mm: DN40
DIN11850 Reihe 2
424
42,4 mm: DN32
DIN11866 Reihe B
483
48,3 mm: DN40
DIN11866 Reihe B
508
50,8 mm: 2 "
DIN11866 Reihe C / ASME-BPE
520
52,0 mm: DN50
DIN11850 Reihe 1
530
53,0 mm: DN50
DIN11850 Reihe 2
603
60,3 mm: DN50
DIN11866 Reihe B
635
63,5 mm: 2 ½“
DIN11866 Reihe C / ASME-BPE
700
70,0 mm: DN65
DIN11850 Reihe 2
76,1 mm: DN65
DIN11866 Reihe B
761
76,2 mm: 3“
DIN11866 Reihe C / ASME-BPE
850
85,0 mm: DN80
DIN11850 Reihe 2
889
88,9 mm: DN80
DIN11866 Reihe B
999
customized diameter on request
2. Options
00 without option
*RLA120-190 nur für GTL720 und GTL723
Accessories:
Thermal compound
Type
WLP10S, containing silicone,
•
high thermal conductivity of 10.0 W/mK
•
not drying out, silicone parts not fleeting
•
storage time up to 12 months at normal ambient conditions,
from production date
•
syringe containing 3 ml + pipette
•
color: silver-gray
Type:
GTL – Configuration tool
•
programming the GTL7xx via PC
Calibration certificate: on request
The temperature curves can be seen next page.
72
2
pi-ma-GTL737_E V3.01-00
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Temperature
Response time at different conditions
Note: measured with SS-type pipe Ø 29 mm, 1.5 mm pipe wall
Messmedium (Wasser)
GTL737
GTL737 mit eingeschalteter Rohrwandkorrektur
Messmedium (Wasser)
GTL737
GTL737 mit eingeschalteter Rohrwandkorrektur
pi-ma-GTL737_E
V3.01-00
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
73
3
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Temperature transmitter
HTK12-I / U / F
● Complete temperature transmitter for food industry in
12 mm housing
● Analog output 4..20 mA (HTK12-I)
● Analog output 0..10 V (HTK12-U)
● Frequency output (HTK12-F)
● User-configurable via plug pins (Teach-In)
● Identical mechanical design available as temperature
switch, flow transmitter/switch or level switch
Characteristic
Repeatability
Supply voltage
Current consumption at rest
Output
Protection class
Connection
Materials in contact with media
Materials not in
contact with
media
Weight
Conformity
Z=Last
● analog 0/4..20 mA signal (HTK12-I)
● analog 0/2..10 V signal (HTK12-U)
● frequency signal (HTK12-F)
1
2
3
4
2
1
Specifications
3
4
standard: 0..100 °C
optional: -20..+100 °C or parts of this
Sealing cone screw fitting,
compatible with G 1/2 GHMadapt
-20..+100 °C
braun
18..30 V DC
weiß
Programmierung
blau
schwarz
Z
Connection example: PNP
If desired, the range end value can be set to the presently existing
temperature using Tech-In (see Handling and Operation).
Process
connection
Medium
temperature
Ambient
temperature
CIP- / SIP
temperature
Dynamic ()
HTK12-I: 4..20 mA /
max. load 500 Ohm
HTK12-U: 0..10 V / min load 1 kOhm
HTK12-F: Frequency output "push-pull"
(resistant to short circuits and reversed polarity protected) lout = 100 mA max.
selectable output frequency, max. 2 kHz
IP 67
for round plug connector M12x1, 4-pole
sensor tip
1.4435,
FDA compliant
housing
1.4571
pressure screw
1.4404
plug
PA
contacts
gold-plated
approx. 100 g incl. pressure screw
CE
Wiring
The sensors in the HTK12 family can be used for the measurement
and monitoring of temperatures in flowing media, and are specially
designed for use in the food industry. The 16-bit processor
provides linearization of the PT2000 characteristic curve, and emits
the standardized output signal.
The HTK12 electronics transmit the result as
Measuring range
±0.5 °C
18..30 V DC (controlled)
< 60 mA
0V
Z
Signalausgang
NPN
The use of shielded cabling is recommended.
Dimensions
0..60 °C
140 °C, < 30 min. max.
3 sec.
x
x
For compatible T-pieces and weld-in sockets of the GHMadapt series, see “Accessories”.
Process pressure
Accuracy
PN 50
±1 °C
74
pi-ho_te-htk12-iuf_e V2.02-01
1
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Bestellschlüssel
Hinweise
1.
Der Messbereichsendwert kann vom Benutzer per Teach-In programmiert werden. Die Programmierbarkeit muss bei der Bestellung angegeben werden, anderenfalls ist das Gerät nicht programmierbar.
Als komfortable Programmiermöglichkeit per PC für alle Parameter
und zur Justierung steht das Interface ECI-3 mit zugehöriger Software zur Verfügung.
Bedienung und Programmierung
Das Messbereichsende ist auf Wunsch per Teach-In durch den Anwender einstellbar.
Hierzu ist wie folgt vorzugehen:
● Gerät mit der einzustellenden Temperatur beaufschlagen
● Impuls von mindestens 0,5 s und max. 2 s Dauer an Pin 2 anlegen (z.B. durch Brücke zur Hilfsspannung oder Puls von SPS),
um den gemessenen Wert zu übernehmen.
● Nach erfolgtem Teach-In sollte Pin 2 mit 0 V verbunden werden, um versehentliche Programmierung zu verhindern.
Die Geräte besitzen eine gelbe LED, die während des Programmierpulses blinkt. Im Betrieb dient die LED als Betriebsspannungsanzeige.
Montage
Der Fühler wird in die Bohrung
mit Dichtkonus eingesteckt, ausgerichtet und mit einer Druckschraube festgezogen.
Bei vorhandener Strömung sollte die Seite des Sensors, die mit
einem X markiert ist, angeströmt
werden, um eine geringstmögliche Reaktionszeit zu erreichen.
Markierung
Strömung
x
Das Anzugsdrehmoment der Druckschraube soll 5..10 Nm
betragen.
Blasen oder Ablagerungen am Sensor sind zu vermeiden! Die beste Einbaulage ergibt sich daher von der Seite.
HTK12-
2.
3.
4.
Temperature
Handhabung und Betrieb
5.
015
Option = 
1. Analogausgang
I
Stromausgang 4..20 mA
U
Spannungsausgang 0..10 V
F
Frequenzausgang
2. Fühlerspitzenlänge
015
L = 15 mm
3. Programmierung
N
nicht programmierbar (kein Teach-In)
 programmierbar (Teach-In möglich)
P
4. Option
H
CIP- / SIP-Version, 140 °C, 30 min. max.
5. Zeugnis nach DIN EN 10204 (nur bei Bedarf angeben,
Mehrfachnennungen sind möglich)
WZ2.2
Werkszeugnis 2.2
APZMAT Abnahmeprüfzeugnis 3.1 für Material
(produktberührend)
Optionen
Für HTK12-I und HTK12-U
Sonderbereich Analogausgang:
Messbereichsanfang (4 mA bzw. 0 V) bei
Standard = 0 °C
Messbereichsende (20 mA bzw. 10 V) bei
Standard = 100 °C
Für HTK12-F
Endfrequenz (max. 2000 Hz)
Standard = 2000 Hz
Sonderbereich Frequenzausgang:
Messbereichsanfang (0 Hz) bei
Standard = 0 °C
Messbereichsende (Endfrequenz) bei
Standard = 100 °C
°C
°C
Hz
°C
°C
Weitere Optionen auf Anfrage!
Zubehör
● Gerätekonfigurator ECI-3 (USB-Programmieradapter)
● Prozess-Adapter
● Rundsteckverbinder / Kabel (KH...)
Weitere Informationen erhalten Sie im Hauptverzeichnis
„Zubehör“
2
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
75
pi-ho_te-htk12-iuf_d V2.02-01
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Temperature switch
HTK12-S
● Temperature sensor with limit switch for food industries in
12 mm housing
● User-configurable via plug pins (Teach-In)
● Identical mechanical design available as temperature
transmitter, flow transmitter/switch or level switch
Characteristic
The sensors of the HTK12 family can be used for measuring and
monitoring temperatures in flowing media. They provide multiple
configuration options combined with low space requirements. The
mechanical construction makes them suitable for use in the foodstuffs industry.
Repeatability
Supply voltage
Current consumption at rest
Switching output
Protection class
Connection
Materials in contact with media
Materials not in
contact with
media
Weight
Conformity
The adjustable parameters are:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
switching value
hysteresis
Min / max monitoring
Switching delay
Switchback delay
Power-On delay
Teach-Offset
transistor output "Push-Pull" compatible with
PNP and NPN, (resistant to short circuits
and reversed polarity protected)
Iout = 100 mA max.
IP 67
for round plug connector M12x1, 4-pole
sensor tip
1.4435,
FDA compliant
housing
1.4571
pressure screw
1.4404
plug
PA
contacts
gold-plated
approx. 100 g incl. pressure screw
CE
Wiring
Z=Last
1
The electronics of the HTK12-S are a flexibly configurable limit
switch.
The switching value can be set by the user via teaching (see Handling and operation). All other values have been preset at the factory, but can be modified by the user with the aid of the optionally
available ECI-3 interface and a PC.
±0.5 °C
18..30 V DC (controlled)
< 60 mA
2
3
4
braun
1
3
4
Programmierung
blau
schwarz
Anschlussbeispiel:
2
18..30 V DC
weiß
Z
PNP
Z
0V
Signalausgang
NPN
The use of shielded cabling is recommended.
Dimensions
Specifications
Switching range
Process
connection
Medium
temperature
Ambient
temperature
CIP- / SIP
temperature
Dynamic ()
-20..+100 °C
Sealing cone screw fitting,
compatible with G 1/2 GHMadapt
-20..+100 °C
Process pressure
Accuracy
PN 50
±1 °C
0..60 °C
x
x
140 °C, 30 min max.
3 sec.
76
pi-ho_te-htk12-s_e V1.02-01
For compatible T-pieces and weld-in sockets of the GHMadapt series, see “Accessories”.
1
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Handling or operation
A switchover delay time (tDS) can be applied to the switchover to the
alarm state. Equally, one switch-back delay time (tDR) of several can
be applied to switching back to the normal state.
Operation and programming
If desired, the metering range end can be set by the user by means
of Teach-In.
For this, proceed as follows:
● The temperature which is to be set is applied to the device
● Apply a pulse of at least 0.5 seconds and max. 2 seconds duration to pin 2 (e.g. via a bridge to the auxiliary voltage or a pulse
from the PLC), in order to accept the measured value
● When the teaching is complete, pin 2 should be connected to
0 V, so as to prevent unintended programming.
T
Max
Max-Hyst
The devices have a yellow LED which flashes during the programming pulse. During operation, the LED acts as a display for the operating voltage.
In order to avoid the need to transit to an undesired operating status during the teach-in, the device can be provided ex-works with a
teach-offset. The Teach-In-offset point is added to the currently
measured value before saving.
Example: The switching value is to be set to 80 °C, because at this
temperature a critical process status is to be notified. However,
only 60 °C can be achieved without danger. In this case, the device
would be ordered with a "teach-offset" of +20 °C. At 60 °C in the
process, a switching value of 80 °C would then be stored during
"Teach-In".
t
tDR
tDS
In the normal state the integrated LED is on, in the alarm state it is
off, and this corresponds to its status when there is no auxiliary
voltage.
In the non-inverted (standard) model, while in the normal state the
switching output is at the level of the auxiliary voltage; in the alarm
state it is at 0 V, so that a wire break would also display as an alarm
state at the signal receiver. Optionally, an inverted switching output
can also be provided, i.e. in the normal state the output is at 0 V,
and in the alarm state it is at the level of the supply voltage.
The HTK12-S limit switch can be used to monitor minimal or maximal.
With a minimum-switch, falling below the limit value causes a
switchover to the alarm state. Return to the normal state occurs
when the limit value plus the set hysteresis is once more exceeded.
t
nicht invertierter Ausgang
T
Min+Hyst
invertierter Ausgang
Min
t
With a maximum-switch, exceeding the limit value causes a
switchover to the alarm state. Return to the normal state occurs
when the measured value once more falls below the limit value minus the set hysteresis.
A Power-On-Delay function (ordered as a separate option) makes it
possible to maintain the switching output in the normal state for a
defined period after application of the supply voltage.
Installation
The sensor is inserted into the
boring with a sealing cone, oriented, and fastened in place
with a pressure screw.
When a flow is present, this
should impinge on the side of
the sensor marked with an X, in
order to achieve a short response time.
T
Max
Max-Hyst
Marking
Flow
x
The torque on the pressure screw should be between 5..10 Nm.
t
2
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
Avoid bubbles or deposits on the sensor. It is therefore best to install at the side.
77
pi-ho_te-htk12-s_e V1.02-01
Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product key
HTK12-
Options
1.
2.
S
- 015 -
3.
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
H
7.
-
Option = 
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Switching output
S
transistor output “push-pull”
Sensor tip length
015
L = 15 mm
Programming
N
cannot be programmed (no Teach-In)
 programmable(Teach-In possible)
P
Functioning of switching output
L
minimum-switch
H
maximum-switch
Switching signal
O
non-inverted output
 inverted output
I
Option
H
CIP- / SIP- version, 140 °C, 30 min. max.
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
WZ2.2
APZMAT
Switching delay period (0.0..99.9 s)
(from Normal to Alarm)
Switch-back delay period (0.0..99.9 s)
(from Alarm to Normal)
Power-On-Delay period (0..99 s)
(Time after power on, during which the outputs are not actuated)
Switching output fixed at
Switching hysteresis
Standard = 2 % of measuring range
Teach-Offset (-100..+100 °C)
Standard = 0 °C
.
s
.
s
s
°C
%
°C
Further options available on request.
Accessories
● Device configurator ECI-3 (USB programming adapter)
● Process adapter
● Round plug connector / cable (KH...)
Further information at “Accessories”
factory certification 2.2
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
78
pi-ho_te-htk12-s_e V1.02-01
3
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Switching output
Switching
hysteresis
Display (only with
switching output)
Analog output
Connection
Materials in contact with media
Materials not in
contact with
media
Protection class
Weight
● Compact robust temperature switch/transmitter for use in
food industry
● No moving parts in medium
● Only one material in contact with medium
● Simple to use
● Very low pressure loss
● Cable outlet step-less rotatable
● Very small installation width, therefore very narrow
pipework is possible
Z=Last
1
2
3
4
Measuring range
Accuracy
Repeatability
Process pressure
CIP- / SIP
temperature
Ambient
temperature
Storage temp.
Teach-In /
configuration
Weight
Supply voltage
Current consumption
braun
Analogausgang
blau
schwarz
Anschlussbeispiel:
2
1
3
4
0..100 °C, 0..140 °C on request
±1 % FS
±0.1 % FS
PN 50
140 °C, < 30 min. max.
18..30 V DC
weiß
Z
PNP
Z
0V
Schalt-/
Frequenzausgang
NPN
Dimensions
x
Specifications
yellow LED
(on = OK / out = alarm)
4..20 mA /load 500 Ohm max. or
0..10 V /load min. 1 kOhm
for round plug connector M12x1, 4-pole
sensor
1.4435,
FDA compliant
housing
1.4305
plug
PA6.6
clip
PA6.6
IP 67
CE
Wiring
Characteristic
The HTK30 temperature sensor monitors fluid media. Its compact
form combines the built-in sensor and the evaluation electronics.
The integrated transducer has an analog output (4..20 mA or 0..10
V) and one switching output, which can be configured as a limit
switch for monitoring minima or maxima, or as a frequency output.
The switching output is designed as a push-pull driver, and can
therefore be used both as a PNP or an NPN output. The state of
the switching output is signaled with a yellow LED in the switching
outlet; the LED has all-round visibility.
The sensor is configured in the factory, or alternatively this can be
done with the aid of the optionally available ECI-3 device configurator (USB interface for PC). A selectable parameter can be modified
on the device, with the aid of the magnet clip provided. In this case,
the current measured value is saved as the parameter value. Examples of these parameters are the switching value or the fullscale
value.
The stainless steel electronics housing is rotatable, so it is possible
to orient the cable outlet after installation.
transistor output "Push-Pull" (resistant to
short circuits and reversed polarity protected) Iout = 100 mA max.
2 °C (others available on request)
Temperature
Temperature
transmitter / switch
HTK30
x
For compatible T-pieces and weld-in sockets of the GHMadapt series, see “Accessories”.
-20..+70 °C
-20..+80 °C
by means of magnet
ca. 200 g (standard version)
24 V DC ± 10%
max. 100 mA
pi-ho_te-htk30_e V1.02-01
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
79
1
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Handling and operation
T
Installation
The sensor is inserted into the
boring with a sealing cone, oriented, and fastened in place
with a pressure screw.
When a flow is present, this
should impinge on the side of
the sensor marked with an X, in
order to achieve a short response time.
Min+Hyst
Marking
Flow
x
The torque on the pressure screw should be between 5..10 Nm.
Avoid bubbles or deposits on the sensor. It is therefore best to install at the side.
Min
t
With a maximum-switch, exceeding the limit value causes a
switchover to the alarm state. Return to the normal state occurs
when the measured value once more falls below the limit value minus the set hysteresis.
T
Programming
The electronics contain a magnetic contact, with the aid of which
different parameters can be programmed. Programming takes
place when a magnet clip is applied for a period between 0.5 and 2
seconds to the marking located on the label. If the contact time is
longer or shorter than this, no programming takes place (protection
against external magnetic fields).
Max
Max-Hyst
t
A switchover delay time (tDS) can be applied to the switchover to the
alarm state. Equally, one switch-back delay time (tDR) of several can
be applied to switching back to the normal state.
After the programming ("Teach-In"), the clip can either be left on the
device, or removed to protect data.
The device has a yellow LED which flashes during the programming pulse. During operation, the LED serves as a status display
for the switching output.
In order to avoid the need to transit to an undesired operating status during "teaching", the device can be provided ex-works with a
"teach-offset". The "teach-offset" value is added to the currently
measured value before saving (or is subtracted if a negative value
is entered).
Example: The switching value is to be set to 70 % of the metering
range, because at this flow rate a critical process status is to be notified. However, only 50% can be achieved without danger. In this
case, the device would be ordered with a "teach-offset" of +20 %.
At 50 % in the process, a switching value of 70 % would then be
stored during "Teach-In".
Normally, programming is used to set the limit switch. However, if
desired, other parameters such as the end value of the analog or
frequency output may also be set.
The limit switch can be used to monitor minima or maxima.
With a minimum-switch, falling below the limit value causes a
switchover to the alarm state. Return to the normal state occurs
when the limit value plus the set hysteresis is again exceeded.
80
2
T
Max
Max-Hyst
t
tDS
tDR
In the normal state the integrated LED is on, in the alarm state it is
off, and this corresponds to its status when there is no auxiliary
voltage.
In the non-inverted (standard) model, while in the normal state the
switching output is at the level of the auxiliary voltage; in the alarm
state it is at 0 V, so that a wire break would also display as an alarm
state at the signal receiver. Optionally, an inverted switching output
can also be provided, i.e. in the normal state the output is at 0 V,
and in the alarm state it is at the level of the supply voltage.
pi-ho_te-htk30_e V1.02-01
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Temperature
Options
Special measuring range for temperature:
t
nicht invertierter Ausgang
Maximum 140 °C (standard = 100 °C)
°C
Minimum -20 °C (standard = 0 °C)
°C
Special range for analog output:
°C
<= meas. range (standard = meas. range)
Special range for frequency output:
°C
<= meas. range (standard = meas. range)
invertierter Ausgang
A Power-On-Delay function (ordered as a separate option) makes it
possible to maintain the switching output in the normal state for a
defined period after application of the supply voltage.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
K1
 = Option
1. Sensor tip length
015
L = 15 mm
2. Materials
K1
stainless steel 1.4571
3. Analog output
I
current output 4..20 mA
U
voltage output 0..10 V
K
no analog output
4. Switching output
T
transistor output “push-pull”
 NPN (open collector)
M
K
no switching output
5. Functioning of switching output
L
minimum-switch
H
maximum-switch
R
frequency output
K
no switching output
6. Switching signal
O
non-inverted output
 inverted output
I
7. Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
WZ2.2
APZMAT
Hz
Switch-on delay (from OK to Alarm)
s
Switch-off delay (from OK to Alarm)
s
Power-On-Delay period (0..99 s)
s
(Time after power on, during which the outputs are not actuated)
Product key
HTK30- 015
End frequency (max. 2000 Hz)
Switching output fixed at
°C
Special hysteresis
°C
For not specified fields the standard settings are selected automatically.
Accessories
● Device configurator ECI-3 (USB programming adapter)
● Process adapter
● Round plug connector / cable (KH...)
Further information at “Accessories”
factory certification 2.2
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
pi-ho_te-htk30_e V1.02-01
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
81
3
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Product Information
Temperature
transmitter / switch
HTK35
● Compact robust temperature transmitter for use in food
industry
● Only one material in contact with medium
● Analog output 4..20 mA or 0..10 V
● Two programmable switches (push-pull)
● Graphical LCD display, background illuminated (transreflective) can be read in sunlight and in the dark
● Programmable parameters via rotatable, removable ring
(programming protection)
● Full metal housing with non-scratch, chemically resistant
glass
● Rotatable electronic head for best reading position
● Small, compact housing
● Simple installation
Characteristic
The sensors of the HTK35 range can be used for measuring and
monitoring temperatures in flowing media, and are specially
designed for use in the foodstuffs industry.
The integrated transducer has a backlit graphics LCD display which
is very easy to read both in the dark and in bright sunlight. The
graphics display allows the presentation of measured values and
parameters in a clearly understandable form. The measured values
are displayed to 4 places, together with their physical unit, which
may also be modified by the user. The electronics have an analog
output (4..20 mA or 0..10 V) and two switching outputs, which can
be used as limit switches for monitoring minima or maxima, or as
two-point controllers. The switching outputs are designed as pushpull drivers, and can therefore be used both as PNP and NPN
outputs. Exceeding limit values is signaled by a red LED which is
visible over a long distance, and by a clear-text in the display. The
stainless steel case has a hardened non-scratch mineral glass
pane. It is operated by a programming ring fitted with a magnet, so
there is no need to open the operating controls housing, and its
leakproofness is permanently ensured.
HTK35
Specifications
Measuring range
Accuracy
Repeatability
Process pressure
Ambient
temperature
Storage temp.
CIP- / SIP
temperature
Supply voltage
Current
consumption
Dynamic ()
0..100 °C
0..130 °C on request
±1 % FS
±0.1 % FS
PN 50
-20..+70 °C
-20..+80 °C
140 °C, < 30 min. max.
24 V DC ± 10%
<1W
3 sec.
Analog output
4..20 mA or 0..10 V
Switching outputs transistor output "Push-Pull" compatible with
S1 and S2
PNP and NPN, (resistant to short circuits
and reversed polarity protected)
Iout = 100 mA max. each output
Hysteresis
adjustable, position of the hysteresis depends on minimum or maximum switching
value
Display
backlit graphical LCD display (transreflective), extended temperature range
-20..+70 °C, 32 x 16 pixels, background illumination, displays value and unit, flashing
LED signal lamp with simultaneous message on the display.
Connection
for round plug connector M12x1, 4-pole
Protection class
IP 67
Materials
medium consensor
1.4435,
tact
FDA compliant
electronics
housing
stainless steel 1.4305
housing
glass
mineral glass, hardened
magnet
Samarium-Cobalt
ring
POM
Conformity
CE
By turning the ring to right or left, it is simple to modify the
parameters (e.g. switching point, hysteresis...). To protect from
unintended programming, it can be removed, turned through 180°
and replaced, or completely removed, thus acting as a key.
82
pi-ho_te-htk35_e V2.02-01
1
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
HTK35
Anschlussbild
Programmierung
Z = Last
1
2
3
4
5
braun
24 V DC ±10 %
weiß
Analogausgang
blau
schwarz
Der Ringspalt des Programmierrings lässt sich in die Pos. 1 und
Pos. 2 auslenken. Folgende Aktionen sind möglich:
Z
Z
grau
0V
Schaltsignal 1
Tasten auf 1 = weiter (STEP)
Tasten auf 2 = ändern (PROG)
Schaltsignal 2
Ruhelage zwischen 1 und 2
Anschlussbeispiel:
2
3
5
PNP
NPN
1
4
Vor der Elektroinstallation ist sicherzustellen, dass die Hilfsspannung den Datenangaben entspricht.
Die Schaltausgänge sind selbst konfigurierend je nachdem ob sie
als PNP- oder NPN-Schalter angeschlossen werden (Push-Pull).
Es wird empfohlen, abgeschirmtes Kabel zu verwenden.
Abmessungen
x
x
Handhabung und Betrieb
Montage
Der Fühler wird in die Bohrung
mit Dichtkonus eingesteckt, ausgerichtet und mit einer Druckschraube festgezogen.
Bei vorhandener Strömung sollte die Seite des Sensors, die mit
einem X markiert ist, angeströmt
werden, um eine geringstmögliche Reaktionszeit zu erreichen.
Anzeige der Parameter mit Pos. 1
● Schaltwert S1 (Schaltpunkt 1 in der gewählten Einheit)
● Schaltcharakteristik von S1
MIN = Minimalwertüberwachung
MAX = Maximalwertüberwachung
● Hysterese 1 (Hysteresewert von S1 in der eingestellten
Einheit)
● Schaltwert S2
● Schaltcharakteristik von S2
● Hysterese 2
● Code
Nach Eingabe des Codes 111 können weitere Parameter
bestimmt werden:
● Filter (Einschwingzeit von Anzeige und Ausgang)
● Physikalische Einheit (Units)
● Ausgang (Output): 0..20 mA oder 4..20 mA
● 0/4 mA (Messwert, der 0/4 mA entspricht)
● 20 mA (Messwert, der 20 mA entspricht)
Bei Ausführungen mit Spannungsausgang sind 20 mA sinngemäß
durch 10 V zu ersetzen.
Markierung
Strömung
x
Das Anzugsdrehmoment der Druckschraube soll 5..10 Nm
betragen.
Blasen oder Ablagerungen am Sensor sind zu vermeiden.
Die beste Einbaulage ergibt sich daher von der Seite.
T-Stücke oder Einschweißstutzen siehe Zubehör.
2
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
Der Ring ist als Schlüsselsystem abnehmbar oder verdreht wieder
aufsteckbar um Programmierschutz zu erhalten.
Die Bedienung erfolgt im Dialog mit den Displaymeldungen, was
eine einfache Handhabung sicherstellt.
Wird ausgehend von der Normalanzeige (Momentanmesswert mit
Einheit) wiederholt auf 1 (STEP) getastet, so wird die Anzeige
nacheinander folgende Informationen anzeigen:
Ändern (editieren) mit Pos. 2
Wenn der gerade sichtbare Parameter geändert werden soll:
● Ringspalt auf Pos. 2 drehen und es erscheint ein blinkender
Cursor, der die änderbare Stelle anzeigt
● Durch wiederholtes Drehen auf Pos. 2 werden die Werte erhöht, durch Drehen auf Pos. 1 wandert der Cursor zur nächsten Stelle
● Verlassen des Parameters durch Drehen auf Pos. 1 (bis Cursor
die Zeile verlässt) heißt die Änderung übernehmen
● Ohne Aktion innerhalb 30 s springt das Gerät wieder auf den
normalen Anzeigebereich zurück, ohne dass die Änderung
übernommen wird
83
pi-ho_te-htk35_d V1.02-01
Temperature
Produktinformation
Product information Hygienic Design - Temperature
Produktinformation
HTK35
Die Grenzwertschalter S1 und S2 können zur Minimum- oder
Maximum-Überwachung verwendet werden.
Bei einem Minimum-Schalter führt das Unterschreiten des Grenzwertes zum Umschalten in den Alarmzustand. Die Rückkehr in den
Normalzustand erfolgt, wenn der Grenzwert zuzüglich der eingestellten Hysterese wieder überschritten wird.
Bestellschlüssel
1.
2.
3.
Min+Hyst
Min
4.
t
Bei einem Maximum-Schalter führt das Überschreiten des Grenzwertes zum Umschalten in den Alarmzustand. Die Rückkehr in den
Normalzustand erfolgt, wenn der Grenzwert abzüglich der eingestellten Hysterese wieder unterschritten wird.
T
3.
4.
- S -
5.
 = Option
1.
T
2.
HTK30- 015 - K1 -
5.
Fühlerspitzenlänge
015
L = 15 mm
Medienberührter Werkstoff
K1
Edelstahl 1.4435
Analogausgang
I
4..20 mA
 0..10 V
U
Elektrischer Anschluss
S
für Rundsteckverbinder M12x1, 5-polig
Zeugnis nach DIN EN 10204 (nur bei Bedarf angeben,
Mehrfachnennungen sind möglich)
WZ2.2
Werkszeugnis 2.2
APZMAT Abnahmeprüfzeugnis 3.1 für Material
(produktberührend)
Zubehör
● Kabel / Rundsteckverbinder (KB...)
Weitere Informationen erhalten Sie im Hauptverzeichnis
„Zubehör“
Max
Max-Hyst
t
Das Wechseln in den Alarmzustand wird durch die integrierte rote
LED und eine Klarschriftmeldung im Display angezeigt.
Die Schaltausgänge sind im Normalzustand auf Versorgungsspannungspegel, im Alarmzustand auf 0 V, so dass ein Kabelbruch beim
Signalempfänger ebenfalls Alarmzustand anzeigt würde.
Überlastanzeige
Überlast eines Schaltausganges wird detektiert, auf dem Display
angezeigt (“Check S1 / S2“) und der Schaltausgang wird abgeschaltet.
Simulationsmodus
Zur einfacheren Inbetriebnahme bietet der Sensor einen Simulationsmodus des analogen Ausgangs. Es ist möglich einen programmierbaren Wert im Bereich 0..26,0 mA am Ausgang zu erzeugen
(ohne die Prozessgröße zu verändern). Hiermit kann bei der Inbetriebnahme die Strecke zwischen Sensor und nachgeschalteter
Elektronik getestet werden. Zu erreichen ist dieser Modus über
Code 311.
Werkseinstellung
Nach Veränderung der Konfigurationsparameter ist ein Zurückstellen zur Werkseinstellung mit Code 989 jederzeit möglich.
84
pi-ho_te-htk35_d V1.02-01
3
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e V4.00-00
GHM Messtechnik GmbH – Sales Center International
Schloßstraße 6 ● 88453 Erolzheim ● Germany
Fon +49-7354-937233-0
● Fax -88
Product
information
Hygienic Design
www.ghm-messtechnik.de ● info@ghm-messtechnik.de
- Temperature
Product Information
Temperature probes
Accessories
Temperature
Device Configurator ECI-1
GTL - Configuration tool
Suitable for all GTL with integrated transmitter
The programming tool contains:
•
Software GTL - Configurator
Setting of unit, resolution, measuring range,
filter, output in case of error, etc.
● Can be used on site for:
- parameter modification
- firmware update
- adjustment of inputs and outputs
● Can be connected via USB
•
•
•
•
•
•
GTL - Configuration adapter
Connection cable with M12-plug
Connection cable with loose ends
Connection cable with alligator clips
GKK 252 case
with burl foams size: 235 x 185 x 48 mm
Manual
Characteristics
(W x H x D)
The device configurator ECI-1 is an interface which allows the
connection of microcontroller-managed HONSBERG sensors to the
USB port of a computer.
Together with the Windows software "HONSBERG Device
Configurator" it enables
●
●
●
●
the modification of all the sensor's configuration settings
the reading of measured values
the adjustment of inputs and outputs
firmware updates
Technical data
Supply voltage
Power
consumption
Connection
Sensor
Lead
USB
Operating
temperature
Storage
temperature
Dimensions of
housing
Housing material
Ingress protection
12..30 V DC (depending on the connected
sensor) and via USB
<1W
cable bushing M12x1, 5-pole, straight length
approx. 50 cm
device connector M12x1, 5-pole
USB bushing type B
0..50 °C
-20..+80 °C
98 mm (L) x 64 mm (W) x 38 mm (H)
ABS
IP 40
continued on next page
Handling and operation
Connection
pi_gr_Zubehoer_e V1.01-00
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
85
1
GHM Messtechnik GmbH – Sales Center International
Schloßstraße 6 ● 88453 Erolzheim ● Germany
Fon +49-7354-937233-0
● Fax -88
Product
information
Hygienic Design
www.ghm-messtechnik.de ● info@ghm-messtechnik.de
- Temperature
Product Information
Temperature probes
Welding sleeve for GTL
GKEV-25/76
Spherical welding sleeve for inclined mounting
consisting of welding sleeve, PEEK clamping ring
and clamping screw.
The device configurator is intended for temporary connection to the
application. It is connected between the the existing sensor lead
and the sensor. Power supply is via the supply to the sensor and
the computer's USB port. When inactive (no communication), the
configurator behaves completely neutrally; all signals from the sensor remain available to the application. During communication between computer and sensor, the signal wirings are separated in the
configurator, so that in this state the sensor's output signals are not
available.
Specifications:
Material
Type of installation
Clamping torque
Working pressure
Application
Design:
: V4A (1.4404)
: PEEK clamping ring,
thread M12x1.5
: max. 10 Nm
: max. 10 bar
: for mounting of temperature probes
of series: GTL 349, GTL 369 / M,
GTL 389 / M
To connect 4-pole leads without a middle hole to the installed
5-pole device connector, adapter K04-05 is included. 4-pole leads
with a middle hole can be used without an adapter.
Ordering code
Device configurator
(for scope of delivery, see the diagram below)
ECI-1
Scope of delivery
1. Device configurator ECI-1
2. USB cable
3. Adapter K04-05
4. Plug KB05G
5. Cable K05PU-02SG
6. Carrying case
Incl. software
Accessories:
Mains connector 24 V DC
(with fitted round plug
connector, 5-pole,
incl. international plug set)
Replacement parts:
M12x1 adapter 4- / 5-pole
PUR cable, 5-pole, shielded
with round plug connector M12x1
Round plug connector M12x1, 5-pole
(without cable)
Spare parts:
Clamping screw KS-M12
PEEK clamping ring PKR-6
6
5
3
4
1
2
EPWR24-1
K04-05
K05PU-02SG
KB05G
GEMK-25/76
Collar welding sleeve for tanks thick / thin consisting of welding sleeve, PEEK clamping ring
and clamping screw.
Specifications
Material
Type of installation
Clamping torque
Working pressure
Application
Design:
: V4A (1.4404)
: PEEK clamping ring,
thread M12x1.5
: max. 10 Nm
: max. 10 bar
: for mounting of temperature probes
of series: GTL 349, GTL 369 / M,
GTL 389 / M
Spare parts:
Clamping screw KS-M12
PEEK clamping ring PKR-6
86
2
pi_gr_Zubehoer_e V1.01-00
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
GHM Messtechnik GmbH – Sales Center International
Schloßstraße 6 ● 88453 Erolzheim ● Germany
Fon +49-7354-937233-0
● Fax -88
Product
information
Hygienic Design
www.ghm-messtechnik.de ● info@ghm-messtechnik.de
- Temperature
Product Information
Temperature probes
Thermowells for GTL
1.
APHG12
APHK25
1.
-
-
3.
4.
Product key
1.
APHG12
1.
2.
3.
4.
-
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
-
4.
-
fitting length EL = 50 mm
installation length ML: 56..63 mm
TL = 160 mm fitting length EL = 127 mm
inst. length ML: 133..140 mm
any immersion length in mm; min.: 160 mm,
max.: 500 mm (e.g. 320 = 320 mm)
xxx
2.
3.
Immersion length TL
083
TL = 83 mm
160
Adapter sleeve, suitable for GHMadapt
thread G 1/2” (e.g. APH112) to thread
G 3/8”.
2.
Temperature
Product key
Options
00
without option
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required)
APZMAT
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
Surface roughness, only in contact with products.
Indicate only when required.
RA08
Ra < 0,8 µm (with acceptance test certificate 3.1
incl. Measurement report)
APHZ18
Immersion length TL
083
TL = 83 mm
fitting length EL = 27 mm
097
TL = 97 mm
fitting length EL = 41 mm
160
TL = 160 mm fitting length EL = 104 mm
xxx
any immersion length in mm; min.: 160 mm,
max.: 500 mm (e.g. 320 = 320 mm)
Options
00
without option
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required)
APZMAT
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
Surface roughness, only in contact with products.
Indicate only when required.
RA08
Ra < 0,8 µm (with acceptance test certificate 3.1
incl. Measurement report)
Cylindric weld-in sleeve to thread
G 3/8”, for mounting to an existing compression fitting (GKEV25/76 or GEMK-25/76) or for weld
in tubes or tanks.
Product key
1.
APHK25
APHZ18
1.
-
xxx
3.
4.
Ball weld-in sleeve to thread G 3/8”, for mounting in pipe bends or
tanks.
pi_gr_Zubehoer_e V1.01-00
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
-
3.
-
4.
-
Immersion length TL
083
TL = 83 mm
160
2.
2.
fitting length EL = 50 mm
installation length ML: 56..71 mm
TL = 160 mm fitting length EL = 127 mm
inst. length ML: 133..148 mm
any immersion length in mm; min.: 160 mm,
max.: 500 mm (e.g. 320 = 320 mm)
Options
00
without option
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required)
APZMAT
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
Surface roughness, only in contact with products.
Indicate only when required.
RA08
Ra < 0,8 µm (with acceptance test certificate 3.1
incl. Measurement report)
87
3
GHM Messtechnik GmbH – Sales Center International
Schloßstraße 6 ● 88453 Erolzheim ● Germany
Fon +49-7354-937233-0
● Fax -88
Product
information
Hygienic Design
www.ghm-messtechnik.de ● info@ghm-messtechnik.de
- Temperature
Product Information
Temperature probes
Thermal compound
WLP10S
•
•
•
•
88
4
Syringe containing 3 ml silicone + pipette, color silver-gray
high thermal conductivity of 10.0 W/mK
not drying out, silicone parts not fleeting
Storage time up to 12 months at normal ambient conditions
pi_gr_Zubehoer_e V1.01-00
pi-gr-temperatur-hd_e
V4.00-00
89
Flow, magnetic-conductive
90
Page
Flow, magnetic-conductive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
91
Flow, magnetic-conductive
Hygienic Design
92
Flow, magnetic-conductive
www.ghm-group.de
Product information
Hygienic Design
Electromagnetic flowmeter
Product information Electromagnetic flowmeter
Characteristics
Application
Measuring principle
Applications
○ Electromagnetic principle
○ Measurement of conductive liquids with a
minimum conductivity of > 5 μS/cm
○ Hygienic and sterile applications
○ Monitoring and control of processes, e.g.
CIP-circuits or filtration processes
○ Measurement of pulsating media
○ Simple dosing and filling tasks
Process connections
○ Various hygienic process adapters
Conformity
○ According to EHEDG, 3-A
Design
○ Ultra-compact design (space-saving installation)
○ Complete stainless steel construction
○ DN1 … 100
Branches
○
○
○
○
○
Pharmaceutical industry
Biotechnology, life science
Cosmetics
Food & beverage industry
Chemical industry
Media
○ Liquid, pulpy and pasty
Pressure range
○ Max. 10 bar
Media temperature
○ -20..+150 °C
○ CIP-/SIP capable
94
pi_ma-Mag-Flow-HD_E V3.04-00
Product information Electromagnetic flowmeter
Magnetic inductive
Flow Meter
MFI447
Auxiliary energy
Auxiliary voltage
Power consumption
Electrical connection
Galvanic separation
CE conformity
● Very compact design
● High precision (± 0.5 %) with flow speed
> 0.5 m/s (optional ± 0.3 % for nominal widths DN3..15)
< ± 1% for DN1 and DN2
● No moving parts in the medium being measured
● Measurement of flowing, pulpy, or
pasty media
● Continuously variable housing rotation (± 170°)
● Operation from outside without aids
● Conformity in accordance with EHEDG, 3-A
● CIP- / SIP capable
● Integrated electronic flow meter
● Integrated dosing control (optional)
Characteristics
A magnetic inductive flow meter is primarily composed of a
measuring tube, a magnetic circuit, and two electrodes. Medium
with a minimum electrical conductivity flows through the measuring
tube. A magnetic field oriented vertically in relation to the flow
direction is applied from outside via coils. A voltage is induced in
the medium and tapped at the two electrodes on opposite sides.
This is proportional to the flow speed of the medium to be
measured. Based on the known tube geometry, the electronics
calculates the current volume flow rate. The data for the outputs
and the integrated volume meter are derived from this value.
The MFI447 has been designed for measurements of flowing,
pulpy, or pasty media with a minimum electrical conductivity of
> 5 µS.
: 18..30 V DC, max. 100 mA
: max. 5 W
: M12 plug, 5-pin
: Sensors / auxiliary volt., outputs / housing
: EN 61326-1:2013,
EN 61326-2-3:2013
Environmental conditions
Environmental
temperature
: -20..+60 °C
Climate classification : EN 60068-2-38:2009
Vibrations
: EN 60068-2-6:2008, GL Test 2
Approval
: Conformity: EHEDG, 3-A
Metering range
: 0..12 m/s
Basic precision
: ±1 % (DN1 and DN2)
±0.5% optional ±0.3 % v. M. (DN3..15)
Min. conductivity
: > 5 µS/cm,
> 20 µS/cm for demineralised water
> 20 µS/cm for DN1..2
Process temperature : -20 .. +130 °C, 150 °C < 60 min
CIP-/SIP-capable (Tenv. 25°C)
Process pressure
: DN3..40 ≤ 40 bar
DN50, DN80 ≤ 16 bar
DN1, DN2, DN65, DN100 ≤ 10 bar
Process material
: Coating:
PEEK (DN1..2)
PFA (DN3..100)
Electrodes:
1.4539
Pipe connection: 1.4435
Seal:
EPDM
FDA-compliant
Suitable for foodstuffs use in accordance
with EHEDG
Conform regulation EC 1935/2004 &
10/2011
Process connection
: Weld spigots, Tri-Clamp DIN 32676,
DIN11851 milk tube,
DIN11864-1 Form A Südmo aseptic
connection
Housing
: Round stainless steel housing Ø 79 mm
Material
: 1.4305
Ingress protection
: IP67 / IP69K
Viewing window
: Acrylic glass (PMMA)
Electrical outputs
Analogue
: Active, 0/4..20 mA, Resistance < 600 Ohm
Switching outputs
: 2 x transistor PNP / NPN programmable
max. 30 V DC,100 mA
Programmable as:
- Pulse output (max. 10 kHz)
- Switching output
- Control input
Display
: backlit graphic LCD
Operation
: 4 capacitive buttons
Flow speed
pi-ma-MFI447_E V2.04-00
pi_ma-Mag-Flow-HD_E
V3.04-00
Subject to errors and changes.
Error curves for basic precision 1 % of the measured value, 0.5 % of the measured value. (Standard) and 0.3 % of the measured value
(Option 01)
95
1
Flow, magnetic-conductive
Technical data
Product information Electromagnetic flowmeter
Process connection dimensions
DN1..DN2
1/8“ female thread
DN50..DN100
Flange connection MFI
DN3..DN40
Process thread MFI
(Figure with PVC hose connection)
The MFI447 base unit is equipped with a
1/8" sanitary female thread on both sides
and is supplied with PV hose connection
pieces for hose inside diameter 4 mm / outside diameter = 6mm as standard equipment.
(Figure with welded-on
nozzle process connection)
(Figure with welded-on
nozzle process connection)
'Welded-on nozzle' process connection with
union nut for DN 3..40 devices
'Welded-on nozzle' process connection
with flange for DN 50..100 devices
For installation size DN3..DN8, the following applies:
With tube widths <DN10, only the measuring tube in the device is adapted to the
nominal diameter. The connection nozzle
is always DN10.
Housing dimensions
H (overall) [mm]
F (axis height) [mm]
D (housing diameter) [mm]
A (housing width [mm]
DN1..DN2
215
59
73
43
DN3..DN15
175
38.5
44
37
DN20
185
43
63
42
DN25
194
48
63
54
DN32
203
53
78
62
DN40
212
57
78
67
DN50
208
50
100
128
DN65
230
58
116
114
DN80
247
67
133
114
DN100
275
81
160
145
Order information
For operation of the MFI447 flow meter,
the appropriate process connection is always required in addition to the base unit
in order to be able to integrate the device
in pipelines.
The process connection is not included
in the scope of supply of the base unit
(except for with installation sizes DN1
and DN2), and must be ordered separately. A process connection always comprises two connection nozzles.
96
2
Figure:
MFI447 DN25 base unit with process
connection AP232-025 milk tube screw
coupling in accordance with DIN 11851.
left:
right:
reduction nozzle with union nut
threaded nozzle
pi-ma-MFI447_E V2.04-00
pi_ma-Mag-Flow-HD_E
V3.04-00
Product information Electromagnetic flowmeter
Overview of process connections with union nut, DN 3..40
Process process connection
Figure
Pipe standard
Ordering code
– DN (nominal Ø)
Welded-on nozzle
both sides
DIN EN 10357, Series B
DIN EN 10357, Series A
DIN 11866 Series A
DIN 11866 Series B
DIN 11866 Series C
OD tube
ISO2037
APF 110--00
APF 210--00
APF 310--00
APF 410--00
APF 510--00
APF 610--00
APF 710--00
Tri-Clamp
in accordance with
DIN 32676
both sides
DIN EN 10357, Series A
DIN 11866 Series A
DIN 11866 Series B
DIN 11866 Series C
OD Tube
ISO2037
APF 220--00
APF 320--00
APF 420--00
APF 520--00
APF 620--00
APF 720--00
Milk tube
threaded nozzle
in accordance with DIN 11851,
both sides
DIN EN 10357, Series A
APF 230--00
Milk tube reduction nozzle
with union nut
in accordance with DIN 11851
one side
Milk tube
threaded nozzle
opposite side
DIN EN 10357, Series A
APF 232--00
Aseptic threaded nozzle
in accordance with DIN 11864-1
(Form A with O-ring)
both sides
DIN EN 10357, Series A
DIN 11866 Series A
DIN 11866 Series B
DIN 11866 Series C
OD tube
ISO2037
APF 240--00
APF 340--00
APF 440--00
APF 540--00
APF 640--00
APF 740--00
Aseptic collared nozzle
with union nut
in accordance with DIN 11864-1,
one side
DIN EN 10357, Series A
DIN 11866 Series A
DIN 11866 Series B
DIN 11866 Series C
OD tube
ISO2037
APF 242--00
APF 342--00
APF 442--00
APF 542--00
APF 642--00
APF 742--00
Aseptic threaded nozzle
opposite side
Hose nozzles
both sides
Flow, magnetic-conductive
see also page 15
APF 860---00
Additional process connections are available on request.
pi-ma-MFI447_E V2.04-00
pi_ma-Mag-Flow-HD_E
V3.04-00
97
3
Product information Electromagnetic flowmeter
Overview of process connections with flange, DN 50..100
Process process connection
Figure
Pipe standard
Ordering code
– DN (nominal Ø)
see also page 15
Welded-on nozzle
both sides
DIN EN 10357, Series B
DIN EN 10357, Series A
DIN 11866 Series A
DIN 11866 Series B
DIN 11866 Series C
OD tube
ISO2037
APF 110--00
APF 210--00
APF 310--00
APF 410--00
APF 510--00
APF 610--00
APF 710--00
Tri-Clamp
in accordance with DIN 32676
both sides
DIN EN 10357, Series A
DIN 11866 Series A
DIN 11866 Series B
DIN 11866 Series C
OD Tube
ISO2037
APF 220--00
APF 320--00
APF 420--00
APF 520--00
APF 620--00
APF 720--00
Milk tube
threaded nozzle
in accordance with DIN 11851,
both sides
DIN EN 10357, Series A
APF 230--00
Milk tube reduction nozzle
with union nut
in accordance with DIN 11851
one side
Milk tube
threaded nozzle
opposite side
DIN EN 10357, Series A
APF 232--00
Aseptic threaded nozzle
in accordance with DIN 11864-1
(Form A with O-ring)
both sides
DIN EN 10357, Series A
DIN 11866 Series A
DIN 11866 Series B
DIN 11866 Series C
OD tube
ISO2037
APF 240--00
APF 340--00
APF 440--00
APF 540--00
APF 640--00
APF 740--00
Aseptic collared nozzle
with union nut
in accordance with DIN 11864-1,
one side
DIN EN 10357, Series A
DIN 11866 Series A
DIN 11866 Series B
DIN 11866 Series C
OD tube
ISO2037
APF 242--00
APF 342--00
APF 442--00
APF 542--00
APF 642--00
APF 742--00
Aseptic threaded nozzle
opposite side
Hose nozzles
both sides
APF 860
see page 15
Additional process connections are available on request.
98
4
pi-ma-MFI447_E V2.04-00
pi_ma-Mag-Flow-HD_E
V3.04-00
Product information Electromagnetic flowmeter
Pipe dimensions and installation lengths (MFI447 with process connection on both sides)
DIN EN 10357, Series A
DIN 11866, Series A
Ø
MFI
DN
Nominal
pipe
width
DN
010
010
010
010
010
015
020
025
032
040
050
065
080
100
Tri-Clamp
DIN 32676
both sides
both sides
13x1.5
13x1.5
13x1.5
13x1.5
13x1.5
19x1.5
23x1.5
29x1.5
35x1.5
41x1.5
53x1.5
70x2.0
85x2.0
104x2.0
Milk tube screw coupling
DIN 11851
(only for DIN EN 10357,
Series A)
Threaded
nozzle
Pipe dimensions
Outside Ø x wall
thickness
Do x S
[mm]
Order code
3
4
6
8
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
Welded-on
nozzle
both sides
Threaded
nozzle
Reduction
nozzle
Aseptic thread connection
DIN 11864-1 Form A
Threaded
nozzle
both sides
Threaded
nozzle
Collared
nozzle
APF210-...
APF310-...
APF220-...
APF320-...
APF230-...
APF232-...
APF240-...
APF340-...
APF242-...
APF342-...
127
127
127
127
127
127
132
149
166
171
173
165
169
199
163
163
163
163
163
163
168
192
209
214
216
221
225
255
169
169
169
169
169
169
180
207
230
237
243
245
259
307
165
165
165
165
165
165
174
200
223
230
236
237
251
297
165
165
165
165
165
165
174
201
226
233
235
237
253
299
163
163
163
163
163
163
171
197
221
228
234
235
249
295
Installation lengths with process connection in accordance with DIN EN 10357, Series B (formerly DIN 11850, Series 1): (APF110, material
1.4404)
DIN EN 10357, series B
(material 1.4404)
Ø
MFI
DN
Nominal
pipe
width
DN
Pipe dimensions
Outside Ø x wall
thickness
Do x S
[mm]
Order code
3
4
6
8
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
010
010
010
010
010
015
020
025
032
040
050
Welded-on
nozzle
Tri-Clamp
DIN 32676
Milk tube screw coupling
DIN 11851
both sides
both sides
Threaded
nozzle
both sides
Threaded
nozzle
Reduction
nozzle
Aseptic thread connection
DIN 11864-1 Form A
Threaded
nozzle
both sides
Threaded
nozzle
Collared
nozzle
APF110-...
12x1
12x1
12x1
12x1
12x1
18x1
22x1
28x1
34x1
40x1
52x1
pi-ma-MFI447_E V2.04-00
pi_ma-Mag-Flow-HD_E
V3.04-00
127
127
127
127
127
127
132
149
166
171
173
-
-
-
-
-
99
5
Flow, magnetic-conductive
Installation lengths with process connection in accordance with DIN EN 10357, Series A (formerly DIN 11850, Series 2):
(APF2XX, material 1.4404) and DIN 11866 Series A (APF3XX, material 1.4435)
Product information Electromagnetic flowmeter
Installation lengths with process connection in accordance with DIN 11866 Series B / DIN EN ISO1127 (APF4XX, material 1.4435)
DIN 11866 Series B / DIN EN ISO 1127
Ø
MFI
DN
Nominal
pipe
width
DN
Pipe dimensions
Outside Ø x wall
thickness
Do x S
[mm]
Order code
3
4
6
8
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
008
008
008
008
010
015
020
025
032
040
050
065
080
13,5x1.6
13,5x1.6
13,5x1.6
13,5x1.6
17.2x1.6
21.3x1.6
26.9x1.6
33.7x1.6
42.4x2.0
48.3x2.0
60.3x2.0
76.1x2.0
88.9x2.0
Welded-on
nozzle
Tri-Clamp
DIN 32676
Milk tube screw coupling
DIN 11851
both sides
both sides
Threaded
nozzle
both sides
APF410-...
APF420-...
127
127
127
127
127
127
132
149
166
171
173
165
169
162.6
162.6
162.6
162.6
162.6
162.6
162.6
267.0
267.0
280.0
280.0
225.0
225.0
-
Threaded
nozzle
Reduction
nozzle
-
Aseptic thread connection
DIN 11864-1 Form A
Threaded
nozzle
both sides
Threaded
nozzle
Collared
nozzle
APF440-...
APF442-...
165
165
165
165
165
169
184
209
228
233
245
249
269
163
163
163
163
163
166
180
204
223
232
243
245
265
Installation lengths with process connection in accordance with DIN 11866, Series C (APF 5XX, material 1.4435) and OD tube (APF 6XX,
material 1.4404)
DIN 11866, Series C
OD tube
Ø
MFI
DN
Nominal
pipe
width
DN
Pipe dimensions
Outside Ø x wall
thickness
Do x S
[mm]
Ordering code
3
4
6
8
10
20
25
40
50
65
80
100
100
6
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
½
¾
1
1½
2
2½
3
4
9.53x0.89
9.53x0.89
9.53x0.89
9.53x0.89
12.7x1.65
19.05x1.65
25.4x1.65
38.1x1.65
50.8x1.65
63.5x1.65
76.2x1.65
101.6x2.11
Welded-on
nozzle
Tri-Clamp
DIN 32676
Milk tube screw coupling
DIN 11851
both sides
both sides
Threaded
nozzle
both sides
APF510-...
APF610-...
APF520-...
APF620-...
127
127
127
127
127
132
149
171
173
165
169
199
152.4
152.4
152.4
152.4
152.4
152.4
192.0
214.0
229.0
221.0
225.0
225.0
-
Threaded
nozzle
Reduction
nozzle
-
Aseptic thread connection
DIN 11864-1 Form A
Threaded
nozzle
both sides
Threaded
nozzle
Collared
nozzle
APF540-...
APF640-...
APF542-...
APF642-...
165
165
165
165
165
170
201
233
235
237
253
299
163
163
163
163
163
168
197
228
224
235
249
295
pi-ma-MFI447_E V2.04-00
pi_ma-Mag-Flow-HD_E
V3.04-00
Product information Electromagnetic flowmeter
Installation lengths with process connection in accordance with ISO 2037 (APF 7X0, material 1.4404)
-> new standard EN10357-C
Ø
MFI
DN
Nominal
pipe
width
DN
Pipe dimensions
Outside Ø x wall
thickness
Do x S
[mm]
Order code
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
1"
1 ¼"
1 ½"
2"
2 ½"
3"
4"
25.0x1.6
31.8x1.6
31.8x1.6
51x1.6
63.5x1.6
76.1x1.6
101.6x2.01
Welded-on
nozzle
Tri-Clamp
DIN 32676
Milk tube screw coupling
DIN 11851
both sides
both sides
Threaded
nozzle
both sides
APF710-...
APF720-...
149
171
173
165
169
199
192
214
216
221
225
255
-
Threaded
nozzle
Reduction
nozzle
-
Aseptic thread connection
DIN 11864-1 Form A
Threaded
nozzle
both sides
Threaded
nozzle
Collared
nozzle
APF740-...
APF742-...
201
233
235
237
253
299
197
228
234
235
249
295
Hose nozzle process connection (APF 860, material 1.4404)
available for all nominal device diameters, specify hose inside diameters –XX in the ordering code)
Ø
MFI
Hose inside Ø
Di [mm]
Hose nozzle
both sides
DN
Order code
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
4
4
13
13
13
13
13
19
23
29
35
41
53
70
85
104
pi-ma-MFI447_E V2.04-00
pi_ma-Mag-Flow-HD_E
V3.04-00
APF860-001-XX-00
APF860-002-XX-00
APF860-003-XX-00
APF860-004-XX-00
APF860-006-XX-00
APF860-008-XX-00
APF860-010-XX-00
APF860-015-XX-00
APF860-020-XX-00
APF860-025-XX-00
APF860-032-XX-00
APF860-040-XX-00
APF860-050-XX-00
APF860-065-XX-00
APF860-080-XX-00
APF860-100-XX-00
101
7
Flow, magnetic-conductive
ISO 2037
Product information Electromagnetic flowmeter
Wiring
M12 plug connection
M12 plug connection
PNP (Push)
NPN (Pull)
Cable colours: 1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black, 5 = grey
Display and operation
Four capacitive buttons are provided. The function of the individual buttons depends on the operating status of the MFI447.
NOTE: Capacitive buttons react to the change in capacity due to the approach of the finger. They have not moving parts and are thus very
durable. However, gloves, dirt, and moisture can cause malfunctions.
The LC display shows measurements and status information during measuring operation. The display values change depending on the
parameterisation and status of the device.
The display is generally divided as follows:
Special function
programmable
Visualisation of the
actuated button
Free text input
or measuring point text
Current measurement
Measured volume
Device status
Current output value of
the current output
Switching status of inputs/outputs 1 and 2
Code entry and
entry to the menu level
Right arrow button
102
8
Code entry;
corresponds to a
PC Enter key
Code entry and menu
change
Up arrow button
pi-ma-MFI447_E V2.04-00
pi_ma-Mag-Flow-HD_E
V3.04-00
Product information Electromagnetic flowmeter
1. Menu level
1 - Application data
2 - Sensor input
3 – Input/output 1
4 – Input/output 2
2. Menu level
Parameter
0.2 Read data
1.1 Measuring point
1.2 Operating language
1.3 Reset meter
1.4 Function key
2.1 Measuring range
2.2 Time constant
2.3 Leak flow volume
2.4 Flow direction
2.5 Zero point
3.1 I/O function
If switching output has been selected
3.2 Hardware config.
3.3 Switching function
If switching point has been selected
3.4 ON switching point
3.5 OFF switching point
If pulse output has been selected
3.2 Hardware config.
3.3 Output version
3.4 Pulse value
3.5 Pulse width
If control input has been selected
3.2 Hardware config.
3.3 Control function
If analogue input has been selected
3.2 Scaling 1
3.3 Scaling 2
4.1 I/O function
If switching output has been selected
4.2 Hardware config.
4.3 Switching function
If switching point has been selected
4.4 ON Switching value
4.5 OFF Switching value
If pulse output has been selected
4.2 Hardware config.
4.3 Output version
4.4 Pulse value
4.5 Pulse width
If control input has been selected
4.2 Hardware config.
4.3 Control function
If analogue input has been selected
4.2 Scaling 1
4.3 Scaling 2
pi-ma-MFI447_E V2.04-00
pi_ma-Mag-Flow-HD_E
V3.04-00
1. Menu level
2. Menu level
Parameter
5 - Analogue output
5.1 Function
5.2 Range
6.1 Fill function
6.2 Target volume
7.1 Flow rate display
7.2 Flow speed
7.3 Positive meter
7.4 Negative meter
7.5 Totaliser
7.6 Status display
7.7 Display change
7.8 LCD contrast
7.9 LCD brightness
8.1 Input/output 1
8.2 Input/output 2
8.3 Analogue output
9.1 ADW version
9.2 IO version
9.3 Nominal width
9.4 Field frequency
9.5 Nominal frequency
9.6 Calibration value
9.7 Operating hours
6 - Filling function
7 - LC display
8 - Test functions
9 - Information
Flow, magnetic-conductive
List of parameters - operating structure of the MFI447
103
9
Product information Electromagnetic flowmeter
Installation conditions
Potential equalisation
With the metal connection between welded-on nozzle and/or a different process connection and the pipeline, it is assured that the
measuring sensor housing has the same potential as the pipeline. The additional connection of earthing cables is only necessary with the
use of plastic pipelines.
Installation
The following must be observed:
The measuring tube must be completely filled
The mark of the flow direction on the measuring tube must match flow direction of the pipeline
Installation must take place without mechanical forces (torsion, bending) on the process adapter for the measuring sensor
Seals may not protrude into the pipe cross-section, because they influence the accuracy of the device
The transducer may not be exposed to direct sunlight
•
•
•
•
•
Position
Characteristics
1
Ideal:
Good measuring result if no air bubbles form. Minimum distance from the pipe angle 3..5 x DN in the inlet and 2 x DN
in the outlet. (DN=nominal diameter)
2
Not recommended:
Fault-free functionality cannot be assured due to the arrangement of measuring electrodes allowing for incorrect
measurements (with penetration of air).
3
Questionable (only with free outlet):
A falling flow direction can lead to incorrect measurements.
4
Ideal:
Good measuring result if no air bubbles form. Same minimum distance from the pipe angle as 1.
Table 1
104
10
pi-ma-MFI447_E V2.04-00
pi_ma-Mag-Flow-HD_E
V3.04-00
Product information Electromagnetic flowmeter
Electrode axis, horizontal installation position (Table 1, position 1, 2).
The electrode axis should be horizontal. If this is not possible, it must be ensured that the electrode axis comes into contact in the pipeline
at the 2:00 position, and not at the highest point (12:00 installation position).
Free outlet, fall pipe (Table 1, position 3).
In order to prevent the accumulation of gas and air, do not install the measuring device at the highest point (risk of air accumulation) or
immediately before a free outlet or in a fall pipe. With fall pipes having a distance to the upper point of the measuring point of > 5 m, a
siphon or degassing valve must be provided. This will prevent a breakaway of the liquid flow and thus the penetration of air.
Installation near pumps
Do not install the device on the suction side of pumps in order to avoid negative pressure and damage to the pipe cladding. In order to
avoid the transmission of vibrations to the measuring device, the use of pulsation attenuators and/or vibration compensators is
recommended. This can compensate for pulsations arising during the pumping process with dosing pumps.
Vertical installation position (Table 1, position 4)
Installation of a rising pipe is ideal for a vertical pipeline. Only in this way can it be ensured that the measuring tube is always completely full
and that gas bubbles can escape.
Partially filled pipelines
Installation similar to an inverted siphon is necessary for partially filled pipelines. In order to avoid disruptive deposits due to accumulation
of solid matter, the measuring sensor may not be installed at the lowest point of the inverted siphon.
Increase of flow speed, installation in pipelines with larger nominal widths
With an appropriate adapter piece, the measuring sensor can also be installed in a pipeline with a larger nominal width. The flow speed can
be increased as a result and the accuracy can be improved. With the use of a reducing adapter, the pressure loss can be determined as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
Determine the diameter ratio d/D (d = measuring sensor nominal width, D = pipeline inside diameter).
Refer to the flow diagram for the flow speed.
Read the pressure loss on the Y-axis in the diagram.
pi-ma-MFI447_E V2.04-00
pi_ma-Mag-Flow-HD_E
V3.04-00
105
11
Flow, magnetic-conductive
Inlet and outlet section (Figure 1)
To avoid incorrect measurements, a straight, uninterrupted inlet section of ≥ 3..5 x DN on the inlet side of the measuring sensor and section
≥ 2 x DN on the outlet side of the measuring sensor are required.
Valves and other actuators should be installed after the measuring sensor, downstream from the outlet section.
Product information Electromagnetic flowmeter
Instructions for flow meter layout
Abrasive media
… comprising a mixture of water and floating substances and/or solid particles varying in grain size, such as clay, sand, cement, concrete,
etc., which can have very sharp edges, depending on the production process. Depending on the flow speed, this can wear away the pipe
cladding and heavily reduced product service life.
In order to avoid this, the following must be observed for the use of MIDs for abrasive media:
●
●
●
Discuss the application with the manufacturer during the planning phase.
Select the minimum suitable flow speed (< 1 m/s). This can be achieved by choosing a larger measuring sensor.
Installation in a vertical rising pipe is ideal.
Highly adhesive media
Deposits and adhering material can be prevented with an appropriately high flow speed. The flow speed can be increased by selecting a
smaller measuring sensor.
Filmy, greasy media
Tip electrodes (special design) should be used for this type of media (e.g. cream). Due to their design, these electrodes have a selfcleaning effect, wherein the isolation of the electrodes and thus a disturbance of the measuring signal can be avoided.
Vacuum resistance
The measuring sensor fulfils the highest requirements with its high-quality, vacuum-resistant, dimensionally stable, and smooth PFA
cladding. It is resistant to rapid temperature increases (hot-cold change in the CIP process) or vacuum suction which can arise with the
emptying of pipelines.
Dimensioning
If flow speeds are too low, the pipeline must be reduced to a suitable MFI diameter.
With nominal pipe widths < DN10, reduction to a smaller diameter takes place in the measuring tube of the MFI.
Conversion table l/min  m/s
106
12
pi-ma-MFI447_E V2.04-00
pi_ma-Mag-Flow-HD_E
V3.04-00
Product information Electromagnetic flowmeter
Nominal-width-dependent conversion table for flow speed (m/s) to volume flow (l/min)
Sensor diameter
DN in mm
Flow speed
in m/s
0.20
0.009 0.038 0.085 0.151 0.34
0.60
0.94
2.12
3.77
5.89
0.40
0.019 0.075 0.170 0.301 0.68
1.21
1.88
4.24
7.54
0.60
0.028 0.113 0.254 0.452 1.02
1.81
2.83
0.80
0.038 0.151 0.339 0.603 1.36
2.41
3.77
1.00
0.047 0.188 0.424 0.754 1.70
3.01
4.71
10.60 18.84 29.44 48.23 75.36 117.75 199.00 301.44 471.00
1.20
0.057 0.226 0.509 0.904 2.03
3.62
5.65
12.72 22.61 35.33 57.88 90.43 141.30 238.80 361.73 565.20
1.40
0.066 0.264 0.593 1.055 2.37
4.22
6.59
14.84 26.38 41.21 67.52 105.50 164.85 278.60 422.02 659.40
1.60
0.075 0.301 0.678 1.206 2.71
4.82
7.54
16.96 30.14 47.10 77.17 120.58 188.40 318.40 482.30 753.60
1.80
0.085 0.339 0.763 1.356 3.05
5.43
8.48
19.08 33.91 52.99 86.81 135.65 211.95 358.20 542.59 847.80
2.00
0.094 0.377 0.848 1.507 3.39
6.03
9.42
21.20 37.68 58.88 96.46 150.72 235.50 398.00 602.88 942.00
2.50
0.118 0.471 1.060 1.884 4.24
7.54 11.78 26.49 47.10 73.59 120.58 188.40 294.38 497.49 753.60 1177.50
3.00
0.141 0.565 1.272 2.261 5.09
9.04 14.13 31.79 56.52 88.31 144.69 226.08 353.25 596.99 904.32 1413.00
4.00
0.188 0.754 1.696 3.014 6.78 12.06 18.84 42.39 75.36 117.75 192.92 301.44 471.00 795.99 1205.76 1884.00
5.00
0.236 0.942 2.120 3.768 8.48 15.07 23.55 52.99 94.20 147.19 241.15 376.80 588.75 994.99 1507.20 2355.00
6.00
0.283 1.130 2.543 4.522 10.17 18.09 28.26 63.59 113.04 176.63 289.38 452.16 706.50 1193.99 1808.64 2826.00
7.00
0.330 1.319 2.967 5.275 11.87 21.10 32.97 74.18 131.88 206.06 337.61 527.52 824.25 1392.98 2110.08 3297.00
8.00
0.377 1.507 3.391 6.029 13.56 24.12 37.68 84.78 150.72 235.50 385.84 602.88 942.00 1591.98 2411.52 3768.00
9.00
0.424 1.696 3.815 6.782 15.26 27.13 42.39 95.38 169.56 264.94 434.07 678.24 1059.75 1790.98 2712.96 4239.00
10.00
0.471 1.884 4.239 7.536 16.96 30.14 47.10 105.98 188.40 294.38 482.30 753.60 1177.50 1989.98 3014.40 4710.00
1
2
3
4
6
8
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
9.65
15.07
23.55
39.80
60.29
94.20
11.78 19.29 30.14
47.10
79.60 120.58 188.40
6.36
11.30 17.66 28.94 45.22
70.65
119.40 180.86 282.60
8.48
15.07 23.55 38.58 60.29
94.20 159.20 241.15 376.80
= The measuring precision is optimal in the green range
pi-ma-MFI447_E V2.04-00
pi_ma-Mag-Flow-HD_E
V3.04-00
107
13
Flow, magnetic-conductive
in Iitres/min
Product information Electromagnetic flowmeter
Adjustable measuring range end value
Nominal width smallest
[mm]
largest
smallest
[cm³/s]
largest
smallest
[cm³/min]
largest
smallest
[cm³/h]
largest
smallest
[l/s]
1
0.15708
7.85398
9.425
471.239
565.5
2
0.6283
31.4159
37.70
1884.96
2262
113097
0.00063
3
1.4137
70.6858
84.82
4241.15
5089
254469
0.00141
4
2.5133
125.6637
150.80
7539.82
9048
452389
6
5.655
282.743
339.3
16964.6
largest
smallest
[l/min]
28274.3
largest
[l/h]
0.00942
0.47124
0.5655
28.2743
0.03142
0.03770
1.88496
2.262
113.097
0.07069
0.08482
4.24115
5.089
254.469
0.00251
0.12566
0.15080
7.53982
9.048
452.389
0.00565
0.28274
0.3393
16.9646
20.36
1017.88
8
10.053
502.655
603.2
30159.3
0.01005
0.50265
0.6032
30.1593
36.19
1809.56
10
15.708
785.398
942.5
47123.9
0.01571
0.78540
0.9425
47.1239
56.55
2827.43
15
35.34
1767.15
2121
106029
0.03534
1.76715
2.121
106.029
127.23
6361.73
20
62.83
3141.59
3770
188496
0.06283
3.14159
3.770
188.496
25
98.17
4908.74
5890
294524
0.09817
4.90874
5.890
294.524
353.4
17671.5
32
160.85
8042.48
9651
482549
0.16085
8.04248
9.651
482.549
579.1
28952.9
40
251.3
12566.4
15080
753982
0.2513
12.5664
15.080
753.982
904.8
45238.9
50
392.7
19635.0
0.3927
19.6350
23.56
1178.10
1413.7
70685.8
65
663.7
33183.1
0.6637
33.1831
39.82
1990.98
2389
119459
80
1005.3
50265.5
1.0053
50.2655
60.32
3015.93
3619
180956
100
1570.8
78539.8
1.5708
78.5398
94.25
4712.39
5655
282743
Nominal
width
[mm]
smallest
largest smallest
[l/s]
largest smallest
[hl/min]
largest smallest
[hl/h]
largest smallest
[m³/s]
largest smallest
[m³/min]
largest smallest
[m³/h]
1
0.00565
0.28274
2
0.02262
1.13097
0.00226
3
0.05089
2.54469
0.00509
226.2
11309.7
largest
[gal/min]
0.00249
0.12449
0.11310
0.00996
0.49795
0.25447
0.02241
1.12039
4
0.00151
0.07540
0.09048
4.52389
0.00905
0.45239
0.03984
1.99181
6
0.00339
0.16965
0.2036
10.1788
0.00034
0.01696
0.02036
1.01788
0.08963
4.48157
8
0.00010
0.00503
0.00603
0.30159
0.3619
18.0956
0.00060
0.03016
0.03619
1.80956
0.15934
7.96724
10
0.00016
0.00785
0.00942
0.47124
0.5655
28.2743
0.00094
0.04712
0.05655
2.82743
0.2490
12.4488
15
0.00035
0.01767
0.02121
1.06029
1.2723
63.6173
0.00212
0.10603
0.12723
6.36173
0.5602
28.0098
20
0.00063
0.03142
0.03770
1.88496
2.262
113.097
0.00377
0.18850
0.2262
11.3097
0.9959
49.7953
25
0.00098
0.04909
0.05890
2.94524
3.534
176.715
0.00589
0.29452
0.3534
17.6715
1.5561
77.8051
32
0.00161
0.08042
0.09651
4.82549
5.791
289.529
0.00965
0.48255
0.5791
28.9529
2.550
127.476
40
0.00251
0.12566
0.15080
7.53982
9.048
452.389
0.00025
0.01257
0.01508
0.75398
0.9048
45.2389
3.984
199.181
50
0.00393
0.19635
0.2356
11.7810
14.137
706.858
0.00039
0.01963
0.02356
1.17810
1.4137
70.6858
6.224
311.220
65
0.00664
0.33183
0.3982
19.9098
23.89
1194.59
0.00066
0.03318
0.03982
1.99098
2.389
119.459
10.519
525.962
80
0.01005
0.50265
0.6032
30.1593
36.19
1809.56
0.00101
0.05027
0.06032
3.01593
3.619
180.956
15.934
796.724
100
0.01571
0.78540
0.9425
47.1239
56.55
2827.43
0.00157
0.07854
0.09425
4.71239
5.655
282.743
24.90
1244.88
= no value can be specified due to display numerical resolution
108
14
pi-ma-MFI447_E V2.04-00
pi_ma-Mag-Flow-HD_E
V3.04-00
Product information Electromagnetic flowmeter
MFI447 base unit order code
1.
MFI447 -
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
1. Nominal width
DN 1
001a
002a
DN 2
003b
DN 3
DN 4
004b
DN 6
006b
008
DN 8
010
DN 10
015
DN 15
020
DN 20
025
DN 25
032
DN 32
040
DN 40
050
DN 50
065
DN 65
080
DN 80
100
DN 100
2. Electrode material
0
stainless steel 1.4539 (standard)
3. Electrode shape
0
flush mounted (standard)
4. Options
00
no options
01
accuracy ± 0.3 % for DN ≥ 3..15
02
dosing control
5. Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
APZ2P
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 2 measuring
points (0°C / 70°C)
APZ4P
acceptance test certificate 3.1 with 4 measuring
points (0°C, 70°C + 2 test points freely
selectable)
incl. 1/8'' sanitary connection (PVC)
b
with nominal pipe widths < DN10 the measuring tube in the
sensor is reduced a smaller DN.
a
Order codes
Process connection foodstuffs
1.
APF 1
2.
3.
0 -
4.
5.
-
1.
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
1. Connection standard
2
DIN EN 10357 series A / DIN 11850 series 2
2. Type
1
welding nozzle
2
Tri-Clamp DIN 32676
3
milk pipe DIN 11851 process connection;
threaded connections on both sides
4
aseptic-thread nozzle DIN 11864;
threaded connectors on both sides
3. Type standards
0
standard (as described above under type)
1
milk pipe DIN 11851 on both sides
conical port with union nut
2
milk tube DIN 11851 thread-/conical port with union nut
1
aseptic-thread nozzle DIN 11864 on both sides nozzle with
union nut
2
aseptic-thread nozzle DIN 11864 thread/female union with
union nut
4. Nominal pipe width DN [mm]
010
DN 10
015
DN 15
020
DN 20
025
DN 25
032
DN 32
040
DN 40
050
DN 50
065
DN 65
080
DN 80
100
DN 100
5. Options
00
without option
6. Certificate DIN EN 10204. Specify only when required.
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
1.
APF 6
2.
3.
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
Area of application: foodstuffs; Material 1.4404
1.
2.
3.
-
Area of application: foodstuffs; Material 1.4404, Seal EPDM
pi-ma-MFI447_E V2.04-00
pi_ma-Mag-Flow-HD_E
V3.04-00
3.
Area of application: foodstuffs; Material 1.4404
6.
1. Connection standard
1
DIN EN 10357 series B / DIN 11850 series 1
2. Type
1
welding nozzle
3. Type standards
0
standard (as described above under construction)
4. Nominal pipe width DN
010, 015, 020, 025, 032, 040, 050
5. Options
00
without option
6. Certificate DIN EN 10204. Indicate only when required.
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
2.
APF 2
4.
5.
6.
Connection standard
6
OD-Tube (ASME)
Type
1
welding nozzle
2
Tri-Clamp (from ½'') DIN 32676
4
aseptic-thread nozzle DIN 11864-1 (from ½'')
threaded connectors on both sides
Type standards
0
standard (as described above under type)
1
aseptic-thread nozzle DIN 11864; on both sides female union
with slotted nut
2
aseptic-thread nozzle DIN 11864; thread/female union with
slotted nut
Nominal pipe width in inch ['']
008
3/8
010
1/2
020
3/4
025
1
040
1 1/2
050
2
065
2 1/2
080
3
100
4
Options
00
without option
Certificate DIN EN 10204. Specify only when required.
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
109
15
Flow, magnetic-conductive
Note:
An MFI always comprises a base unit and its process connections.
Please specify both when ordering.
Product information Electromagnetic flowmeter
1.
2.
3.
APF 7
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
1.
Area of application: foodstuffs; Material 1.4404
1. Connection standard
7
ISO 2037
2. Type
1
welding nozzle
4
aseptic-thread nozzle DIN 11864-1;
threaded connectors on both sides
3. Type standards
0
standard (as described above under type)
aseptic-thread nozzle DIN 11864; on both sides female union
1
with slotted nut
aseptic-thread nozzle DIN 11864; thread/female union with
slotted nut
2
4. Nominal pipe width DN [mm]
025
DN 25
032
DN 32
040
DN 40
050
DN 50
065
DN 65
080
DN 80
100
DN 100
5. Options
00
without option
6. Certificate DIN EN 10204. Specify only when required.
WZ2.2
1.
APF 8
factory certification 2.2
2.
3.
0 -
4.
5.
-
6.
-
Area of application: foodstuffs; material 1.4404; seal EPDM
1. Connection standard
8
process thread sensor MFI
2. Type
6
hose connection
3. Type standards
0
standard (as described above under type)
4. Nominal width MFI [mm]
010
DN 10
015
DN 15
5. Hose inner diameter [mm]
13
13,4 mm (suitable to DN 10)
19
19,0 mm (suitable to DN 15)
xx
on request
6. Options
00
without option
7. Certificate DIN EN 10204. Specify only when required.
WZ2.2
110
16
factory certification 2.2
Process connections for pharma
2.
3.
APF 3
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
Pharmacy industry; material 1.4435; incl. 3.1 certificate
1. Connection standard
3
DIN 11866 Line A
2. Type
1
welding nozzle
2
Tri-Clamp DIN 32676
aseptic-thread nozzle DIN 11864-1
4
threaded connectors on both sides
3. Type standards
0
standard (as described above under type)
aseptic-thread nozzle DIN 11864; on both sides female union
1
with slotted nut
aseptic-thread nozzle DIN 11864; thread/female union with
slotted nut
2
4. Nominal pipe width DN [mm]
010
DN 10
015
DN 15
020
DN 20
025
DN 25
032
DN 32
040
DN 40
050
DN 50
065
DN 65
080
DN 80
100
DN 100
5. Options
00
without option
6. Certificate DIN EN 10204. Specify only when required.
WZ2.2
1.
APF 4
factory certification 2.2
2.
3.
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
Pharmacy industry; material 1.4435; incl. 3.1 certificate
1. Connection standard
4
DIN 11866 Line B (ISO 1127)
2. Type
1
welding nozzle
2
Tri-Clamp DIN 32676
4
aseptic-thread nozzle DIN 11864-1
threaded connectors on both sides
3. Type standards
0
standard (as described above under type)
1
aseptic-thread nozzle DIN 11864; on both sides female
union with slotted nut
2
aseptic-thread nozzle DIN 11864; thread/female union
with slotted nut
4. Nominal pipe width DN [mm]
008
DN 8
010
DN 10
015
DN 15
020
DN 20
025
DN 25
032
DN 32
040
DN 40
050
DN 50
065
DN 65
080
DN 80
5. Options
00
without option
6. Certificate DIN EN 10204. Specify only when required.
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
pi-ma-MFI447_E V2.04-00
pi_ma-Mag-Flow-HD_E
V3.04-00
Product information Electromagnetic flowmeter
2.
3.
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
Pharmacy industry; material 1.4435; incl. 3.1 certificate
1. Connection standard
5
DIN 11866 Line C (ASME)
2. Type
1
welding nozzle
2
Tri-Clamp DIN 32676
4
aseptic-thread nozzle DIN 11864-1
threaded connectors on both sides
3. Type standards
0
standard (as described above under type)
1
aseptic-thread nozzle DIN 11864; on both sides female
union with slotted nut
2
aseptic-thread nozzle DIN 11864; thread/female union
with slotted nut
4. Nominal pipe width in inch ['']
008
3/8
010
1/2
020
3/4
025
1
040
1 1/2
050
2
065
2 1/2
080
3
5. Options
00
without option
6. Certificate DIN EN 10204. Specify only when required.
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Further information
Overview of standards
DIN EN 10357 - Austenitic, austenitic-ferritic and ferritic
longitudinally welded stainless steel tubes for the food and
chemical industry
This standard has been valid since March 2014 and replaces DIN
11850.
Pipes in accordance with DIN EN 10357 are classified in Series A,
B, C, and D, depending on their dimensions (Series A corresponds
to Series 2 of the old standard 11850, Series B corresponds to
Series 1 of the old standard 11850, and Series C corresponds to
the dimension in accordance with DIN EN ISO 1127 and DIN 11866
Series B).
The surface finish is classified as CC, CD, BC, and BD (exactly the
same as the old DIN standard 11850). Pipes with a ground outside
surface (CD, BD) must have an Ra value of <= 1.0µm on the
outside surface. The standard roughness on the inside is Ra <=
0.8µ/weld seam <=1.6µm. Standard materials are stainless steel
1.4301, 1.4307, 1.4404, 1.4432 and 1.4435. The material 1.4404 is
predominantly used.
Pipes according to this standard are primarily used in the foodstuffs
and beverage industry, as well as for cosmetics and fine chemicals.
GHM offers the following process connections in accordance
with this standard:
DIN EN 10357, Series A (formerly DIN 11850, Series 2):
Material 1.4404
welded-on nozzle
- Tri-Clamp in accordance with DIN
32676
- Milk tube thread and
- Reduction nozzle in accordance
with DIN 11851
- Sterile thread and
collared nozzle in accordance with
DIN 11864-1
DIN EN 10357, Series B (formerly DIN 11850, Series 1):
Material 1.4404
- Welded-on nozzle
- Hose nozzle
DIN 11850 (10/1999) Pipes for foodstuffs, chemicals, and
pharmaceuticals - pipes made of non-rusting steels dimensions, materials.
The standard DIN 11850 has not longer been valid since March 2014
and has been replaced by DIN EN 10357. However, since it was
applicable for many decades, it should be mentioned. The standard
11850 was developed for welded pipes made of non-rusting steels for
pipeline systems in the foodstuffs, pharmaceutical, and chemical
industries. The pipes are classified in Series 1 and 2 depending on
their dimensions (ISO dimensions are listed in DIN EN 1127) and,
depending on their surface finish, as CC (pickled inside and out), CD
(pickled inside and ground outside), BC (annealed inside and out and
pickled or bright-annealed), and BD (annealed inside and pickled or
bright-annealed and ground outside).
The standard roughness inside has the value Ra < 0.8µm/SN 1.6µm
(wherein 'SN' is the German abbreviation for weld seam). Standard
materials in accordance with the standard are 1.4301, 1.4307, and
1.4404. The material 1.4404 is predominantly used.
GHM offers the following process connections in accordance
with this standard:
DIN 11850, Series 1 (new standard DIN EN 10357, Series B):
Material 1.4404
- Welded-on nozzle
- Hose nozzle
pi-ma-MFI447_E V2.04-00
pi_ma-Mag-Flow-HD_E
V3.04-00
111
17
Flow, magnetic-conductive
1.
APF 5
Product information Electromagnetic flowmeter
DIN 11850, Series 2 (new standard DIN EN 10357, Series A):
Material 1.4404
- Welded-on nozzle
- Tri-Clamp in accordance with DIN
32676
- Milk tube thread and
- Reduction nozzle in accordance
with DIN 11851
- Sterile thread and
collared nozzle in accordance with
DIN 11864-1
- Hose nozzle
DIN 11866 (1/2003)Pipes made of non-rusting steel for
aseptic, chemical, and pharmaceutical applications
The standard was developed for welded and seamless pipes of
Test Class 2 in accordance with DIN 17457 and DIN 17458 made
of non-rusting steels for pipeline systems in aseptic, chemical, and
pharmaceutical applications. They are classified in Series A to C
according to the pipe dimensions.
Series A corresponds to the dimensions according to DIN EN
10357 Series A (formerly DIN 11850 Series 2), Series B
corresponds to the dimensions according to DIN EN 10357 Series
C and/or DIN EN ISO 1127.
Series C corresponds to the dimensions according to ASME-BPE
2005 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers- Bioprocessing
Equipment Standard).
The surface finishes are classified in hygiene classes H1
(1.6µm/SN3.2µm). H2 (0.8µm/SN 1.6µm). H3 (0.8µm/SN 0.8µm).
H4 (0.4µm/SN 0.4µm) and H5 (0.25µm/SN 0.25µm). Standard
materials in accordance with the standard are 1.4404, 1.4435, and
1.4539. The material 1.4435 is predominantly used.
GHM offers everything in accordance with this standard,
including 3.1 certificate: DIN 11866 Series A,B,C:
112
18
Material 1.4435
- Welded-on nozzle
- Tri-Clamp in accordance with DIN
32676
- Sterile thread and collared nozzle
in accordance with DIN 11864-1
- Hose nozzle
OD tube accord to ASME standard
OD
= outside diameter,
ASME = American Society of Mechanical Engineers
These pipe sizes correspond to DIN11866, Series C. The process
connections are made of the material 1.4404.
GHM offers the following process connections in accordance
with this standard:
OD tube: Material 1.4404
- Welded-on nozzle
- Tri-Clamp in accordance with DIN
32676
- Sterile thread and collared nozzle
in accordance with DIN 11864-1
- Hose nozzle
ISO 2037 pipes made of non-rusting steels for foodstuffs
Standard of the International Organization for Standardization.
The standard includes pipe dimensions, surface roughness, and
materials for welded and seamless pipes.
GHM offers the following process connections in accordance
with this standard:
ISO2037: Material 1.4404
- Welded-on nozzle
- Tri-Clamp in accordance with DIN
32676
- Sterile thread and collared nozzle
in accordance with DIN 11864-1
- Hose nozzle
pi-ma-MFI447_E V2.04-00
pi_ma-Mag-Flow-HD_E
V3.04-00
113
Flow, calorimetric
114
Hygienic Design
Flow, calorimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
115
Flow, calorimetric
Page
116
Flow, calorimetric
www.ghm-group.de
Product information
Hygienic Design
Flow, calorimetry
TYPE EL - CLASS I
DECEMBER 2012
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Characteristics
Applications
System
○ Food and drink industries
○ Calorimetric flow sensors
○ Pharmaceutical industry
Evaluation
○ Flow switching
○ Displays, switching, measuring
○ Dry-run protection
Process connection
○ GHMadapt G ½
Process pressure
○ PN 50 bar
Temperature
○ -20..+140 °C
Materials
○ 1.4404, 1.4435 only one material in contact with the medium
Function and benefits
The calorimetric principle of the flow transmitter / switch from
HONSBERG is based on two temperature sensors, both in good
heat-conducting contact with the medium with simultaneously good
heat insulation from one another.
Medium
RT1
RT2
Heating
Tube
Plug-in sensor construction principle
Elektronics
118
Inline sensor construction principle
One of the sensors is heated to a constant Δ T to the unheated
sensor, so that a constant temperature difference between the two
temperature sensors is set while the medium being measured is
at a standstill. If the medium being measured moves, the thermal
energy is extracted from heated temperature sensor and is immediately returned through a regulation until the same difference is
provided. The energy required to do so is proportional to the current
mass flow of the medium being measured.
In the process, the unheated temperature sensor detects the
medium temperature and thereby enables a temperature compensation. In doing so, the flow is even correctly detected in the event
of fluctuations of the medium temperature.
Different media influence the response time, because they have
different heat conductivity. In general, the following rule applies: the
lower the heat conductivity of the medium, the greater the medium
flow must be in order to be detected.
With operation of the calorimetric measurement and monitoring
principle, the state of the test medium as well as the medium
temperature in relation to the desired measurement results play
a crucial role. The present standard devices are designed and
calibrated for the following parameters: Medium: water, temperature
range 0 ..85 °C.
With a deviating medium consistence, e.g. viscosity or air and gases or enduring temperatures of more than 85 °C or less than 0 °C,
we recommend leaving the device configuration according to the
individual recommendation of the manufacturer.
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e V2.01-00
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Explanation of terms
HFK12
Temperature gradient = temperature change per time unit of the
medium (K/s). With volatile changes of the medium temperature,
compensation can only be made within a specific range. The range
in which fault-free operation is guaranteed is specified. If this
temperature is exceeded by the medium, an error message may be
issued by t he s ystem f or a brief t ime. O n such m essage c an, of
course be suppressed by switching delays, however, the switch-on
and switch-off time of the system in general will be altered.
Pulse programming on pin 2:
Apply the supply voltage level for one second and save
the current value as the full scale value (for analog
outputs) or as a switching value (for limit switches).
Switch-on and switch-off time is the time in which the regular
measurement parameter is detected after a volatile increase or drop
of the flow speed. With a medium temperature of approximately 25
and a stainless steel sensor in water as a medium, there is an average switch-on and switch-off time of approximately two seconds.
Please observe that this time depends on the operating conditions.
With media with poor thermal conductivity or poor sensor materials,
slower switching times arise.
Temperature range of the medium is the range in which the calorimetric sensor functions faultlessly.
HFK35
Flow, calorimetric
Start-up time is the time in which the device reaches its specified
operating mode after operating voltage is applied. After they are
switched on, the displays and outputs initially go to the maximum
value of the metering range. After approximately three seconds, the
current measurement is displayed and output.
Programming with Magnet-Ring:
With the aid of the display and of the movable ring,
numerous parameters can be conveniently set on the spot.
HFK30
Programming with Magnet-Clip:
Hold the magnet to the marking for 1 second and save
the present value as the full scale value (for analog
outputs) or as a switching value (for limit switches).
General installation instructions
As a basic principle, any installation location and position in which
the “nose” of the sensor completely protrudes into the flowing media
is suitable (see diagram). If the sensor is used for the detection of
filled or non-filled pipes, of course this does not apply!
Air bubbles
Cable outlet
- rotatable
ECI-1
If required, all parameters can be set at any time on all
intelligent sensors, using the ECI-1 device configurator.
Deposits
marking X in the flow direction
= greatest sensitivity and fast
response time
Flow speed
large
small
Universal switching outputs
The push-pull transistor outputs enable the simplest installation.
Therefore, they can be installed like an NPN or like a PNP switch
and function accordingly without requiring additional configuration
with the parameter settings and without wire breaks or the like. You
are assured a resistance to short circuits and pole reversal and an
overload or short circuit is also shown in the display with HFK35
electronics.
Product family
Programmability of parameters
Calorimetric sensors can also be used as:
All calorimetric sensors from HONSBERG are a part of the family
of intelligent sensors. They have a microcontroller which enables a
multitude of parameter changes.
By standard, all three main electronics have the capability of
making local changes. In addition, an interface (device configurator
ECI-1) can be used to change all saved parameters of a device at
any time, if desired or necessary.
○ Limit status sensors
○ Drip sensors
○ Temperature sensors
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e V2.01-00
For this purpose, see the separate product information.
The same operation and the same or a similar installation type are
the benefits of a product family.
119
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Device overview
-20..+140 °C
Measuring
Medium temperature
PN 50
Switching
Resistance Pressure
in bar
2..300 cm/s
Displays
Range
Measurement accuracy
Output signal
Graphic
LCD
illuminated
transreflective
2x
Push-Pull
0/4..20 mA
or
0/2..10 V
121
-20..+140 °C
-
1x
Push-Pull
or
Frequency
0..2 kHz
4..20 mA
or
0..10 V
124
PN 50
-20..+140 °C
-
-
4..20 mA
128
2..300 cm/s
PN 50
-20..+140 °C
-
-
0..10 V
128
±10 %
from full
scale value
2..300 cm/s
PN 50
-20..+140 °C
-
-
Frequency
0..2 kHz
128
HFK12-C
±10 %
from full
scale value
2..300 cm/s
PN 50
-20..+140 °C
-
-
Quantity pulse
128
HFK12-S
±10 %
from full
scale value
2..300 cm/s
PN 50
-20..+130°C
-
1x
Push-Pull
-
131
HFK35-FIN
±3 %
from full
scale value
0,001..2 l/min
or
0,025..5 l/min
or
0,05..10 l/min
-20..+130 °C
Graphic
LCD
illuminated
trans
reflective
2x
Push-Pull
0/4..20 mA
or
0/2..10 V
134
HFK30-FIN
±3 %
from full
scale value
0,001..2 l/min
or
0,025..5 l/min
or
0,05..10 l/min
-
1x
Push-Pull
or
Frequency
0..2 kHz
4..20 mA
or
0..10 V
137
Device
HFK35
±10 %
from full
scale value
HFK30
±10 %
from full
scale value
2..300 cm/s
PN 50
HFK12-I
±10 %
from full
scale value
2..300 cm/s
HFK12-U
±10 %
from full
scale value
HFK12-F
PN 10
PN 10
-20..+130 °C
Page
Accessories
ECI-1
Device configurator
141
Cables
KH-...
142
Process adapter
APH-... / AMH-...
143
Errors and technical modifications reserved.
120
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e V2.01-00
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Flow Transmitter /
Switch HFK35
Technical data
Sensor
Process
connection
Metering range
Measurement
accuracy
Repeatability
Temperature
gradient
Start-up time
Response time
● Flow indicator for foodstuffs use, without
moving parts
● Short response times for a calorimetric sensor
● Medium comes into contact with only one material
● Analog output 0/4..20 mA or 0/2..10 V
● Two programmable switches (push-pull)
● Graphical LCD display, backlit
(transreflective), can be read in sunlight and in the dark
● Programmable parameters via rotatable, removable ring
(programming protection)
● Full metal housing with non-scratch, chemically
resistant glass
● Rotatable electronic head for best reading position
● Small, compact construction
● Simple installation
Characteristics
The calorimetric sensor measures the flow speed in aqueous fluids.
The integrated transducer has a backlit graphics LCD display which
is very easy to read both in the dark and in bright sunlight. The
graphics display allows the presentation of measured values and
parameters in a clearly understandable form. The measured values
are displayed to 4 places, together with their physical unit, which
may also be modified by the user. The electronics have an analog
output (4..20 mA or 0..10 V) and two switching outputs, which can
be used as limit switches for monitoring minimal or maximal, or as
two-point controllers.
The switching outputs are designed as push-pull drivers, and can
therefore be used both as PNP and NPN outputs. Exceeding limit
values is signalled by a red LED which is visible over a long
distance, and by a cleartext in the display. The stainless steel case
has a hardened non-scratch mineral glass pane. It is operated by a
programming ring fitted with a magnet, so there is no need to open
the operating controls housing, and its leakproofness is
permanently ensured.
By turning the ring to right or left, it is simple to modify the
parameters (e.g. switching point, hysteresis...). To protect from
unintended programming, it can be removed, turned through 180 °
and replaced, or completely removed, thus acting as a key.
Process pressure
Media
temperature
Ambient
temperature
Storage
temperature
CIP- / SIP
temperature
Materials
medium-contact
Materials, nonmedium-contact
Supply voltage
Analog output
calorimetric measurement principle
GHMadapt G 1/2
water 2..150 cm/s range, 2..300 cm/s
available on request
oil (available on request)
±10 % end value, tested with 10 x D in inlet
and output, with a rising pipe
(medium: water)
±1 %
4 K/s
10 sec. after application of operating voltage
in water (25 °C) at an average flow speed of
approx. 1-2 sec.
PN 50
0..+100 °C
-20..+70 °C
-20..+80 °C
140 °C, < 30 min
stainless steel 1.4435, FDA-compliant
Housing:
Glass:
Magnet:
Ring:
24 V DC ±10 %
0/4..20 mA or
0/2..10 V
max. 2.5 W
stainless steel 1.4305
mineral glass, hardened
samarium-Cobalt
POM
Power
consumption
Switching outputs transistor output "push-pull"
S1 and S2
(resistant to short circuits and polarity
reversal) lout = 100 mA max. per output
Hysteresis
adjustable, position of the hysteresis
depends on minimum or maximum
switching value
Display
backlit graphical LCD-Display
(transreflective), extended temperature
range -20..+70 °C, 32 x 16 pixels,
background illumination, displays value and
unit, flashing LED signal lamp with
simultaneous message on the display.
Electrical
for round plug connector M12x1, 5-pole
connection
Ingress protection IP 67
Weight
approx. 0.25 kg
Conformity
CE
It is recommended also to order a T-piece, as the later installation
position corresponds to the factory calibration situation.
pi-ho_fka-hfk35_e V2.02-01 V2.01-00
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e
121
1
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Wiring
Programming
Z = Load
1
2
3
4
5
brown
24 V DC ±10 %
white
analog output
blue
black
Z
3
5
Z
grey
0V
Set to 1 = continue (STEP)
Set to 2 = modify (PROG)
switching signal 1
Neutral position between 1 and 2
switching signal 2
Connection example: PNP
2
The annular gap of the programming ring can be turned to positions
1 and 2. The following actions are possible:
NPN
1
4
The switching outputs are self-configuring, depending on whether
they are connected as PNP or NPN switches (push-pull).
It is recommended to use shielded wiring.
Dimensions
x
x
For compatible adapters in the GHMadapt series, see attachment.
The ring can be removed to act as a key, or turned through 180 °
and replaced to create a programming protector.
Operation is by dialog with the display messages, which makes its
use very simple.
Starting from the normal display (present value and unit), if 1
(STEP) is repeatedly selected, then the display shows the following
information in this order:
Display of the parameters, using position 1
● Switching value S1 (switching point 1 in the selected unit)
● Switching characteristic of S1
MIN = Monitoring of minimum value
MAX = Monitoring of maximum value
● Hysteresis 1 (hysteresis value of S1 in the set unit)
● Switching value S2
● Switching characteristic of S2
● Hysteresis 2
● Code
After entering the code 111, further parameters can be defined:
● Filter (settling time of the display and output)
● Physical unit (Units)
● Output: 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA
● 0/4 mA (measured value corresponding to 0/4 mA)
● 20 mA (measured value corresponding to 20 mA)
For models with a voltage output, replace 20 mA accordingly with
10 V.
Handling and operation
Edit, using position 2
Installation
If the currently visible parameter is to be modified:
● Turn the annular gap to position 2, so that a flashing cursor
appears which displays the position which can be modified.
● By repeatedly turning to position 2, values are increased; by
turning to position 1, the cursor moves to the next digit.
● Leave the parameter by turning to position 1 (until the cursor
leaves the row); this accepts the modification.
● If there is no action within 30 seconds, the device returns to the
normal display range without accepting the modification.
● In order to ensure the sensor's maximum insensitivity to
interference, the flow should run from bottom to top (best
degassing even at the slowest flow speed).
● Installation in the pipework is achieved by means of GHMadapt
T-pieces, or welded-on nozzles.
● The reduction of the sensor tip must lie completely in the open
flow cross-section.
● Run-in and run-out sections of 10 x D should be ensured.
122
2
pi-ho_fka-hfk35_e V2.02-01
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e
V2.01-00
Product information Flow, calorimetry
The limit switches S1 and S2 can be used to monitor minimal or
maximal.
With a minimum-switch, falling below the limit value causes a
switchover to the alarm state. Return to the normal state occurs
when the limit value plus the set hysteresis is once more exceeded.
Ordering code
1.
HFK35 - 015
2.
3.
Min+Hyst
Min
4.
t
With a maximum-switch, exceeding the limit value causes a
switchover to the alarm state. Return to the normal state occurs
when the measured value once more falls below the limit value minus the set hysteresis.
T
3.
4.
5.
6.
S
=Option
1.
T
2.
K1
5.
6.
Sensor tip length
015
L = 15 mm
Sensor material
K1
stainless steel 1.4435
Analog output
I
current output 0/4..20 mA
 voltage output 0/2..10 V
U
Electrical connection
S
for round plug connector M12x1, 5-pole
Options
00
without option
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
APZMAT acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Accessories
● ECI-3 device configurator (USB programming adapter)
● Process adapter
● Cable/round plug connector (KH...)
see additional information “Accessories”
Max
Max-Hyst
t
The change to the alarm state is indicated by the integrated red
LED and a cleartext in the display.
While in the normal state the switching outputs are at the level of
the supply voltage; in the alarm state they are at 0 V, so that a wire
break would also display as an alarm state at the signal receiver.
Overload display
Overload of a switching output is detected and indicated on the
display ("Check S1 / S2"), and the switching output is switched off.
Simulation mode
To simplify commissioning, the sensor provides a simulation mode
for the analog output. It is possible to create a programmable value
in the range 0..26.0 mA at the output (without modifying the
process variable). This allows the wiring run between the sensor
and the downstream electronics to be tested during commissioning.
This mode is accessed by means of code 311.
Factory settings
After modifying the configuration parameters, it is possible to reset
them to the factory settings at any time using code 989.
pi-ho_fka-hfk35_e V2.02-01 V2.01-00
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e
123
3
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Flow and Temperature
Transmitter / Switch
HFK30
● Compact robust flow rate switch/transmitter for
foodstuffs use
● Combination with temperature switch or transmitter
possible
● Mo moving parts in the medium being monitored
● Only one medium-contact material
● Simple to use
● Very low pressure loss
● Rapid response times for a calorimetric
Sensor
● Cable outlet infinitely rotatable
● Very small installation width, therefore very narrow
pipework is possible
Characteristics
The HFK30 flow sensor monitors fluid media. Its compact form
combines the measurement tube and the converter / counter. The
integrated transducer has an analog output (4..20 mA or 0..10 V)
and one switching output, which can be configured as a limit switch
for monitoring minimla or maximal, or as a frequency output.
The switching output is designed as a push-pull driver, and can
therefore be used both as a PNP or an NPN output. The state of
the switching output is signalled with a yellow LED in the switching
outlet; the LED has all-round visibility.
The sensor is configured in the factory, or alternatively this can be
done with the aid of the optionally available ECI-3 device
configurator (USB interface for PC). A selectable parameter can be
modified on the device, with the aid of the magnet clip provided. In
this case, the current measured value is saved as the parameter
value. Examples of these parameters are the switching value or the
metering range end value. The stainless steel electronics housing
is rotatable, so it is possible to orient the cable outlet after
installation.
The converter / counter record two process parameters: the flow
speed of the medium and its temperature. Both parameters can be
assigned to the analog output or to the switching output. The
following output combinations are available:
Flow
Analog output
Switching
output






Temperature
Analog output
Switching
output
switch. It is recommended also to order a T-piece, as the later installation position corresponds to the factory calibration situation.
Technical data
Sensor
Process
connection
Metering ranges
Flow
Measurement
accuracy
Flow
Repeatability
Temperature
gradient
Start-up time
Response time
Process pressure
Metering range
Temperature
Measurement
accuracy
Temperature
Media
temperature
Ambient
temperature
CIP- / SIP
temperature
Storage
temperature
Programming/
settings
Materials
medium-contact
Materials, nonmedium-contact
Supply voltage
Current
consumption
Switching output
Switching
hysteresis
Display (only with
switching output)
Analog output
calorimetric measurement principle
GHMadapt G 1/2
water 2..150 cm/s range, 2..300 cm/s
available on request
oil (available on request)
±10 % end value, tested with 10 x D in inlet
and output, with a rising pipe
(medium: water)
±1 %
4 K/s
10 sec. after application of operating voltage
in water (25 °C) at an average flow speed of
approx. 1-2 sec.
PN 50
0..+100 °C (steam cannot be measured)
±2 °C
0..+100 °C
-20..+70 °C
140 °C, < 30 min
-20..+80 °C
by means of magnet
sensor 1.4435, FDA-compliant
housing 1.4305, plug PA6.6, clip PA6.6
24 V DC ±10 %
max. 100 mA
transistor output "push-pull", compatible
with PNP and NPN, (resistant to short
circuits and polarity reversal) Iout = 100 mA
max.
flow 4 % of end value, temp.: approx. 2 °C
yellow LED
(On = OK / Off = Alarm)
4..20 mA / Load 500 Ohm max. or
0..10 V / Load min. 1 kOhm
for round plug connector M12x1, 4-pole
Electrical
connection
Ingress protection IP 67
Weight
approx. 0.2 kg (standard version)
Conformity
CE


the switching output can be ordered as a minimum or a maximum
124
pi-ho_fka-hfk30_e V2.02-01
1
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e V2.01-00
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Wiring
Z = Load
1
2
3
4
brown
analog output
blue
Z
black
Connection example:
2
1
3
4
+24 V DC ±10 %
white
PNP
Z
0V
switching/
frequency output
NPN
After the programming ("teaching"), the clip can either be left on the
device, or removed to protect data.
The device has a yellow LED which flashes during the
programming pulse. During operation, the LED serves as a status
display for the switching output.
In order to avoid the need to transit to an undesired operating
status during "teaching", the device can be provided ex-works with
a "teach-offset". The "teach-offset" value is added to the currently
measured value before saving (or is subtracted if a negative value
is entered).
Example: The switching value is to be set to 70 % of the metering
range, because at this flow rate a critical process status is to be
notified. However, only 50% can be achieved without danger. In
this case, the device would be ordered with a "teach-offset" of
+20 %. At 50 % in the process, a switching value of 70 % would
then be stored during "teaching".
Normally, programming is used to set the limit switch. However, if
desired, other parameters such as the end value of the analog or
frequency output may also be set.
Dimensions
The limit switch can be used to monitor minimal or maximal. With a
minimum-switch, falling below the limit value causes a switchover
to the alarm state. Return to the normal state occurs when the limit
value plus the set hysteresis is once more exceeded.
T
x
x
For compatible T-pieces and weld-on sockets in the
GHMadaptseries, see "Accessories".
Min+Hyst
Min
Handling and operation
t
Installation
The sensor is inserted into the
boring together with a sealing
cone, oriented, and fastened in
place with a pressure screw.
When a flow is present, this
Marking
x
should impinge on the side of
Flow
the sensor marked with an X, in
order to achieve as small a
response time as possible.
The torque on the pressure screw should be between 5..10 Nm.
Avoid bubbles or deposits on the sensor. It is therefore best to
install at the side.
For T-pieces or welded-on nozzles, see Accessories.
With a maximum-switch, exceeding the limit value causes a switchover to the alarm state. Return to the normal state occurs when
the measured value once more falls below the limit value minus the
set hysteresis.
T
Max
Max-Hyst
Programming
The electronics contain a magnetic contact, with the aid of which
different parameters can be programmed. Programming takes
place when a magnet clip is applied for a period between 0.5 and
2 seconds to the marking located on the label. If the contact time is
longer or shorter than this, no programming takes place (protection
against external magnetic fields).
2
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e
V2.01-00
t
125
pi-ho_fka-hfk30_e V2.02-01
Product information Flow, calorimetry
A switchover delay time (tDS) can be applied to the switchover to the
alarm state. Equally, one switch-back delay time (tDR) of several can
be applied to switching back to the normal state.
T
Ordering code
1.
HFK30 - 015
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
K1
=Option
1.
Max
Max-Hyst
t
tDS
tDR
In the normal state the integrated LED is on, in the alarm state it is
off, and this corresponds to its status when there is no supply voltage.
In the non-inverted (standard) model, while in the normal state the
switching output is at the level of the supply voltage; in the alarm
state it is at 0 V, so that a wire break would also display as an
alarm state at the signal receiver.
Optionally, an inverted switching output can also be provided, i.e. in
the normal state the output is at 0 V, and in the alarm state it is at
the level of the supply voltage.
t
non-inverted output
Sensor tip length
015
L = 15 mm
2. Sensor material
K1
stainless steel 1.4435
3. Analog output
I
current output 4..20 mA
U
voltage output 0..10 V
4. Measurement parameter to analog output
F
flow rate to analog output
T
temperature to analog output
5. Switching output
T
transistor output "push-pull"
 NPN (open collector)
M
6. Measurement parameter to switching output
F
flow to switching output
T
temperature to switching output
7. Functioning of the switching output
L
minimum-switch
H
maximum-switch
R
frequency output
8. Switching signal
O
standard
I
inverted
9. Options
00
without option
10. Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
APZMAT
(in contact with products)
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
inverted output
A Power-On delay function (ordered as a separate option) makes it
possible to maintain the switching output in the normal state for a
defined period after application of the supply voltage.
126
pi-ho_fka-hfk30_e V2.02-01
3
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e V2.01-00
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Options
Special measuring range for flow:
max. 300 cm/s (standard = 150 cm/s)
cm/s
Special measuring range for temperature:
Maximum 130 °C (standard = 100 °C)
°C
Minimum -20 °C (standard = 0 °C)
°C
Special range for analog output:
<= metering range (standard = metering
range)
Special range for frequency output:
<= metering range (standard = metering
range)
cm/s
°C
End frequency (max. 2000 Hz)
Hz
cm/s
°C
Switching delay period (0.0..99.9 s)
(from Normal to Alarm)
.
s
Switch-back delay period (0.0..99.9 s)
(from Alarm to Normal)
.
s
Power-On-Delay period (0..99 s)
(time after applying power during which the
outputs are not activated or set to defined
values)
s
Switching output fixed
cm/s
°C
Special hysteresis
%/ °C
Teach-offset
(in percent of the metering range)
Standard = 0 %
%
If the field is not completed, the standard setting is selected
automatically.
Accessories
● ECI-3 device configurator (USB programming adapter)
● Process adapter
● Cable/round plug connector (KH...)
see additional information “Accessories”
● External display OMNI-TA or OMNI Remote
4
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e
V2.01-00
127
pi-ho_fka-hfk30_e V2.02-01
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Calorimetric
Flow Transmitter
HFK12-I / U / F / C
● Complete flow transmitter for the foodstuffs industry, in
12 mm housing
● Analog output 4..20 mA (HFK12-I)
● Analog output 0..10 V (HFK12-U)
● Frequency output (HFK12-F)
● Pulse output (HFK12-C)
● User-configurable via plug pin (teaching)
● Same mechanical construction available as temperature
transmitter/switch, flow transmitter/switch or as a level
switch or drip sensor
Characteristics
The sensors in the HFK12 family can be used for the measurement
and monitoring of flows, and are specially designed for use in the
foodstuffs industry. They require little space, yet offer a variable
sensor length, as well as various fastening options. The 16-bit
processor provides linearisation and temperature compensation,
and emits the standardised output signal.
The HFK12 electronics transmit the result as
●
●
●
●
an analog 4..20 mA signal (HFK12-I)
an analog 0..10 V signal (HFK12-U)
a frequency signal (HFK12-F)
a value signal Pulse / x Litres (HFK12-C)
Process pressure
Media
temperature
Ambient
temperature
Storage
temperature
CIP- / SIP
temperature
Materials
medium-contact
Non-mediumcontact materials
Supply voltage
Current
consumption at
rest
Output
PN 50
-20..+100 °C
0..+60 °C
-20..+80 °C
140 °C, < 30 min
sensor tip
1.4435, FDA-compliant
Housing:
Pressure screw:
Plug:
Contacts:
24 V DC ±10 %
< 60 mA
1.4571
1.4404
PA
gold-plated
HFK12-I: 4..20 mA /
max. load 500 Ohm
HFK12-U: 0..10 V / min. load 1 kOhm
HFK12-F: Frequency output "push-pull"
(resistant to short circuits and polarity
reversal) lout = 100 mA max.
selectable output frequency, max. 2 kHz
HFK12-C: transistor output "push-pull",
(resistant to short circuits and polarity
reversal) lout = 100 mA max.
selectable pulse per volume, details of
nominal pipework width required,
pulse width 50 ms
for round plug connector M12x1, 4-pole
Electrical
connection
Ingress protection IP 67
Weight
approx. 0.1 kg incl. pressure screw
Conformity
CE
If desired, the range end value can be set to the presently existing
flow rate using teaching (see Handling and Operation).
It is recommended also to order a T-piece, as the later installation
position corresponds to the factory calibration situation.
Technical data
Sensor
Process
connection
Metering range
Measurement
accuracy
Repeatability
Temperature
gradient
Start-up time
Response time
calorimetric measurement principle
GHMadapt G 1/2
water 2..150 cm/s range, 2..300 cm/s
available on request
oil (available on request)
±10 % end value, tested with 10 x D in inlet
and output, with a rising pipe
(medium: water)
±1 %
4 K/s
10 sec. after application of operating voltage
in water (25 °C) at an average flow speed of
approx. 1-2 sec.
128
pi-ho_fka-hfk12-iuf_e V2.02-02
1
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e V2.01-00
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Handling and operation
Wiring
Z = Load
1
2
3
4
brown
+24 V DC ±10 %
white
programming
blue
Z
black
Connection example: PNP
2
1
3
4
Note
Z
0V
signal output
NPN
The metering range end value can be programmed by the user via
"teaching". Requirement for programmability must be stated when
ordering, otherwise the device cannot be programmed.
The ECI-1 device configurator with associated software is available
as a convenient option for programming all parameters by PC, and
for adjustment.
Operation and programming
If desired, the metering range end can be set by the user by means
of teaching.
For this, proceed as follows:
● Apply the flow rate end range to the device
● Apply an impulse of at least 0.5 seconds and max. 2 seconds
duration to pin 2 (e.g. via a bridge to the auxiliary voltage or a
pulse from the PLC), in order to accept the measured value.
● When the teaching is complete, pin 2 should be connected to
0 V, so as to prevent unintended programming.
The use of shielded cabling is recommended.
Dimensions
The devices have a yellow LED which flashes during the
programming pulse. During operation, the LED acts as a display for
the operating voltage.
x
x
For compatible T-pieces and weld-on sockets in the
GHMadaptseries, see "Accessories".
With the HFK12-C, the teaching option is not available.
Installation
The sensor is inserted into the
boring together with a sealing
cone, oriented, and fastened in
place with a pressure screw.
When a flow is present, this
should impinge on the side of
the sensor marked with an X, in
order to achieve as small a
response time as possible.
Marking
Flow
x
The torque on the pressure screw should be between 5..10 Nm.
Avoid bubbles or deposits on the sensor! It is therefore best to
install at the side.
2
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e
V2.01-00
129
pi-ho_fka-hfk12-iuf_e V2.02-02
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Order code
HFK12-
Accessories
1.
2.
015
3.
K1
4.
5.
H
6.
7.
=Option
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
● ECI-3 device configurator (USB programming adapter)
● Process adapter
● Cable/round plug connector (KH...)
see additional information “Accessories”
● External display OMNI-TA or OMNI Remote
Electrical output
I
current output 4..20 mA
U
voltage output 0..10 V
F
frequency output
pulse output
C
Sensor tip length
015
L = 15 mm
Sensor material
K1
stainless steel 1.4435
Programming
N
cannot be programmed (no teaching)
 programmable (teaching possible)
P
Temperature
H
CIP- / SIP version, 140 °C, 30 minutes max.
Options
00
without option
programmable (teaching possible)
P
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
APZMAT acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Required order information
For HFK12-F:
Output frequency at full scale
Maximum value: 2.000 Hz
Hz
For HFK12-C:
For HFK12-C, the volume must be stated (with numerical value and
unit) which will correspond to one pulse. Here, the adjustment
depends on the internal tubing diameter, which therefore must also
be stated. If the order for the device includes the T-piece, then
there is no need to state the internal tubing diameter.
Volume per pulse (numerical value)
Volume per pulse (unit)
Tubing diameter
mm
Options
Special range for analog output:
<= Metering range (standard=metering
range)
Special range for frequency output:
<= Metering range (standard=metering
range)
Power-On-Delay period (0..99 s)
(time after applying power during which the
outputs are not activated or set to defined
values)
130
pi-ho_fka-hfk12-iuf_e V2.02-02
cm/s
cm/s
s
3
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e V2.01-00
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Calorimetric Flow Switch
HFK12-S
● Calorimetric flow switch for the foodstuffs industry in
12 mm housing
● User-configurable via plug pin (teaching)
● Same mechanical construction available as temperature
transmitter/switch, as level switch, or as drip sensor
Characteristics
The sensors of the HFK12 family can be used for measuring and
monitoring flows in aqueous fluid media. They provide multiple
configuration options combined with low space requirements. The
mechanical construction makes them suitable for use in the
foodstuffs industry.
The electronics of the HFK12 are a flexibly configurable limit
switch.
The switching value can be set by the user via teaching (see
Handling and Operation). All other values have been preset at the
factory, but can be modified by the user with the aid of the
optionally available ECI-3 device configurator and a PC.
Process pressure
Media
temperature
Ambient
temperature
Storage
temperature
CIP/ SIP
temperature
Materials
medium-contact
Materials nonmedium-contact
Supply voltage
Current
consumption at
rest
Switching output
Switching value
Hysteresis
Minimum/maximum monitoring
Switching delay
Switchback delay
Power-On delay
Teach-Offset
It is recommended also to order a T-piece, as the later installation
position corresponds to the factory calibration situation.
Technical data
Sensor
Process
connection
Metering range
Measurement
accuracy
Repeatability
Temperature
gradient
Start-up time
Response time
calorimetric measurement principle
GHMadapt G 1/2
water 2..150 cm/s range,
2..300 cm/s available on request,
oil (available on request)
±10 % end value, tested with 10 x D in inlet
and output, with a rising pipe (medium:
water)
±1 %
4 K/s
10 sec. after application of operating
voltage
in water (25 °C) at average
flow speed of approx. 1-2 sec.
pi-ho_fka-hfk12-s_e V2.02-01
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e
V2.01-00
0..+60 °C
-20..+80 °C
140 °C, < 30 min
sensor tip
1.4435,
FDA-compliant
1.4571
1.4404
PA
gold-plated
Housing:
Pressure screw:
Plug:
Contacts:
24 V DC ±10 %
< 60 mA
transistor output "push-pull", compatible with
PNP and NPN, (resistant to short circuits
and polarity reversal) lout = 100 mA max.
for round plug connector M12x1, 4-pole
Electrical
connection
Ingress protection IP 67
Weight
approx. 0.1 kg incl. pressure screw
Conformity
CE
Wiring
Z = Load
1
2
The adjustable parameters are:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
PN 50
0..+85 °C
3
4
brown
+24 V DC ±10 %
white
programming
blue
Z
black
Connection example: PNP
2
1
3
4
0V
Z
signal output
NPN
The use of shielded cabling is recommended!
Dimensions
x
x
For T-pieces (recommended) and weld-on sockets in the
GHMadapt series, see "Accessories".
131
1
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Handling and operation
The HFK12-S limit switch can be used to monitor minimal or
maximal.
Installation
With a minimum-switch, falling below the limit value causes a
switchover to the alarm state. Return to the normal state occurs
when the limit value plus the set hysteresis is once more exceeded.
The sensor is inserted into the
boring together with a sealing
cone, oriented, and fastened in
place with a pressure screw.
The flow should impinge on the
side of the sensor marked with
an X, in order to achieve as
small a response time as possible.
Marking
Flow
T
x
The torque on the pressure screw should be between 5..10 Nm.
Min+Hyst
Min
Avoid bubbles or deposits on the sensor. It is therefore best to
install at the side.
t
Operation and programming
The switching value can be set by the user by means of teaching.
For this, proceed as follows:
● The flow which is to be set is applied to the device.
● Apply an impulse of at least 0.5 seconds and max. 2 seconds
duration to pin 2 (e.g. via a bridge to the auxiliary voltage or a
pulse from the PLC), in order to accept the measured value.
● When the teaching is complete, pin 2 should be connected to
0 V, so as to prevent unintended programming.
The device has a yellow LED which flashes during the
programming pulse. During operation, the LED serves as a status
display for the switching output.
In order to avoid the need to transit to an undesired operating
status during the teach-in, the device can be provided ex-works
with a teach-offset. The teach-offset point is added to the currently
measured value before saving.
Example: The switching value is to be set to 80 cm/s, because at
this flow rate a critical process status is to be notified. However, it is
possible to reach only 60 cm/s without danger. In this case, the
device would be ordered with a teach-offset of +20 cm/s. At 60 cm
in the process, a switching value of 80 cm would then be stored
during "teaching".
With a maximum-switch, exceeding the limit value causes a
switchover to the alarm state. Return to the normal state occurs
when the measured value once more falls below the limit value
minus the set hysteresis.
T
Max
Max-Hyst
t
A switchover delay time (tDS) can be applied to the switchover to the
alarm state. Equally, one switch-back delay time (tDR) of several can
be applied to switching back to the normal state.
T
Max
Max-Hyst
t
tDS
tDR
In the normal state the integrated LED is on, in the alarm state it is
off, and this corresponds to its status when there is no auxiliary
voltage.
In the non-inverted (standard) version, while in the normal state the
switching output is at the level of the auxiliary voltage; in the alarm
state it is at 0 V, so that a wire break would also display as an alarm
state at the signal receiver. Optionally, an inverted switching output
can also be provided, i.e. in the normal state the output is at 0 V,
and in the alarm state it is at the level of the supply voltage.
132
2
pi-ho_fka-hfk12-s_e V2.02-01
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e
V2.01-00
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Ordering code
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
HFK12 - S - 015 K1
t
non-inverted output
1.
3.
4.
5.
A Power-On-Delay function (ordered as a separate option) makes it
possible to maintain the switching output in the normal state for a
defined period after application of the supply voltage.
8.
9.
H
=Option
2.
inverted output
7.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Limit switch
S
transistor output "push-pull"
Sensor tip length
015
L = 15 mm
Sensor material
K1
stainless steel 1.4435
Programming
N
cannot be programmed (no teaching)
 programmable (teaching possible)
P
Function
L
minimum-switch
H
maximum-switch
Switching signal
O
standard
 inverted
I
Temperature
H
CIP- / SIP version, 140 °C, 30 minutes max.
Options
00
without option
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
APZMAT
Acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
WZ2.2
Factory certification 2.2
Options
Switching delay period (0.0..99.9 s)
(from Normal to Alarm)
Switch-back delay period (0.0..99.9 s)
(from Alarm to Normal)
Power-On-Delay period (0..99 s)
(After connecting the supply, time during
which the switching output is not activated)
Switching output fixed at
Switching hysteresis
Standard = 2 % of the metering range
Teach-offset
(in percent of the metering range)
Standard = 0 %
.
s
.
s
s
cm/s
%
%
Accessories
● ECI-3 device configurator (USB programming adapter)
● Process adapter
● Cable/round plug connector (KH...)
see additional information “Accessories”
pi-ho_fka-hfk12-s_e V2.02-01
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e
V2.01-00
133
3
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Flow Transmitter /
Switch HFK35-FIN
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
For foodstuffs use
Analog output 0/4..20 mA or 0/2..10 V
Two programmable switches (push-pull)
Graphical LCD display, backlit
(transreflective), can be read in sunlight and in the dark
Programmable parameters via rotatable,
removable ring (programming protection)
Full metal housing with non-scratch, chemically
resistant glass
Physical unit in the display (selectable)
Rotatable electronic head for best reading position
Optionally CIP/SIP-capable (130 °C)
Connection to USB interface for setting parameters
Characteristics
The HFK35-FIN calorimetric sensor measures small fluid flows, and
has been designed specially for use in the foodstuffs industry (for
the measurement principle, see also "General description:
calorimetric sensors").
The integrated transformer has a backlit graphics LCD display
which is very easy to read both in the dark and in bright sunlight.
The graphics display allows the presentation of measured values
and parameters in a clearly understandable form. The measured
values are displayed to 4 places, together with their physical unit,
which may also be modified by the user. The electronics have an
analog output (4..20 mA or 0..10 V) and two switching outputs,
which can be used as limit switches for monitoring minimal or maximal, or as two-point controllers. The switching outputs are designed as push-pull drivers, and can therefore be used both as
PNP and NPN outputs. Exceeding limit values is signalled by a red
LED which is visible over a long distance, and by a cleartext in the
display. The stainless steel case has a hardened non-scratch mineral glass pane. It is operated by a programming ring fitted with a
magnet, so there is no need to open the operating controls housing, and its leakproofness is permanently ensured.
By turning the ring to right or left, it is simple to modify the
parameters (e.g. switching point, hysteresis...). To protect from
unintended programming, it can be removed, turned through 180 °
and replaced, or completely removed, thus acting as a key.
134
pi-ho_fka-hfk35-fin_e V2.02-02
Technical data
Sensor
calorimetric measurement principle
Process connection smooth tube for crimp connector or hose
connection
Metering ranges
6 mm tube
(0.001)
(for water)
0.01..2 l/min
8 mm tube
0.025..5 l/min
10 mm tube
0.05..10 l/min
() = special ranges available on request
Measurement
±3 % F.S. (H2O dist.)
accuracy
Repeatability
±1 % MW (H2O dist.)
Temperature
4 K/s
gradient
Start-up time
10 sec. after application of operating volt.
Response time
in water (25 °C) at average
Flow speed of approx. 1-2 sec.
Process pressure
PN 10
Medium
0..+100 °C
temperature
Ambient
-20..+70 °C
temperature
Storage
-20..+80 °C
temperature
CIP- / SIP
with spacer:
temperature
140 °C, 30 minutes max.
Materials
stainless steel 1.4404
medium-contact
(others available on request)
Non-mediumHousing:
stainless steel
contact materials
1.4305
Glass:
mineral glass,
hardened
Magnet:
samarium-Cobalt
Ring:
POM
Supply voltage
24 V DC ±10 %
Analog output
0/4..20 mA or
0/2..10 V
Power consumption max. 2.5 W
Switching outputs
transistor output "push-pull", compatible
with PNP and NPN, (resistant to short
circuits, and reversal polarity protected)
lout = 100 mA max.
Hysteresis
adjustable, position of the hysteresis
depends on minimum or maximum
switching value
Display
extendable graphic LCD display
temperature range -20..+70 °C,
32 x 16 pixels, background illuminated,
flashing LED signal lamp with
simultaneous message on the display.
Electrical
for round plug connector M12x1, 5-pole
connection
Ingress protection
IP 67
Weight
approx. 0.25 kg
Conformity
CE
1
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e V2.01-00
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Wiring
Handling and operation
Before the electrical installation, it must be ensured that the
auxiliary voltage corresponds to the data sheet.
Installation
The switching outputs are self-configuring, depending on whether
they are connected as PNP or NPN switches (push-pull).
It is recommended to use shielded wiring.
Dimensions
A spacer between the electronics head and the medium-contact
measurement tube provides thermal decoupling between the two
units. The media temperature may be raised for 45 min. to 130 °C.
In order to ensure the sensor's maximum insensitivity to
interference, the flow should run from bottom to top (best
degassing even at the slowest flow speed). Standard crimp
connectors, hoses with crush protection, or the crimp connectors
provided by HONSBERG can be used for the connection.
The insulation hoses provide the best possible insulation from the
environment, and should therefore not be removed.
It must be ensured that the calming section with the static mixer is
not kinked.
Programming
The annular gap of the programming ring can be turned to positions
1 and 2. The following actions are possible:
Set to 1 = continue (STEP)
Set to 2 = modify (PROG)
Neutral position between 1 and 2
The ring can be removed to act as a key, or turned through 180 °
and replaced to create a programming protector.
Operation is by dialog with the display messages, which makes its
use very simple.
Starting from the normal display (present value and unit), if 1
(STEP) is repeatedly selected, then the display shows the following
information in this order:
Display of the parameters, using position 1
● Switching value S 1 (switching point 1 in the selected unit)
● Switching characteristic of S 1
MIN = Monitoring of minimum value
MAX = Monitoring of maximum value
● Hysteresis 1 (hysteresis value of S 1 in the set
unit)
● Switching value S 2
● Switching characteristic of S 2
● Hysteresis 2
● Code
After entering the code 111, further parameters can be defined:
● Filter (settling time of the display and output)
● Physical unit (Units)
● Output: 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA
● 0/4 mA (measured value corresponding to 0/4 mA)
● 20 mA (measured value corresponding to 20 mA)
For models with a voltage output, replace 20 mA accordingly with
10 V.
Edit, using position 2
If the currently visible parameter is to be modified:
● Turn the annular gap to position 2, so that a flashing cursor
appears which displays the position which can be modified.
● By repeatedly turning to position 2, values are increased; by
turning to position 1, the cursor moves to the next digit.
● Leave the parameter by turning to position 1 (until the cursor
leaves the row); this accepts the modification.
● If there is no action within 30 seconds, the device returns to the
normal display range without accepting the modification.
The limit switches S 1 and S 2 can be used to monitor minimal or
maximal.
2
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e
V2.01-00
135
pi-ho_fka-hfk35-fin_e V2.02-02
Product information Flow, calorimetry
With a minimum-switch, falling below the limit value causes a
switchover to the alarm state. Return to the normal state occurs
when the limit value plus the set hysteresis is once more exceeded.
With a maximum-switch, exceeding the limit value causes a
switchover to the alarm state. Return to the normal state occurs
when the measured value once more falls below the limit value
minus the set hysteresis.
Ordering code
HFK35-FIN -
2.
3.
K1
4.
5.
S
6.
H
7.
8.
For combination option, see table "Technical data".
=Option
1.
The change to the alarm state is indicated by the integrated red
LED and a cleartext in the display.
While in the normal state the switching outputs are at the level of
the supply voltage; in the alarm state they are at 0 V, so that a wire
break would also display as an alarm state at the signal receiver.
2.
Overload display
Overload of a switching output is detected and indicated on the
display ("Check S 1 / S 2"), and the switching output is switched off.
3.
Simulation mode
To simplify commissioning, the sensor provides a simulation mode
for the analog output. It is possible to create a programmable value
in the range 0..26.0 mA at the output (without modifying the
process variable). This allows the wiring run between the sensor
and the downstream electronics to be tested during commissioning.
This mode is accessed by means of code 311.
5.
Factory settings
After modifying the configuration parameters, it is possible to reset
them to the factory settings at any time using Code 989.
1.
4.
6.
7.
8.
Tubing diameter
006
6 mm
008
8 mm
010
10 mm
Metering range
(0.001) 0.01..2 l/min
02000
05000
0.025..5 l/min
10000
0.05..10 l/min
Pipework material
K1
stainless steel 1.4404
Analog output
I
current output 0/4..20 mA
 voltage output 0/2..10 V
U
Electrical connection
S
for round plug connector M12x1.5-pole
Spacer
H
CIP/SIP version, 140 °C, 30 minutes max.
Options
00
without option
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
APZMAT
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Accessories
● ECI-3 device configurator (USB programming adapter)
● Process adapter
● Cable/round plug connector (KH...)
see additional information “Accessories”
136
pi-ho_fka-hfk35-fin_e V2.02-02
3
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e V2.01-00
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Flow Switch and
Temperature
Transmitter / Switch
HFK30-FIN
The following output combinations are available:
Analog
Flow
Switching
output
Temperature
Analog
Switching
output








The switching output is a "push-pull" transistor output and provides
PNP and NPN inputs equally. It can be offered as a minimum
switch or a maximum switch, or as a frequency output.
Technical data
● Flow switch/transmitter for small flows in the foodstuffs
industry
● Combination with temperature switch or transmitter
possible
● No moving parts in the medium being measured
● Only one medium-contact material
● Simple to use
● Low pressure loss
● Various nominal widths
● Rapid response times for a calorimetric
Sensor
● Linearised and temperature compensated
Characteristics
The HFK30-FIN flow sensor monitors fluid media. Its compact form
combines the measurement tube and converter / counter.
The integrated transducer has an analog output (4..20 mA or
0..10 V) and one switching output, which can be configured as a limit switch for monitoring minimal or maximal, or as a frequency
output.
The switching output is designed as a push-pull driver, and can therefore be used both as a PNP or an NPN output. The state of the
switching output is signalled with a yellow LED in the switching outlet; the LED has all-round visibility.
The sensor is configured in the factory, or alternatively this can be
done with the aid of the optionally available ECI-3 device
configurator (USB interface for PC). A selectable parameter can be
modified on the device, with the aid of the magnet clip provided. In
this case, the current measured value is saved as the parameter
value. Examples of these parameters are the switching value or the
metering range end value. The stainless steel electronics housing
is rotatable, so it is possible to orient the cable outlet after
installation.
The converter / counter record two process parameters: the flow
speed of the medium and its temperature. Both parameters can be
assigned to the analog output or to the switching output.
Sensor
Process
connection
Metering ranges
(for water)
Measurement
accuracy
Repeatability
Temperature
gradient
Start-up time
Response time
Process pressure
Pressure loss
Media
temperature
Ambient
temperature
Storage
temperature
CIP- / SIP
temperature
Materials
medium-contact
Materials, nonmedium-contact
Power
consumption
Supply voltage
Analog output
Electrical
connection
Current
consumption
Switching output
Switching
hysteresis
Display (only with
switching output)
Adjustment
pi-ho_fka-hfk30-fin_e V2.02-02
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e
V2.01-00
calorimetric measurement principle
smooth tube for crimp adapter or hose
connection
6 mm tube
(0.001) 0.01..2 l/min
8 mm tube
0.025..5 l/min
10 mm tube
0.05..10 l/min
() = special ranges available on request
±3 % F.S. (H2O dist.)
±1 % MW (H2O dist.)
4 K/s
10 sec. after application of operating voltage
in water (25 °C) at an average flow speed of
approx. 1-2 sec.
PN 10
max. 0.3 bar at max. flow
0..+100 °C
-20..+70 °C
-20..+80 °C
with spacer 140 °C, 30 minutes max.
1.4404 (others available on request)
PPS, PA6.6, 1.4305
max. 2.5 W
24 V DC ±10 %
4..20 mA / Load 500 Ohm max.
or 0..10 V / Load min. 1 kOhm
for round plug connector M12x1, 4-pole
max. 100 mA
transistor output "push-pull", compatible with
PNP and NPN, (resistant to short circuits
and polarity reversal) Iout = 100 mA max.
flow 2 % of end value
temperature: approx. 2 °C
yellow LED
(On = OK / Off = Alarm)
by means of magnet
137
1
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Handling and operation
Ingress protection IP 67
Weight
approx. 0.2 kg
Conformity
CE
Installation
In order to ensure the sensor's maximum insensitivity to
interference, the flow should run from bottom to top (best
degassing even at the slowest flow speed). Standard crimp
connectors, hoses with crush protection, or the crimp connectors
provided by HONSBERG can be used for the connection.
Wiring
Z = Load
1
2
3
4
brown
1
3
4
analog output
blue
black
Connection example:
2
+24 V DC ±10 %
white
Z
PNP
Z
0V
switching/
frequency output
NPN
The insulation hoses offer the best possible insulation against the
surroundings, and must therefore not be removed.
Programming
The electronics contain a magnetic contact, with the aid of which
different parameters can be programmed. Programming takes
place when a magnet clip is applied for a period between 0.5 and
2 seconds to the marking located on the label. If the contact time is
longer or shorter than this, no programming takes place (protection
against external magnetic fields).
Dimensions
A spacer between the electronics head and the medium-contact
measurement tube provides thermal decoupling between the two
units. The media temperature may be raised for 45 min. to 130 °C.
After the programming ("teaching"), the clip can either be left on the
device, or removed to protect data.
The device has a yellow LED which flashes during the
programming pulse. During operation, the LED serves as a status
display for the switching output. In order to avoid the need to transit
to an undesired operating status during "teaching", the device can
be provided ex-works with a "teach-offset". The "teach-offset" value
is added to the currently measured value before saving (or is
subtracted if a negative value is entered).
Example: The switching value is to be set to 70 % of the metering
range, because at this flow rate a critical process status is to be
notified. However, only 50% can be achieved without danger. In
this case, the device would be ordered with a "teach-offset" of
+20 %. At 50 % in the process, a switching value of 70 % would
then be stored during "teaching".
Normally, programming is used to set the limit switch. However, if
desired, other parameters such as the end value of the analog or
frequency output may also be set.
The limit switch can be used to monitor minimal or maximal.
With a minimum-switch, falling below the limit value causes a
switchover to the alarm state. Return to the normal state occurs
when the limit value plus the set hysteresis is once more exceeded.
T
Min+Hyst
Min
t
138
2
pi-ho_fka-hfk30-fin_e V2.02-02
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e
V2.01-00
Product information Flow, calorimetry
With a maximum-switch, exceeding the limit value causes a switchover to the alarm state. Return to the normal state occurs when
the measured value once more falls below the limit value minus the
set hysteresis.
Ordering code
1.
HFK30-FIN 9.
T
2.
3.
10.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
K1
11.
12.
H
For combination option, see table "Technical data".
=Option
Max
1.
Max-Hyst
t
A switchover delay time (tDS) can be applied to the switchover to the
alarm state. Equally, one switch-back delay time (tDR) of several can
be applied to switching back to the normal state.
T
Max
Max-Hyst
t
tDS
tDR
In the normal state the integrated LED is on, in the alarm state it is
off, and this corresponds to its status when there is no supply voltage.
In the non-inverted (standard) version, while in the normal state the
switching output is at the level of the supply voltage; in the alarm
state it is at 0 V, so that a wire break would also display as an
alarm state at the signal receiver. Optionally, an inverted switching
output can also be provided, i.e. in the normal state the output is at
0 V, and in the alarm state it is at the level of the supply voltage.
t
non-inverted output
Tubing diameter
006
6 mm
008
8 mm
010
10 mm
2. Metering range
(0.001) 0.01..2 l/min
02000
05000
0.025..5 l/min
10000
0.05..10 l/min
3. Pipework material
K1
stainless steel 1.4404
4. Analog output
I
current output 4..20 mA
U
voltage output 0..10 V
5. Measurement parameter to analog output
F
flow rate to analog output
T
temperature to analog output
6. Switching output
T
transistor output "push-pull"
 NPN (open collector)
M
7. Measurement parameter to switching output
F
flow to switching output
T
temperature to switching output
8. Functioning of the switching output
L
minimum-switch
H
maximum-switch
R
frequency output
9. Switching signal
O
standard
I
inverted
10. Spacer
H
CIP- / SIP version, 140 °C, 30 minutes max.
11. Options
00
without option
12. Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
APZMAT
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
inverted output
A Power-On delay function (ordered as a separate option) makes it
possible to maintain the switching output in the normal state for a
defined period after application of the supply voltage.
pi-ho_fka-hfk30-fin_e V2.02-02
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e
V2.01-00
139
3
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Options
Accessories
Special measuring range for flow:
Metering range start value
ml/min
Metering range end value
ml/min
Special measuring range for temperature:
Maximum 100 °C (standard = 70 °C)
°C
Minimum -20 °C (standard = 0 °C)
°C
Special range for analog output:
<= Metering range
(Standard = Metering range)
ml/min
°C
Special range for frequency output:
<= Metering range
(Standard = Metering range)
ml/min
°C
End frequency (max. 2000 Hz)
Hz
Switching delay period (0.0..99.9 s)
(from Normal to Alarm)
Switch-back delay period (0.0..99.9 s)
(from Alarm to Normal)
Power-On delay
(After connecting the supply, time during
which the switching output is not
activated)
.
s
.
s
● ECI-3 device configurator (USB programming adapter)
● Process adapter
● Cable/round plug connector (KH...)
see additional information “Accessories”
● External display OMNI-TA or OMNI Remote
s
Switching output fixed
ml/min
°C
Special hysteresis
(standard = 2 % EW)
%
Teach-offset
(in percent of the metering range)
Standard = 0 %
%
If the field is not completed, the standard setting is selected
automatically.
140
4
pi-ho_fka-hfk30-fin_e V2.02-02
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e
V2.01-00
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Device Configurator
ECI-1
Handling and operation
Connection
The device configurator is intended for temporary connection to the
application. It is connected between the the existing sensor lead
and the sensor. Power supply is via the supply to the sensor and
the computer's USB port. When inactive (no communication), the
configurator behaves completely neutrally; all signals from the
sensor remain available to the application. During communication
between computer and sensor, the signal wirings are separated in
the configurator, so that in this state the sensor's output signals are
not available.
To connect 4-pole leads without a middle hole to the installed
5-pole device connector, adapter K04-05 is included. 4-pole leads
with a middle hole can be used without an adapter.
● Can be used on site for:
– parameter modification
– firmware update
– adjustment of inputs and outputs
● Can be connected via USB
Characteristics
the modification of all the sensor's configuration settings
the reading of measured values
the adjustment of inputs and outputs
firmware updates
Technical data
Supply voltage
Power
consumption
Connection
Sensor
Lead
USB
Operating
temperature
Storage
temperature
Dimensions of
housing
Housing material
Ingress protection
Device configurator
(for scope of delivery, see the diagram below)
ECI-1
Scope of delivery
The device configurator ECI-1 is an interface which allows the
connection of microcontroller-managed HONSBERG sensors to the
USB port of a computer.
Together with the Windows software "HONSBERG Device
Configurator" it enables
●
●
●
●
Ordering code
12..30 V DC (depending on the connected
sensor) and via USB
<1W
cable bushing M12x1, 5-pole, straight length
approx. 50 cm
device connector M12x1, 5-pole
USB bushing type B
0..50 °C
6
1. Device configurator ECI-1
2. USB cable
3. Adapter K04-05
4. Plug KB05G
5. Cable K05PU-02SG
6. Carrying case
Incl. software
Accessories:
Mains connector 24 V DC
(with fitted round plug
connector, 5-pole,
incl. international plug set)
Replacement parts:
M12x1 adapter 4- / 5-pole
PUR cable, 5-pole, shielded
with round plug connector M12x1
Round plug connector M12x1, 5-pole
(without cable)
5
3
4
1
2
EPWR24-1
K04-05
K05PU-02SG
KB05G
-20..+80 °C
98 mm (L) x 64 mm (W) x 38 mm (H)
ABS
IP 40
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e
pi-ho_zu-eci-1_e V2.01-00 V2.01-00
141
1
Product information Flow, calorimetry
Hygienic
Connection Cable
Shielded Series KH
Connection M12x1
PVC cable flexcord grey shielded
Straight or angled model
4- or 5-pole, cable end made up with end sleeves for wires
Union nut made from V4A
IP 67 as per IEC 60529
IP 69K protected against water during high pressure and steam
jet cleaning as per IEC 60529
● Resistant to heat and cold, range of use -25..+70 °C
● Vibration protection
● Colour coding as per industry standards
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Cable colours:
1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black, 5 = grey
Ordering code
1.
KH - PV
2.
3.
- 1
4.
5.
6.
00
1. Cable material
PV
PVC
2. Cable length
002
2 metres
005
5 metres
010
10 metres
3. Shielding
1
shielding (not applied to union nut)
4. Number of poles
04
4-pole
05
5-pole
5. Connector output
G
straight
W
angled 90 °
6. Option
00
none
Characteristics
The connection cable is suitable for moderate mechanical stress
Good resistance to acids and alkalis. Therefore aimed mainly at
food and drink industries. Restricted abrasion behaviour, and
limited oil and chemical resistance. The shielding increases the
shear strength, and this also improves the protection from external
radiation interference.
Technical data
Connector
Grip body
Union nut
Contact block/cable
Contacts
Seal
Current carrying capacity
Rated voltage
Insulation resistance
Degree of contamination
Ambient temperature
Ingress protection
Mechanical
working life
connection M12x1
plastic, PVC
stainless steel 1.4404
grey plastic PVC
metal, CuZn, gold-plated
plastic, FPM, FKM
4A
max. 250 V
≥ 109 MΩ
3/2, as per DIN VDE 0110
-25..+70 °C
IP 67 / IP 69K
(only when screwed together)
min. 100 mating cycles
142
pi-ho_zu-connection_cable_e V1.01-00
1
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e V2.01-00
GHM Messtechnik GmbH – Sales Center International
Schloßstraße 6 ● 88453 Erolzheim ● Germany
Fon +49-7354-937233-0
● Fax -88
Product
information
Flow, calorimetry
www.ghm-messtechnik.de ● info@ghm-messtechnik.de
Product Information
Process adaptation for
HFK, HTK, HLK..
● Hygienically-appropriate process adaptation free of dead
spaces and elastomers for wide-ranging applications in the
food production industry.
Characteristics
Hygienic Design
Dimensions
Cylindrical sleeve
for containers
with welded collar
for extrusion
APH-112
APH-122
Accessories for cylindrical sleeves
Blank plug G 1/2
Weld-on aid G 1/2
(Material: brass)
AMH-112
AMH-122
The hygienically design cone of the sensor is pressed against the
sealing edge of the welded sleeve when screwed on with the
prescribed torque, whereby a hygienically-correct seat of the
respective sensor is provided.
Technical data
Process
connection
Torques
Material
Working
temperature
Operating
pressure
GHMadapt G 1/2
thread G 1/2, VA / VA, 5 - 20 Nm
stainless steel 1.4404, AISI 316L
2.2 Certification or 3.1 Certification optional
metal-metal seal max. 250 °C
see the sensors to be installed for
restrictions
metal-metal seal max. 50 bar
see the sensors to be installed for
restrictions
zu-hygienic-design-kalorimetrie_e
V2.01-00
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e
V2.01-00
143
1
GHM Messtechnik GmbH – Sales Center International
Schloßstraße 6 ● 88453 Erolzheim ● Germany
Fon +49-7354-937233-0
● Fax -88
Product
information
Flow, calorimetry
www.ghm-messtechnik.de ● info@ghm-messtechnik.de
Product Information
Hygienic Design
Hygienic weld-on fittings, series APH,
Handling and operation
DIN 11850 series 2
Installation
Welding in tanks or large pipework
Sections at G 1/2
1. Drill hole with outside diameter of the sleeve, max. tolerance
+0.2 mm
2. Tack on sleeve at four points (observe the sequence of the
tacking)
3. Screw in the weld-on aid (see AMH112, AMH122)
4. Weld the sections between the weld points.
In order to avoid the red heating or distortion of the sleeve during
the welding process, it is necessary to take pauses between the
individual sections so that the sleeve can cool down.
Welding in pipework
There are also ball sleeves in addition to the APH pipe system
or sleeves with a welded collar are available for pipes with an
extrusion (please request).
Process connection GHMadapt G 1/2
APH-532
APH-542
APH-552
APH-562
APH-572
DN
25
40
50
65
80
L
100
120
140
160
180
A
15
22
29
38
46
Da x W
29 x 1.5
41 x 1.5
53 x 1.5
70 x 2.0
85 x 2.0
APH-582
100
200
55
104 x 2.0
Ordering code
Weld-on adapter
APH-112
Cylindrical sleeve for container in G 1/2
APH-122
Cylindrical sleeve with welded collar for extrusion
(G 1/2)
available on
request
available on
request
Other standard pipe sizes on request
Accessories for weld-on fittings
Blank plug G 1/2
T-piece according to DIN11850 series 2
APH-532
T-piece DN 25
APH-542
T-piece DN 40
APH-552
T-piece DN 50
APH-562
T-piece DN 65
APH-572
T-piece DN 80
APH-582
T-piece DN 100
Accessories
AMH-112
Blank plug G 1/2
AMH-122
Weld-on aid G 1/2
AMH-112
144
2
zu-hygienic-design-kalorimetrie_e
pi-ho-hd-flow-calorimetry_e V2.01-00
145
Level, calorimetric
146
Hygienic Design
Page
Level, calorimetric
Level, calorimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
147
148
Level, calorimetric
www.ghm-group.de
Product information
Hygienic Design
Level, calorimetry
TYPE EL - CLASS I
DECEMBER 2012
Product information Level, calorimetry
Characteristics
Applications
System
○ Food and drink industries
○ Calorimetric level switch for foodstuffs use
○ Pharmaceutical industry
Evaluation
○ Level monitoring
○ Displays, switching
Process connection
○ GHMadapt G ½
○ Dry-run protection
○ Drip sensors
Process pressure
○ PN 50
Medium temperature
○ -20..+140 °C
Materials
○ 1.4404, 1.4435 only one material in contact with the medium
Function and benefits
The calorimetric principle of the level switches from HONSBERG is
based on two temperature sensors, both in good heat-conducting
contact with the medium with simultaneously good heat insulation
from one another.
The unheated temperature sensor (T1) detects the medium temperature and thereby enables a temperature compensation. The level
switch is therefore able to detect the differences between gas and
liquid or granulate, even if the temperature varies.
Different media influence the reaction time, because they have
different heat conductivity.
In the operation of the calorimetric monitoring principle, the state of
the test medium and the medium temperature in relation to the test
results achieved play a crucial role. The present standard devices
are designed and calibrated for the following parameters: air / aqueous solutions, temperature range 0..85 °C.
With media of higher viscosity, or granulates, or lasting temperatures of more than 85 °C or less than 0 °C, we recommend setting
the device configuration according to the individual recommendation of the manufacturer.
Design principle of calorimetric level switch
One of the sensors (T2) is heated (H1) in the air environment in
such a way that a constant temperature difference (4 Kelvin) arises
between the heated and unheated sensors.
If the sensor tip is immersed into another medium which has better
thermal conductivity than air (gas), another heat flow (Hn) must be
used to re-establish the same heat difference.
The differences in the heat flows thus indicate the different thermal
conductivities of the actual medium around the sensor nose, and
can therefore be used to recognise the level.
150
pi-ho-hd-level-calorimetry_e V2.00-00
Product information Level, calorimetry
Explanation of terms
Universal switching outputs
Temperature gradient = temperature change per time unit of the
medium (K/s). Where the medium temperature changes rapidly, compensation can be made only within a specific range. The
range in which fault-free operation is guaranteed is specified. If this
temperature is exceeded by the medium, an incorrect signal may be
issued by the system for a brief time. Such a signal can, of course
be suppressed by switching delays, however, the switch-on and
switch-off time of the system in general will be negatively affected.
The push-pull transistor outputs make installation extremely easy.
It can be installed either as an NPN or a PNP switch, and functions
accordingly without requiring additional configuration with parameter settings, wire breaks, or the like. Resistance to short circuits and
reversal polarity protection are ensured.
Start-up time is the time taken by the device to reach its specified
operating mode after the operating voltage is applied. After they are
switched on, the displays and outputs initially go to the maximum
value of the metering range. After approximat
Analog outputs
Temperature range of the medium is the range in which the
calorimetric sensor functions faultlessly.
Product family
Level, calorimetric
Switch-on and switch-off time is the time that the switching process lasts after the stainless steel sensor is suddenly immersed into
water from the gas (medium temperature approx. 25 °C). For air /
water, the switch-on and switch-off time is approx. 2s. Please note
that this time depends on the operating conditions. With media with
poor thermal conductivity or
Although when a calorimetric sensor such as this is used, the level
can be measured only as a Yes/No, it is sometimes useful to use
an analog output. The threshold values are then to be taken from
the PLC, for example, or other effects detected or determined more
quickly (e.g. the size of the difference in thermal conductivities of
the media being detected is immediately clear). In that case, please
contact HONSBERG.
Calorimetric sensors can also be used as:
○ Flow sensors
○ Drip sensors
○ Temperature sensors
General installation instructions
PAs a basic principle, any installation location and position in which
the “nose” of the sensor is completely surrounded by the flowing
media is suitable.
The sensor can also be used for the detection of filled or unfilled
pipes. It can also be used as a drip sensor.
For this purpose, see the separate product information. The same
operation and the same or a similar installation type are the benefits
of a product family.
The heated side (X marking) should always be turned to one side
so that it is affected as little as possible by the build-up of granulate
or deposits, and so that the temperature changes
Programmability of parameters
All calorimetric sensors from HONSBERG are members of the family of intelligent sensors. They have a microcontroller which enables
a multitude of parameter changes.
As standard, the HLK12 sensor provides the option of determining the reference environment of the medium with poorer thermal
conductivity (e.g. air); this is done by “teaching”. In addition, an interface (device configurator ECI-1) can be used to change all saved
parameters of a device at any time, if desired or necessary.
Pulse programming on
pin 2: Apply 24 V DC for 1
second for the present value
to be saved as the reference
value for thermal conductivity.
If required, all parameters
can be set at any time on
the sensor, using the ECI-1
device configurator.
pi-ho-hd-level-calorimetry_e V2.00-00
151
Product information Level, calorimetry
Device overview
Measuring
PN 50
-20..+140 °C
Switching
PN 50
Displays
Range
Air to aqueous
materials / oils
/ granulate
Medium temperature
±1 mm
Pressure resistance
in bar
HFK12-S
Measurement accuracy
Device
Output signal
Page
-
1x
Push-Pull
-
153
Accessories
ECI-1
Device Configurator
155
Cables
KH-...
156
Process adapter
APH-... / AMH-...
157
Errors and technical modifications reserved.
152
pi-ho-hd-level-calorimetry_e V2.00-00
Product information Level, calorimetry
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Independent of conductivity, colour, ...
Suitable for fluids and finer granulates
Deposit must be permeable to water (e.g. sugar...)
Programmable hysteresis
Suitable for very variable fluids
Programmable switching and switch-back delays
Very simple to use
LED
yellow LED
(On = Normal / Off = Alarm,
flashes = programming or error)
Ingress protection IP 67
Electrical
for round plug connector M12x1, 4-pole
connection
Materials
sensor tip
1.4435, FDA-compliant
medium-contact
Non-mediumHousing
1.4571
contact materials Pressure screw 1.4404
Plug
PA
Contacts
gold-plated
Weight
approx. 100 g incl. pressure screw
Installation
dependent on direction of rotation (see
location
marking) Avoid bubbles or deposits on the
sensor. Best installation position therefore at
the side.
Conformity
CE
Wiring
Z = Load
1
2
Characteristics
3
The tips of the sensors of the HLK12 family recognise a difference
between fluid and air (gas). Temperature changes are
compensated. The system is tolerant of contamination which lets
water through (paper, mud, sugar solution...).
4
brown
+24 V DC ±10 %
white
programming
blue
black
Z
Connection example: PNP
The same design can be used as a calorimetric flow sensor, or as
an electronic temperature switch, or as a drip sensor for guidable
leaks.
Supply voltage
Power
consumption
Switching output
1
3
4
Z
0V
signal output
NPN
The use of shielded cabling is recommended.
Dimensions
Technical data
Process
connection
Medium
temperature
Ambient
temperature
CIP- / SIP
Temperature
Process pressure
Tolerance
Repeatability
2
Level, calorimetric
Level Switch or
Drip Sensor
HLK12-S
GHMadapt G 1/2
0..+70 °C
0..+60 °C
140 °C, < 30 min.
PN 50 bar
±2 mm (dependent on contamination)
±0.5 mm (for the same fluid and
the same deposit)
24 V DC ±10 % (controlled)
<1W
x
For T-pieces (recommended) and weld-on sockets in the
GHMadapt series, see "Accessories".
transistor output "push-pull", compatible
with PNP and NPN, (resistant to short
circuits and polarity reversal) Iout = 100 mA
max.
pi-ho_le-hlk12-s_e V2.01-01 V2.00-00
pi-ho-hd-level-calorimetry_e
153
1
Product information Level, calorimetry
Handling and Operation
The air reference value is stored via "teaching". Any deviation (incl.
programmable tolerance) from this is evaluated as a switching
value.
● Keep the transmitter in air (no flow!)
● Apply an impulse of at least 0.5 seconds and max. 2 seconds
duration to pin 2 (e.g. via a bridge to the auxiliary voltage or a
pulse from the PLC), in order to accept value as the switching
value.
● When the teaching is complete, pin 2 should be connected to
0 V, so as to prevent unintended programming.
Note: Requirement for programmability must be stated when
ordering, otherwise the device cannot be programmed.
A USB interface with associated software is available as a
convenient option for programming all parameters by PC, and for
adjustment.
Ordering code
1.
HLK12 - S
Marking
x
The sensor tip must be fully in
contact with the medium. The
marking (X) is at the side in order
to achieve the lowest possible
reaction time.
The torque on the pressure screw should be between 5..10 Nm.
3.
4.
5.
6.
=Option
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Installation
The sensor is inserted into the boring together with a sealing cone,
oriented, and fastened in place with a pressure screw.
2.
015
6.
Limit switch
S
transistor output "push-pull"
Sensor tip length
015
L = 15 mm
Programming
N
cannot be programmed (no teaching)
 programmable (teaching possible)
P
Function
L
minimum-switch
H
maximum-switch
Switching signal
O
standard
 inverted
I
Optional
H
CIP- / SIP version, 140 °C, 30 minutes max.
Options
Switching delay
(from Normal to Alarm)
Switchback delay
(from Alarm to Normal)
Power-On delay
(after connecting the supply, time during which
the switching output is not activated)
Special hysteresis (standard = 2 % EW)
.
s
.
s
s
%
If no details are provided when ordering, the standard setting is
automatically selected.
Accessories
● Cable/round plug connector (KH...)
see additional information “Accessories”
154
2
pi-ho_le-hlk12-s_e V2.01-01
pi-ho-hd-level-calorimetry_e
V2.00-00
Product information Level, calorimetry
Device Configurator
ECI-1
Handling and operation
Connection
To connect 4-pole leads without a middle hole to the installed
5-pole device connector, adapter K04-05 is included. 4-pole leads
with a middle hole can be used without an adapter.
● Can be used on site for:
– parameter modification
– firmware update
– adjustment of inputs and outputs
● Can be connected via USB
Characteristics
the modification of all the sensor's configuration settings
the reading of measured values
the adjustment of inputs and outputs
firmware updates
Technical data
Supply voltage
Power
consumption
Connection
Sensor
Lead
USB
Operating
temperature
Storage
temperature
Dimensions of
housing
Housing material
Ingress protection
Device configurator
(for scope of delivery, see the diagram below)
ECI-1
Scope of delivery
The device configurator ECI-1 is an interface which allows the
connection of microcontroller-managed HONSBERG sensors to the
USB port of a computer.
Together with the Windows software "HONSBERG Device
Configurator" it enables
●
●
●
●
Ordering code
12..30 V DC (depending on the connected
sensor) and via USB
<1W
cable bushing M12x1, 5-pole, straight length
approx. 50 cm
device connector M12x1, 5-pole
USB bushing type B
0..50 °C
6
1. Device configurator ECI-1
2. USB cable
3. Adapter K04-05
4. Plug KB05G
5. Cable K05PU-02SG
6. Carrying case
Incl. software
Accessories:
Mains connector 24 V DC
(with fitted round plug
connector, 5-pole,
incl. international plug set)
Replacement parts:
M12x1 adapter 4- / 5-pole
PUR cable, 5-pole, shielded
with round plug connector M12x1
Round plug connector M12x1, 5-pole
(without cable)
5
3
4
1
2
EPWR24-1
K04-05
K05PU-02SG
KB05G
-20..+80 °C
98 mm (L) x 64 mm (W) x 38 mm (H)
ABS
IP 40
pi-ho-hd-level-calorimetry_e
pi-ho_zu-eci-1_e V2.01-00 V2.00-00
155
1
Level, calorimetric
The device configurator is intended for temporary connection to the
application. It is connected between the the existing sensor lead
and the sensor. Power supply is via the supply to the sensor and
the computer's USB port. When inactive (no communication), the
configurator behaves completely neutrally; all signals from the
sensor remain available to the application. During communication
between computer and sensor, the signal wirings are separated in
the configurator, so that in this state the sensor's output signals are
not available.
Product information Level, calorimetry
Hygienic
Connection Cable
Shielded Series KH
Connection M12x1
PVC cable flexcord grey shielded
Straight or angled model
4- or 5-pole, cable end made up with end sleeves for wires
Union nut made from V4A
IP 67 as per IEC 60529
IP 69K protected against water during high pressure and steam
jet cleaning as per IEC 60529
● Resistant to heat and cold, range of use -25..+70 °C
● Vibration protection
● Colour coding as per industry standards
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Cable colours:
1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black, 5 = grey
Ordering code
1.
KH - PV
2.
3.
- 1
4.
5.
6.
00
1. Cable material
PV
PVC
2. Cable length
002
2 metres
005
5 metres
010
10 metres
3. Shielding
1
shielding (not applied to union nut)
4. Number of poles
04
4-pole
05
5-pole
5. Connector output
G
straight
W
angled 90 °
6. Option
00
none
Characteristics
The connection cable is suitable for moderate mechanical stress
Good resistance to acids and alkalis. Therefore aimed mainly at
food and drink industries. Restricted abrasion behaviour, and
limited oil and chemical resistance. The shielding increases the
shear strength, and this also improves the protection from external
radiation interference.
Technical data
Connector
Grip body
Union nut
Contact block/cable
Contacts
Seal
Current carrying capacity
Rated voltage
Insulation resistance
Degree of contamination
Ambient temperature
Ingress protection
Mechanical
working life
connection M12x1
plastic, PVC
stainless steel 1.4404
grey plastic PVC
metal, CuZn, gold-plated
plastic, FPM, FKM
4A
max. 250 V
≥ 109 MΩ
3/2, as per DIN VDE 0110
-25..+70 °C
IP 67 / IP 69K
(only when screwed together)
min. 100 mating cycles
156
pi-ho_zu-connection_cable_e V1.01-00
1
pi-ho-hd-level-calorimetry_e V2.00-00
GHM Messtechnik GmbH – Sales Center International
Schloßstraße 6 ● 88453 Erolzheim ● Germany
Fon +49-7354-937233-0
● Fax -88
Product
information
Level, calorimetry
www.ghm-messtechnik.de ● info@ghm-messtechnik.de
Product Information
● Hygienically-appropriate process adaptation free of dead
spaces and elastomers for wide-ranging applications in the
food production industry.
Characteristics
Dimensions
Cylindrical sleeve
for containers
with welded collar
for extrusion
APH-112
APH-122
Level, calorimetric
Process adaptation for
HFK, HTK, HLK..
Hygienic Design
Accessories for cylindrical sleeves
Blank plug G 1/2
Weld-on aid G 1/2
(Material: brass)
AMH-112
AMH-122
The hygienically design cone of the sensor is pressed against the
sealing edge of the welded sleeve when screwed on with the
prescribed torque, whereby a hygienically-correct seat of the
respective sensor is provided.
Technical data
Process
connection
Torques
Material
Working
temperature
Operating
pressure
GHMadapt G 1/2
thread G 1/2, VA / VA, 5 - 20 Nm
stainless steel 1.4404, AISI 316L
2.2 Certification or 3.1 Certification optional
metal-metal seal max. 250 °C
see the sensors to be installed for
restrictions
metal-metal seal max. 50 bar
see the sensors to be installed for
restrictions
zu-hygienic-design-kalorimetrie_e
V2.01-00
pi-ho-hd-level-calorimetry_e
V2.00-00
157
1
GHM Messtechnik GmbH – Sales Center International
Schloßstraße 6 ● 88453 Erolzheim ● Germany
Fon +49-7354-937233-0
● Fax -88
Product
information
Level, calorimetry
www.ghm-messtechnik.de ● info@ghm-messtechnik.de
Product Information
Hygienic Design
Hygienic weld-on fittings, series APH,
Handling and operation
DIN 11850 series 2
Installation
Welding in tanks or large pipework
Sections at G 1/2
1. Drill hole with outside diameter of the sleeve, max. tolerance
+0.2 mm
2. Tack on sleeve at four points (observe the sequence of the
tacking)
3. Screw in the weld-on aid (see AMH112, AMH122)
4. Weld the sections between the weld points.
In order to avoid the red heating or distortion of the sleeve during
the welding process, it is necessary to take pauses between the
individual sections so that the sleeve can cool down.
Welding in pipework
There are also ball sleeves in addition to the APH pipe system
or sleeves with a welded collar are available for pipes with an
extrusion (please request).
Process connection GHMadapt G 1/2
APH-532
APH-542
APH-552
APH-562
APH-572
DN
25
40
50
65
80
L
100
120
140
160
180
A
15
22
29
38
46
Da x W
29 x 1.5
41 x 1.5
53 x 1.5
70 x 2.0
85 x 2.0
APH-582
100
200
55
104 x 2.0
Ordering code
Weld-on adapter
APH-112
Cylindrical sleeve for container in G 1/2
APH-122
Cylindrical sleeve with welded collar for extrusion
(G 1/2)
available on
request
available on
request
Other standard pipe sizes on request
Accessories for weld-on fittings
Blank plug G 1/2
T-piece according to DIN11850 series 2
APH-532
T-piece DN 25
APH-542
T-piece DN 40
APH-552
T-piece DN 50
APH-562
T-piece DN 65
APH-572
T-piece DN 80
APH-582
T-piece DN 100
Accessories
AMH-112
Blank plug G 1/2
AMH-122
Weld-on aid G 1/2
AMH-112
158
2
zu-hygienic-design-kalorimetrie_e
pi-ho-hd-level-calorimetry_e V2.01-00
V2.00-00
159
Point level, capacitive
160
Hygienic Design
Page
Point level, capacitive
Point level, capacitive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
161
162
Point level, capacitive
www.ghm-group.de
Product information
Hygienic Design
Level Capacitive
TYPE EL - CLASS I
DECEMBER 2012
Product information Level Capacitive
Characteristics
Applications
System
○ Dry-run and overfill monitoring
○ Capacity measurement with high frequency
○ Pump monitoring
Processing
○ Food- and beverage industry
○ Indicating, switching, measuring
○ Chemical industry
Process connection
○ Machine building
○ G ½, G 1
○ Thermo facilities
Media
○ Pharmacy industry
○ Liquids, viscous media
○ Cosmetic industry
Pressure range
○ Biotechnology
○ -1..+10 bar
Media temperature
○ -20 ..+100°C, CIP-/SIP-capable, 140 °C < 30 min.
Function
Advantage
In this measuring method the storage capacity of charges in medium is used. Thereby the tip of the probe and the installation adaptor
form an electric condenser. If the probe is in the air, a certain low
starting capacity is measured. The capacity value changes when
the probe is inserted in the medium. This value is defined by the
geometry of the probe and the DK value of the medium. Here are
some examples in the table drawn up below.
The parts coming into contact with the media complies with FDA
requirements and are CIP-/SIP capable. Steam sterilisation for a
short time – up to 140°C.
○ No mechanical moving parts
○ Compact construction design for food and hygiene compliance
○ Detects separator layers such as oil and water
○ Foam has no influence
○ Suitable for various pressures and temperatures
○ Installation by welding sleeves for hygiene compliance
○ Maintenance-free
○ EHEDG certification (applied for), in compliance with FDA and 3A
○ Hygienic non-elastomeric sealing principle*
○ Installation without gaps and cavity-free
○ Acquisition of liquids such as water and beer as well as viscous
or adherent media such as honey, yoghurt, chocolate cream,
toothpaste. Powdery media can also be detected.
○ All the conventional process connectors such as Varivent,
clamps etc. can be supplied for food compatible assembly.
All types of the MLC system family are based on this measuring
principle. In all forms of design the switching point can, be set to
a DK value, which is sensitive for the application. Thanks to the
programmable response time the wave movements of the medium
in the transition area between full and empty do not lead to unco
trolled switching processes.
The electric constant (permittivity) of media
DK Wert bei 25°C, Messfrequenz 40,68 MHz
Medium
DK-value
164
Air
1
Oil Orange juice
1,5..3
151
Beer
115..126
Chocolate
3,1
pi-ma-Level-capacitive-hd_e V4.01-00
Product information Level Capacitive
Hygienic non-elastomeric sealing principle
Mounting direction in horizontal installed tubes
Use as full detector:
Pos. 2 This installation position ensures that the sensor tip is not
isolated by an air bubble.
Use as empty detector:
Pos. 4 This installation position ensures that the sensor tip is not
covered by residuals of the medium.
Mounting notes
Pos.
1
2
3
4
5
Angel [°]
180
135
90
45
0
Level
100 %
approx. 92 %
approx. 60 %
approx. 30 %
≥12mm
Hinweise
To ensure safe functioning of the system please use the
process adaptation GHMadapt. We offer the suitable welded
sealing aids for the correct installation of the welding sleeves.
Please consider the maximum permissible torque for the
installation (see process adaptation)
Standards and principles
○ The applicable standards and principles must be abided by
Point level, capacitive
Cleaning and maintenance
○ Do not aim the high-pressure jet of the cleaning device on the
electric connection when cleaning the system.
Transport and storage
○ Store dry and dust free
○ Do not expose to aggressive media
○ Avoid mechanical vibrations
○ Storage temperature -20..+80 °C
○ Relative humidity max. 95%
Return consignment
○ The sensor must be cleaned for return consignment. Make sure
there is no contamination by dangerous media. The return con
signment form is at disposal as download in the Internet.
pi-ma-Level-capacitive-hd_e V4.01-00
165
Product information Level Capacitive
Device overview
Device type
Material
Sensor tip
Process connection
Function
Medium
MLC420
MLC421
MLC422
G½
Level switch with
switching output
Liquids, viscous media,
adherent media
Stainless steel
1.4305
PEEK
167
MLC430
G½
Level switch with LED
indicator, switching output
Liquids, viscous media,
adherent media
Stainless steel
1.4305
PEEK
168
G½
Level switch with continuous
DK value measurement, LED
indicator, analog output,
switching outputs
Liquids, viscous
media,
adherent media
Stainless steel
1.4305
PEEK
170
G½
Level switch with continuous
DK value measurement,
display, analog output,
switching outputs
Liquids, viscous
media,
adherent media
Stainless steel
1.4305
PEEK
172
Stainless steel
1.4404
PEEK
174
ABS
176
MLC433
MLC437
MLC490
Liquids, viscous
Level switch with
media,
MLC491
G1
switching output
adherent media
MLC492
Zubehör
EYY120
5-pole cable plug
Programming adapter
Mistakes reserved, technical specifications subject to change without notice.
Case
Page
Accessories:
ACH connection cable , APH process connection see separate product information GHMadapt/Accessories.
UBS adapter cable ACI211 for MLC43X programming, see price list GHMadapt/Accessories.
166
pi-ma-Level-capacitive-hd_e V4.01-00
Product information Level Capacitive
Capacitive Level Switch
MLC420/422
Dimension
Process connection G½''
Sealing edge
Connection diagram
M12 plug (PNP = factory setting)
2-port isolation
Microprocessor controlled measurement
Parametrization via GHMware and adapter EYY120
No moving parts in the medium
Switching function depends to the polarity of the
supply voltage
● Condensate-stability type
●
●
●
●
●
Technical data
Factory setting
Initialization time
Process temperature
Process pressure
Process material
Surface quality
Process connection
Stud torque
Mounting direction
Output
Switching output
Response time
Isolation
Case
Material
Protection class
: 18..30 V DC, max. 50 mA
: M12x1 plug
: EN 61326:2007-05
: -20..+80 °C
: EN 60068-2-38:2010-06
: EN 60068-2-6, GL test2
: 28/2011
: 40.68 MHz, <1 mW
: DK-value 5..175 (MLC420)
DK-value 1..175 (MLC422)
: DK-value = 20 (MLC420)
DK-value = 1 (MLC422)
: 3s
: -20..+100 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
: -1..10 bar
: PEEK, FDA approval number
21CFR177.2415
food-safe acc. to EHEDG
Conform regulation EC 1935/2004 &
10/2011
: Ra ≤ 0,8μm
: G1/2'' hygienic
: 5..10 Nm
: arbitrary,
see mounting notes
: transistor PNP / NPN
max. 30 V / 100 mA
: programmable from 0.01..10 s
: sensor, case/supply, outputs
: 1.4305
: IP67 / IP69K
pi-ma_mlc42x_e V3.02-00 V4.01-00
pi-ma-Level-capacitive-hd_e
NO function
NC function
Point level, capacitive
Power supply
Supply voltage
Electrical connection
CE-conformity
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Climatic class
Vibration class
Certifications
EHEDG certificate no.
Sensor
Radiated frequency
Measuring range
Cable colors: 1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black
Ordering code
1.
MLC42
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
Measuring range
0
DK-value 5..175
2
DK-value 1..175
Switching output
0
PNP (standard)
1
NPN
Electrical connection
0
M12-plug
Inspection window
0
without window
Options
00
without option
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
RA08
Ra < 0,8μm (with acceptance test certificate 3.1
incl. measurement report)
RA06
Ra < 0,6μm (with acceptance test certificate 3.1
incl. measurement report)
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
APZMAT
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
Accessories:
ACH connection cable
APH process connection
see separate product information GHMadapt/Accessories.
EYY120 Programming adapter
167
1
Product information Level Capacitive
Capacitive Level Switch
MLC430
Dimension
''
● 2-port isolation
● Microprocessor controlled measurement
● Parametrization via GHMware and
internal Mini USB interface
● No moving parts in the medium
● 2 switching outputs
● Switching functions programmable
● Condensate-stability type
● Ultra-wide LED indicator
Technical data
Power supply
Supply voltage
Electrical connection
CE-conformity
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Climatic class
Vibration class
Certifications
EHEDG certificate no.
Sensor
Radiated frequency
Measuring range
Initialization time
Process temperature
M12 device plug (PNP)
Terminal clamps (PNP)
(factory setting)
: -20..+80 °C
: EN 60068-2-38:2010-06
: EN 60068-2-6, GL test2
: 28/2011
:
:
:
:
:
:
Process connection
Stud torque
Mounting direction
Output
Switching output
:
:
:
Response time
Isolation
Case
LED-cap
Material
Protection class
Connection diagrams
: 18..30 V DC, max. 80 mA
: M12x1 plug or cable gland M16x1.5
Polyamide (PA) or SS-type 1.4305
: EN 61326:2007-05
Process pressure
Process material
LED indicator S1, S2
Sealing edge
40.68 MHz, <1 mW
DK-value 1..175
3s
-20..+100 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
-1..10 bar
PEEK, FDA approval number
21CFR177.2415
food-safe acc. to EHEDG
conform regulation EC 1935/2004 &
10/2001
G1/2'' hygienic
5..10 Nm
arbitrary, see mounting notes
18..30 V DC
Cable colors (plug):
1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black
: transistor PNP / NPN
max. 30 V / 100 mA
: S1active = green, S2 active = red
S1+S2 active = mixed color
: programmable in range 0.02..10 s
: sensor, case/supply, output
: SS-type round case 59 mm
: Acrylic glass (PMMA)
: 1.4305
: IP67 / IP69K
168
pi-ma_mlc430_e V3.02-00
1
pi-ma-Level-capacitive-hd_e V4.01-00
Product information Level Capacitive
Ordering code
1.
MLC430 -
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
1. Switching output
0
2 x PNP / NPN programmable
2. Electrical connection
0
M12 plug (standard)
1
cable gland, PA
2
cable gland VA (1.4305)
3. Inspection window
0
without window (standard)
1
lid with LED indicator
4. Options
00
without option
02
internal fixing element stainless steel
5. Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
RA08
Ra < 0,8μm (with acceptance test certificate 3.1
incl. measurement report)
RA06
Ra < 0,6μm (with acceptance test certificate 3.1
incl. measurement report)
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
APZMAT
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
Point level, capacitive
Accessory
ACI211
USB connection cable for programming MLC43x
Additional accessories:
ACH
connection cables
APH
process connection
see separate product information GHMadapt/Accessories.
2
pi-ma-Level-capacitive-hd_e
V4.01-00
169
pi-ma_mlc430_e V3.02-00
Product information Level Capacitive
Capacitive Level Switch
MLC433
Material
LED-cap
Protection class
: 1.4305
: Acrylic glass (PMMA)
: IP67 / IP69K
Dimension
● 2-port isolation
● Microprocessor controlled measurement
● Parametrization via GHMware and
internal Mini USB interface
● No moving parts in the medium
● 2 switching outputs
● Analog output for DK value
● Switching functions programmable
● Condensate-stability type
● Ultra-wide LED indicator
''
Sealing edge
Technical data
Power supply
Supply voltage
Electrical connection
CE-conformity
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Climatic class
Vibration class
Certifications
EHEDG certificate no.
Sensor
Radiated frequency
Measuring range
Initialization time
Process temperature
: 18..30 V DC, max. 100 mA
: M12x1 plug or cable gland M16x1.5
Polyamide (PA) or SS-type 1.4305
: EN 61326:2007-05
: -20..+60 °C
: EN 60068-2-38:2010-06
: EN 60068-2-6, GL test2
:
:
:
:
:
:
Process connection
Stud torque
Mounting direction
:
:
:
LED indicator S1, S2
Response time
Analog output
Response time
Isolation
M12 device plug (PNP)
Terminal clamps (PNP)
(factory setting)
: 28/2011
Process pressure
Process material
Outputs
Switching output
Connection diagram
40.68 MHz, <1 mW
DK-value 1.5..175
3s
-20..+100 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
-1..+10 bar
PEEK, FDA approval number
21CFR177.2415
food-safe according to EHEDG
conform regulation EC 1935/2004 &
10/2001
G1/2'' hygienic
5..10 Nm
arbitrary,
see mounting notes
Cable colors (plug):
1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black, 5 = grey
: transistor PNP / NPN programmable
max. 30 V / 100 mA
: S1active = green, S2 active = red
S1+S2 active = mixed color
: 20 ms
: active 0/4..20 mA, burden <600 Ω
: programmable from 0.1..10 s
: sensor, case / supply, outputs
Case
170
pi-ma_mlc433_e V3.02-00
1
pi-ma-Level-capacitive-hd_e V4.01-00
Product information Level Capacitive
Ordering code
1.
MLC433 -
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
1. Output
0
3.
4.
5.
Point level, capacitive
2.
2 x PNP / NPN programmable and
1 x analog 0/4..20mA
Electrical connection
0
M12 plug
1
cable gland M16x1,5
2
cable gland VA (1.4305) M16x1,5
Inspection window
0
without window (standard)
1
lid with LED indicator
Options
00
without option
01
measuring range optimized for media (Dk 1...4)
02
internal fixing element stainless steel
Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
RA08
Ra < 0,8μm (with acceptance test certificate 3.1
incl. measurement report)
RA06
Ra < 0,6μm (with acceptance test certificate 3.1
incl. measurement report)
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
APZMAT
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
Accessory
ACI211
USB connection cable for programming MLC43x
Additional accessories:
ACH
connection cables
APH
process connection
see separate product information GHMadapt/Accessories.
2
pi-ma-Level-capacitive-hd_e
V4.01-00
171
pi-ma_mlc433_e V3.02-00
Product information Level Capacitive
Capacitive Level Switch
MLC437
Dimension
Process connection G1/2 ''
Sealing edge
● 2-port isolation
● Microprocessor controlled measurement
● Parametrization via build-in display and GHMware with
Mini USB interface
● No moving parts in the medium
● 2 switching outputs
● Analog output for DK value
● Switching functions programmable
● Condensate-stability type
Connection diagram
M12 device plug (PNP)
(factory setting)
Technical data
Power supply
Supply voltage
Electrical connection
CE-conformity
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Climatic class
Vibration class
Certifications
EHEDG certificate no.
Sensor
Radiated frequency
Measuring range
Initialization time
Process temperature
: 18..30 V DC, max. 100 mA
: M12x1 plug
: EN 61326:2007-05
: -20..+60 °C
: EN 60068-2-38:2010-06
: EN 60068-2-6, GL test2
: 28/2011
:
:
:
:
Process pressure
Process material
:
:
Process connection
Stud torque
Mounting direction
Outputs
Switching output
:
:
:
Response time
Analog output
Response time
Isolation
Case
Material
Display window
Protection class
40.68 MHz, <1 mW
DK-value 1.5..175
3s
-20..+100 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
-1..+10 bar
PEEK, FDA approval number
21CFR177.2415
food-safe according to EHEDG
conform regulation EC 1935/2004 &
10/2011
G1/2'' hygienic
5..10 Nm
arbitrary, see mounting notes
Cable colors:
1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black, 5 = gray
: transistor PNP / NPN programmable
max. 30 V / 100 mA
: 20 ms
: active 0/4..20 mA, burden <600 Ω
: programmable from 0.1..10 s
: sensor, case / supply, outputs
: 1.4305
: Acrylic glass (PMMA)
: IP67 / IP69K
172
pi-ma_mlc437_e V3.02-00
1
pi-ma-Level-capacitive-hd_e V4.01-00
Product information Level Capacitive
Ordering code
1.
MLC437 -
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
1. Outputs
0
2x PNP / NPN programmable and
1x analog output 0/4..20 mA
2. Electrical connection
0
M12 plug
3. Inspection window
0
cap with window for LC display
4. Options
00
without option
01
measuring range optimized for media (Dk 1...4)
02
internal fixing element stainless steel
5. Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
RA08
Ra < 0,8μm (with acceptance test certificate 3.1
incl. measurement report)
RA06
Ra < 0,6μm (with acceptance test certificate 3.1
incl. measurement report)
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
APZMAT
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
Point level, capacitive
Accessory
ACI211
USB connection cable for programming MLC43x
Additional accessories:
ACH
connection cables
APH
process connection
See separate product information GHMadapt/Accessories.
2
pi-ma-Level-capacitive-hd_e
V4.01-00
173
pi-ma_mlc437_e V3.02-00
Product information Level Capacitive
Capacitive Level Switch
MLC490/492
Sensor
Radiated frequency
Measuring range
Factory setting
Initialization time
Process temperature
Process pressure
Process material
Surface quality
Process connection
Stud torque
Mounting length
Mounting direction
Output
Switching output
Response time
Isolation
Case
Material
Protection class
: 40.68 MHz, <1 mW
: DK-value 5..175 MLC490
DK-value 1..175 MLC492
: DK-value = 20 (MLC490)
DK-value = 1 (MLC492)
: 3s
: -20..+80 °C 100 °C < 60 min
CIP-capable *
: -1..+10 bar
: 1.4404, PEEK,
FDA approval number 21CFR177.2415
: Ra ≤ 0,8µm
: G1'' hygienic
: 10..20 Nm
: min. 130 mm; max. 1000 mm
: arbitrary,
see mounting notes
: transistor PNP or NPN
max. 30 V / 100 mA
: programmable from 0.01..10 s
: sensor, case/supply, outputs
: SS-type round case
: 1.4305
: IP67 / IP69K
* For sterilisation processes with more than 100°C the device must
be cut off from the power supply.
Dimensions
M12
Galvanic isolation
Microprocessor controlled measurement
Parametrization via GHMware and adapter EYY120
No moving parts in the medium
Switching function depends to the polarity of the
supply voltage
● Condensate-stability type
●
●
●
●
●
Process
connection G1''
Seal edge
Technical data
Power supply
Supply voltage
Electrical connection
CE-conformity
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Storage temperature
Climatic class
Vibration class
: 18..30 V DC, max. 50 mA
: M12x1 plug
: EN 61326:2007-05
:
:
:
:
174
pi-ma-mlc490_e V3.02-01
Mounting
length
EL
-20..+80 °C
-20..+105 °C
EN 60068-2-38:2010-06
EN 60068-2-6, GL test2
1
pi-ma-Level-capacitive-hd_e V4.01-00
Product information Level Capacitive
Ordering code
M12 plug (PNP)
(factory setting)
1.
MLC49
NO function
Cable colors:
1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black
NC function
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
1. Measuring range
0
DK-value 5..175
2
DK-value 1..175
2. Mounting length EL [mm]
130
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
XXX
custom length min. 130 mm, max. 1000 mm
3. Switching output
0
PNP (standard)
1
NPN
4. Electrical connection
0
M12-plug
5. Inspection window
0
without window
6. Options
00
without option
11
7. Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required,
multiple responses possible)
RA08
Ra < 0,8μm (with acceptance test certificate 3.1
incl. measurement report)
RA06
Ra < 0,6m (with acceptance test certificate 3.1
incl. measurement report)
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
APZMAT
acceptance test certificate 3.1 for material
(in contact with products)
Accessories:
ACH
connection cables
APH
process connection
see separate product information GHMadapt/Accessories.
EYY120 Programming adapter
2
pi-ma-Level-capacitive-hd_e
V4.01-00
175
pi-ma-mlc490_e V3.02-01
Point level, capacitive
Connection diagram
Product information Level Capacitive
Programming Adapter
EYY120
Dimensions
Operation example
Laptop
● Universal adapter
● Suitable for all conductive and capacitive point-level
switches series MLX42(9)X
● USB 2.0 compatible
Characteristics
EYY120
The programming adapter fulfills all requirements for the configuration of point level switches series MLX42(9)X. Selectable parameters include measuring range (sensitivity for conductive switches),
response time, switching mode, operating mode and designation of
the measuring device.
A free download of the GHMware Programming Software can be
found on our website at:
www.ghm-messtechnik.de/downloads/ghm-software.
MLC42(9)
Ordering code
1.
EYY -
Technical Data
Power supply
Supply voltage
Power consumption
: USB Bus
: 1.5 W
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
Bedewing
:
:
:
:
CE-conformity
: EN 55022: 2011-12
EN 55024: 2011-09
: USB2.0
: 5-pole round plug M12x1
: PUR cable 1.5 m
: ABS, grey
Electrical connection
Sensor connection
Connection cable
Case
176
pi-ma-EYY120-E V2.00-00
1. Design type
120
Input USB 2.0
-10..+55 °C
-40..+60 °C
< 95 %
not permissible
1
pi-ma-Level-capacitive-hd_e V4.01-00
177
Point level, conductive
178
Hygienic Design
Page
Point level, conductive
Point level, conductive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
179
180
Product information
Hygienic Design
Level Conductive
TYPE EL - CLASS I
DECEMBER 2012
Point level, conductive
www.ghm-group.de
Product information Level Conductive
Characteristics
Applications
System / Principle
○ Dry-run and overfill monitoring
○ Conductive resistance measurement, temperature measurement
○ Pump monitoring
Evaluation
○ Food and beverage industry
○ Indicating, switching, point level
Process connection
○ M12, G ½, G 1
Electrode length
○ Rod / cable 4..5000 mm
Media
○ Liquids, viscose media
Pressure range
○ Cosmetics industry
○ Biotechnology
○ Chemical industry
○ Mechanical engineering
○ Thermo facilities
○ Water preparation
○ Automotive manufacturing
○ -1..+10 bar
Media temperature
○ -20..+120°C, CIP-/SIP-capable, 140 °C < 30 min
Function
Advantage
The level is acquired by an electric measuring process. For this
purpose the electrodes have an alternating voltage of < 5 V. As
soon as the electrodes are immersed by a conductive liquid, a
current flows that is evaluated. The alternating voltage prevents
the electrodes from destruction and degradation of the medium.
The material of the tank wall is insignificant for the measurement
process as in the case of metal walls the process connection, and
in the case of non-conductive walls, an additional probe rod is used
as ground-electrode (ground potential).
The parts in contact with the medium are made of FDA compatible
materials and are CIP-/SIP capable. 30-minute steam sterilisation
possible at max. 140 °C.
○
○
○
○
○
182
○
○
○
○
Installation without gaps and cavity-free *
No mechanical moving parts
Compact construction design for hygienic compliance
Suitable for different pressures and temperatures
Overfill protection according to Article 19 WHG/German Water
Resources Act (in preparation)
Hygiene compatible installation by welding sleeves
The electrodes can be subsequently shortened to any desired
length and bent into the desired position
Hygienic non-elastomeric sealing principle *
With the compact version up to 3 levels can be detected
without separate electronics
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E V4.01-00
Product information Level Conductive
Hygienic non-elastomeric sealing principle
Selection of electrodes for the
corresponding field of utilisation
Uncoated electrodes:
Can be implemented for aqueous, non-adhesive media and rods
pointing downwards.
For multi-rod sensors and electrode rods that are longer than 500
mm the coated type and the spacer AMD100 are recommended to
ensure that the rods are fixed, do not come into contact with each
other and thus do not cause any false reports.
Coated electrodes:
For the implementation in foaming and adhesive/moistening media
the coated version is recommended. If the sensor is mounted in the
casing floor, the rods point upwards. The coated version must be
used for this installation position.
Mounting notes
It is necessary to avoid trapped air in horizontal mounted tubes,
particularly by sensors with a stub rod.
Hinweise
To ensure a safe functioning of the system please use the
process adaptation GHMadapt. We offer welding aids for the
correct installation of the welding sleeves.
Please consider the maximum permissible torque for the
installation (see process adaptation)
Standards and principles
○ The applicable standards and principles must be adhered.
Point level, conductive
Cleaning and maintenance
○ Do not aim the high-pressure jet of the cleaning device on the
electric connection when cleaning the instrument.
Transport and storage
○ Store dry and dust-free
○ Do not expose to aggressive media
○ Avoid mechanical vibrations
○ Storage temperature -20..+80 °C
○ Relative humidity max. 95%
Return consignment
○ The sensor must be cleaned for return consignment. Make sure
there is no contamination by dangerous media. The return con
signment form is at disposal as download in the Internet.
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E V4.01-00
183
Product information Level Conductive
Device overview
Materials
Process connection
/ design
Function
Medium
min. conductance >2 μS
SLR420-1
M 12
Point level sensor passive,
electrode length 4..200 mm
1 point
Liquids,
viscose media,
adherent media
Ø 18 mm
SS-type 1.4305
SLR420-2
G½
As SLR420-1 but electrode
length 4..5000 mm
Liquids,
viscose media,
adherent media
Ø 18 mm
SS type 1.4305
Liquids,
viscose media,
adherent media
Ø 18 mm
SS-type
1.4305
Liquids,
viscose media,
adherent media
Ø 59 mm
SS-type
1.4305
Liquids,
viscose media,
adherent media
Ø 59 mm
SS-type
1.4305
Liquids,
viscose media,
adherent media
Ø 59 mm
SS-type
1.4305
Liquids,
viscose media,
adherent media
Ø 59 mm
SS-type
1.4305
Liquids,
viscose media,
adherent media
Ø 59 mm
Edelstahl
1.4305
Liquids,
viscose media,
adherent media
Ø 18 mm
SS-type
1.4305
Device
Point level- and Temperature
sensor passive,
electrode length
15...1000 mm
Point level sensor passive,
electrode length
4..200 mm
1 point
Case
SLT420-2
G½
SLR430-1
M 12
SLR430-2
G½
SLT430-2
G½
SLR430-3
G1
SLT430-3
G1
MLR420-1
M12
MLR420-2
G½
As MLR420-1 but
electrode length
200..5000 mm
Liquids,
viscose media,
adherent media
Ø 18 mm
SS-type
1.4305
MLT420-2
G½
Point level switch with
electronic and passive
temperature sensor,
MR 15..1000 mm,
1 point level
Liquids,
viscose media,
adherent media
Ø 18 mm
SS-type
1.4305
MLR430-1
M12
Point level switch active,
with transmitter, electrode
length 4..200 mm
1 point level
Liquids,
viscose media,
adherent media
Ø 59 mm
SS-type
1.4305
MLR430-2
G½
As MLR430-1 but
electrode length
4..5000 mm
Liquids,
viscose media,
adherent media
Ø 59 mm
SS-type
1.4305
184
As SLR430-1 but
electrode length
4..5000 mm
Point level- and Temperature sensor passive,
electrode length
15..1000 mm
Point level sensor passive,
electrode length
200..5000 mm
1-4 point levels
Point level- and Temperature
sensor passive, electrode
length 200..1000 mm,
1-4 point levels
Point level switch active,
with transmitter electrode
length 4..200 mm
1 point level
Sensor
Page
SS-type
1.4404,
186
PEEK,
PFABeschichtung
SS type
1.4404,
187
PEEK,
PFA-coated
SS-type
1.4404,
188
PEEK,
Pt100
SS-type
1.4404,
189
PEEK,
PFA-coated
SS-type
1.4404,
190
PEEK,
PFA-coated
SS-type
1.4404,
191
PEEK,
Pt100
SS-type
1.4404,
192
PEEK,
PFA-coated
Edelstahl
1.4404,
193
PEEK,
Pt100
SS-type
1.4404,
194
PEEK,
PFA-coated
SS-type
1.4404,
195
PEEK,
PFA-coated
SS-type
1.4404,
PEEK,
Pt100
SS-type
1.4404,
PEEK,
PFA-coated
SS-type
1.4404,
PEEK,
PFA-coated
197
198
201
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E V4.01-00
Product information Level Conductive
Device overview
Materials
Process connection
/ design
Function
Medium
min. conductance >2 μS
Case
Sensor
Page
G½
Point level switch with
electronic and passive
temperature sensor,
electrode length
15..1000 mm
1 point level
Liquids,
viscose media,
adherent media
Ø 59 mm
SS-type
1.4305
SS-type
1.4404,
PEEK,
Pt100
201
G1
Point level sensor
active, with transmitter,
electrode length
200..5000 mm
1-4 point levels
Liquids,
viscose media,
adherent media
Ø 59 mm
SS-type
1.4305
SS-type
1.4404,
PEEK,
PFA-coated
202
G1
Point level switch with
electronic and passive
temperature sensor,
electrode length
15..1000 mm,
1-4 point levels
Liquids,
viscose media,
adherent media
Ø 59 mm
SS-type
1.4305
SS-type
1.4404,
PEEK,
Pt100
204
MLR120
2 measuring inputs
2 outputs
Evaluation electronic
for point level sensors
-
Polyamide PA6.6
-
205
MLR157
4 point level inputs
1 RTD Pt100
5 outputs
Evaluation electronic
for point level sensors
-
Polyamide PA6.6
-
206
USB 2.0 Port
5-pole cable plug
Programming adapter
Device
MLT430-2
MLR430-3
MLT430-3
Zubehör
EYY120
ABS
207
Mistakes reserved, technical specifications subject to change without notice.
Accessories:
Connection cable and Process adaption see separate Product information GHMadapt/Accessories.
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E V4.01-00
Point level, conductive
USB adapter cable for programming devices MLX43X, see price list chapter C1 GHMadapt/Accessories
185
Product information Level Conductive
Conductive Point Level
Sensor SLR420-1
Connection diagram
M12 device plug, 4-pole
Cable colors:
1 = n.c., 2 = n.c., 3 = blue, 4 = black
Ordering code
●
●
●
●
●
●
1.
1 point level
Process connection GHMadapt M12x1.5
Round case SS-type Ø 18 mm
No moving parts in the medium
Without electronic
Passive sensor
SLR420 -
Technical data
Number of electrodes
Electrode length
Process temperature
Ambient temperature
Process pressure
Process material
Process connection
Stud torque
Case
Electrical connection
Material
Protection class
: 1
: 4..200 mm
: -20..+120 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
: -20..+80 °C
: -1..+10 bar
: 1.4404, PEEK, PFA-coated,
FDA conform
: compatible to standard hygienic threads
M12x1.5
: 5..10 Nm
: round case SS-type Ø18 mm
: M12 plug
: 1.4305
: IP67 / IP69K
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
1. Process connection (PA)
1
M12x1.5
2. Number of electrodes
1
1 electrode
3. Electrode type (rod or cable)
A
rod
4. Electrode length [mm]
0000
stub rod
0200
200
XXXX
customized length (on request)
5. Electrode surface
0
uncoated (standard)
1
PFA, black coated
6. Electrical connection
0
M12 plug
7. Options
00
without option
8. Certificate DIN EN 10204, indicate only when required
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Dimensions
SLR420-1-1-A-0000-...
PA
SLR420-1-1-A-...
PA
Sealing edge
Max.
electrode length
186
pi-ma-SLR420-1_E V3.02-02
1
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E V4.01-00
GHM GROUP - Martens | GHM Messtechnik GmbH
Kiebitzhörn 18 | 22885 Barsbüttel | GERMANY
Phone +49 40information
67073-0 | Fax +49
40 67073-288
Product
Level
Conductive
www.ghm-group.de | info@ghm-group.de
Product Information
Hygienic Design
Conductive Point Level
Sensor SLR420-2
Connection diagram
M12 device plug, 4-pole
Cable colors:
1 = n.c., 2 = n.c. 3 = blue, 4 = black
Ordering code
1.
1 point level
Process connection GHMadapt G½
Round case SS-type Ø 18 mm
No moving parts in the medium
Without electronic
Passive sensor
SLR420 -
Technical data
Number of electrodes
Electrode length
Process temperature
: 1
: 4..5000 mm
: -20..+120 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
Ambient temperature : -20..+80 °C
Process pressure
: -1..+10 bar
Process material
: 1.4404, PEEK, PFA-coated,
FDA conform
food safe acc. to EHEDG
EHEDG certificate no. : 28/2011
Process connection
: compatible to standard hygienic threads
G½
Stud torque
: 5..10 Nm
Case
: round case SS-type Ø18 mm
Electrical connection : M12 plug
Material
: 1.4305
Protection class
: IP67 / IP69K
Dimensions
SLR420-2-1-A-0000-...
PA
Sealing edge
SLR420-2-1-A-..
PA
Sealing edge
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
1. Process connection (PA)
2
G½
2. Number of electrodes
1
1 electrode
3. Electrode type (rod or cable)
A
rod
4. Electrode length [mm]
0000
stub rod
0200
200
0500
500
1000
1000
1500
1500
2000
2000
2500
2500
3000
3000
3500
3500
4000
4000
4500
4500
5000
5000
XXXX
customized length (on request)
5. Electrode surface
0
uncoated (standard)
1
0200 PFA black
0500 PFA black
1000 PFA black
1500 PFA black
2000 PFA black
Custom length (on request)
6. Electrical connection
0
M12 plug
7. Options
00
without option
8. Certificate DIN EN 10204, indicate only when required
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Point level, conductive
●
●
●
●
●
●
Max.
electrode length
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E
pi-ma-SLR420-2_E V3.02-01 V4.01-00
187
1
Product information Level Conductive
Conductive Point Level
Sensor with Pt100
Sensor SLT420-2
Dimensions
SLT420-2-1-A-..
G1/2''
Sealing edge
Max.
electrode length
Connection diagram
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Passive point level and temperature measurement
1 point level with integrated RTD Pt100 sensor
Process connection GHMadapt G½'' hygienic
Round case stainless steel type Ø 18 mm
No moving parts in the medium
Without electronic
Electrode cannot be shortened afterwards
M12 plug, 8-pin
Technical data
Number of electrodes
Electrode length
Temperarture sensor
Process temperature
:
:
:
:
Ambient temperature
Process pressure
Process material
:
:
:
EHEDG
Process connection
:
:
Stud torque
Case
Electrical connection
Material
Protection class
CE-conformity
:
:
:
:
:
:
1
15..1000 mm
Pt100, class A
-20..+120 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
-20..+80 °C
-1..+10 bar
1.4404, PEEK, FDA conform
food safe acc. to EHEDG
conform regulation 1935/2004 &
10/2011
certificate no. 28/2011
compatible to standard hygienic threads
G½'' hygienic
5..10 Nm
round case stainless steel type Ø18 mm
M12 plug (8-pin)
1.4305
IP67 / IP69K
EN 50581:2012
Cable colors:
3 = green
4 = black
6 = pink, 7 = blue, 8 = red
: ground
: electrode
: Pt100 sensor
Order code
1.
SLT420 -
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
1. Process connection
2
G½'' hygienic
2. Number of electrodes
1
1 electrode
3. Electrode type
A
rod
4. Electrode length [mm]
0015
15 (min. length)
0200
200
0500
500
1000
1000
xxx
special length on request
5. Electrode surface
0
uncoated
6. Electrical connection
0
M12 plug
7. Options
00
without option
8. Certificate DIN EN 10204, indicate only when required
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Accessories
ACH113
8-pole hygienic connection cable, straight
ACH123
8-pole hygienic connection cable, angular
188
pi-ma-SLT420-2_E V3.02-00
1
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E V4.01-00
Product information Level Conductive
Conductive Point Level
Sensor SLR430-1
Connection diagram
M12 device plug, 4-pole
Cable colors:
1 = n.c. , 2 = n.c. , 3 = blue, 4 = black
Internal terminal strip
1 point level
Process connection GHMadapt M12x1,5
Round case SS-type Ø 59 mm
No moving parts in the medium
Without electronic
Passive sensor
Ordering code
Technical data
Number of electrodes
Electrode length
Process temperature
Ambient temperature
Process pressure
Process material
Process connection
Stud torque
Case
Material
Electrical connection
Protection class
: 1
: 4..200 mm
: -20..+120 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
: -20..+80 °C
: -1..+10 bar
: 1.4404, PEEK, PFA-coated,
FDA conform
: compatible to standard hygienic threads
M12x1.5
: 5..10 Nm
: round case SS-type Ø 59 mm
: 1.4305
: M12 plug or cable gland M16x1.5
Polyamide (PA) or SS-type 1.4305
: IP67 / IP69K
Dimensions
SLR430-1-1-A-0000-...
PA
SLR430-1-1-A-...
1.
SLR430 -
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
1. Process connection (PA)
1
M12x1.5
2. Number of electrodes
1
1 electrode
3. Electrode type (rod or cable)
A
rod
4. Electrode length [mm]
0000
stub rod
0200
200
XXXX
customized length (on request)
5. Electrode surface
0
uncoated (standard)
1
PFA, black coated
6. Electrical connection
0
M12 plug
1
cable gland PA
2
cable gland 1.4305
7. Options
00
without option
8. Certificate DIN EN 10204, indicate only when required
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Point level, conductive
●
●
●
●
●
●
PA
Max.
electrode length
pi-ma-SLR430-1_E V3.02-02 V4.01-00
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E
189
1
GHM GROUP - Martens | GHM Messtechnik GmbH
Kiebitzhörn 18 | 22885 Barsbüttel | GERMANY
Phone +49 40information
67073-0 | Fax +49
40 67073-288
Product
Level
Conductive
www.ghm-group.de | info@ghm-group.de
Product Information
Hygienic Design
Conductive Point Level
Sensor SLR430-2
Connection diagram
M12 device plug, 4-pole
Internal terminal strip
Cable colors:
1 = n.c. , 2 = n.c. , 3 = blue, 4 = black
Ordering code
1.
●
●
●
●
●
●
1 point level
Process connection GHMadapt G½
Round case SS-type Ø 59 mm
No moving parts in the medium
Without electronic
Passive sensor
SLR430 -
Technical data
Number of electrodes
Electrode length
Process temperature
: 1
: 4..200 mm
: -20..+120 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
Ambient temperature : -20..+80 °C
Process pressure
: -1..+10 bar
Process material
: 1.4404, PEEK, PFA-coated,
FDA conform
food safe acc. to EHEDG
EHEDG certificate no. : 28/2011
Process connection
: compatible to standard hygienic threads
G½
Stud torque
: 5..10 Nm
Case
: round case SS-type Ø 59 mm
Material
: 1.4305
Electrical connection : M12 plug or cable gland M16x1.5
Polyamide (PA) or SS-type 1.4305
Protection class
: IP67 / IP69K
Dimensions
SLR430-2-1-A-0000-...
PA
Sealing edge
SLR430-2-1-A-...
PA
Sealing edge
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
1. Process connection (PA)
1
M12x1.5
2. Number of electrodes
1
1 electrode
3. Electrode type (rod or cable)
A
rod
4. Electrode length [mm]
0000
stub rod
0200
200
0500
500
1000
1000
1500
1500
2000
2000
2500
2500
3000
3000
3500
3500
4000
4000
4500
4500
5000
5000
XXXX
customized length (on request)
5. Electrode surface
0
uncoated (standard)
1
0200 PFA, black coated
0500 PFA, black coated
1000 PFA, black coated
1500 PFA, black coated
2000 PFA, black coated
Custom length (on request)
6. Electrical connection
0
M12 plug
1
cable gland PA M16x1.5
2
cable gland V2A (1.4305 ) M16x1.5
7. Options
00
without option
8. Certificate DIN EN 10204, indicate only when required
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Max.
electrode length
190
pi-ma-SLR430-2_E V3.02-01
1
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E V4.01-00
Product information Level Conductive
Conductive Point Level
Sensor with Pt100
Sensor SLT430-2
Connection diagram
M12 plug, 8-pin
Cable colors:
3 = green
4 = yellow
6 = pink, 7 = blue, 8 = red
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
: ground
: electrode
: Pt100 sensor
Internal terminal
Technical data
:
:
:
:
Ambient temperature
Process pressure
Process material
:
:
:
EHEDG certificate no. :
Process connection
:
Stud torque
Case
Material
Electrical connection
Protection class
CE-conformity
:
:
:
:
:
:
1
15..1000 mm
Pt100 class A
-20..+120 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
-20..+80 °C
-1..+10 bar
1.4404, PEEK, FDA conform,
food safe according to EHEDG
conform regulation 1935/2004 & 10/2011
28/2011
compatible to standard hygienic threads
G½'' hygienic
5..10 Nm
round case stainless steel type Ø 59 mm
1.4305
M12 plug, 8-pin
IP67 / IP69K
EN 50581:2012
Dimensions
SLT430-2-1-A-....
G1/2''
Sealing edge
max.
electrode length
pi-ma-SLT430-2_E V2.02-00 V4.01-00
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E
Order code
1.
SLT430 -
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
1. Process connection
2
G½'' hygienic
2. Number of electrodes
1
1 electrode
3. Electrode type
A
rod
4. Electrode length [mm]
0015
15 (min. length)
0200
200
0500
500
1000
1000
xxx
special length on request
5. Electrode surface
0
uncoated (standard)
1
PFA black on request
6. Electrical connection
0
M12 plug
1
cable gland Poliamide (PA) M16x1.5
2
cable gland stainless steel (1.4305 ) M16x1.5
7. Options
00
without option
8. Certificate DIN EN 10204, indicate only when required
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Point level, conductive
Number of electrodes
Electrode length
Temperature sensor
Process temperature
Accessories
ACH113
8-pole hygienic connection cable, straight
ACH123
8-pole hygienic connection cable, angular
191
1
GHM GROUP - Martens | GHM Messtechnik GmbH
Kiebitzhörn 18 | 22885 Barsbüttel | GERMANY
Phone +49 40information
67073-0 | Fax +49
40 67073-288
Product
Level
Conductive
www.ghm-group.de | info@ghm-group.de
Product information
Hygienic Design
Conductive Point Level
Sensor SLR430-3
Connection diagram
M12 device plug, 5-pole
Internal terminal strip
Cable colors: 1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black, 5 = grey
Ordering code
1.
SLR430 ●
●
●
●
●
●
4 point levels
Process connection GHMadapt G1
Round case SS-type Ø 59 mm
No moving parts in the medium
Without electronic
Passive sensor
Technical data
Number of electrodes
Electrode length
Process temperature
: 1..4
: 15..5000 mm
: -20..+120 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
Ambient temperature : -20..+80 °C
Process pressure
: -1..+10 bar
Process material
: 1.4404, PEEK, PFA-coated,
FDA conform
food safe according to EHEDG
EHEDG certificate no. : 28/2011
Process connection
: compatible to standard hygienic threads
G1
Stud torque
: 10..20 Nm
Case
: round case SS-type Ø 59 mm
Material
: 1.4305
Electrical connection : M12 plug or cable gland M16x1.5
Polyamide (PA) or SS-type 1.4305
Protection class
: IP67 / IP69K
Dimensions
SLR430-3-4-A-...
PA
Sealing edge
max.
electrode length
192
pi-ma-SLR430-3_E V3.02-01
Electrode position
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
1. Process connection (PA)
3
G1
2. Number of electrodes
1
1 electrode
2
2 electrodes
3
3 electrodes
4
4 electrodes
3. Electrode type (rod or cable)
A
rod
4. Electrode length [mm]
0200
200
0500
500
1000
1000
1500
1500
2000
2000
2500
2500
3000
3000
3500
3500
4000
4000
4500
4500
5000
5000
XXXX
customized length (on request)
5. Electrode surface
0
uncoated (standard)
1
0200 PFA, black coated
0500 PFA, black coated
1000 PFA, black coated
1500 PFA, black coated
2000 PFA, black coated
Custom length (on request)
6. Electrical connection
0
M12 plug
1
cable gland PA M16x1.5
2
cable gland V2A (1.4305) M16x1.5
7. Options
00
without option
8. Certificate DIN EN 10204, indicate only when required
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Accessories
AMD100
Spacer for multi-rod sensors
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E V4.01-00
1
Product information Level Conductive
Conductive Point Level
Sensor with Pt100
Sensor SLT430-3
Connection diagram
M12 plug, 8-pin
E1-E4 = Electrodes
Cable colours:
1 = white, 2 = brown, 4 = yellow, 5 = grey
3 = green
6 = pink, 7 = blue, 8 = red
: electrodes
: ground
: Pt100 sensor
Internal terminal
:
:
:
:
Ambient temperature
Process pressure
Process material
:
:
:
EHEDG certificate no.
Process connection
Stud torque
Case
Material
Electrical connection
:
:
:
:
:
:
Protection class
CE-conformity
:
:
1..4
15..1000 mm
Pt100 class A
-20..+120 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
-20..+80 °C
-1..+10 bar
1.4404, PEEK, FDA conform
food safe according to EHEDG
conform regulation 1935/2004 & 10/2011
28/2011
G1'' hygienic
10..20 Nm
round case stainless steel type Ø 59 mm
1.4305
M12 plug or cable gland M16x1.5
Polyamide (PA) or stainless steel type
1.4305
IP67 / IP69K
EN 50581:2012
Dimensions
SLT430-3-4-A-...
G1''
Sealing edge
Electrode position
E2 = Rod with integr. Pt100 Sensor
Note:
Electrode cannot be shortened
afterwards.
max.
electrode length
pi-ma-SLT430-3_E V2.02-00 V4.01-00
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E
Order code
1.
SLT430 -
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
1. Process connection
3
G1'' hygienic
2. Number of electrodes
1
1 electrode
2
2 electrodes
3
3 electrodes
4
4 electrodes
3. Electrode type
A
rod
4. Electrode length [mm]
0200
200
0500
500
1000
1000
xxx
special length on request
5. Electrode surface
0
uncoated (standard)
6. Electrical connection
0
M12 plug
1
cable gland Poliamide (PA) M16x1.5
2
cable gland stainless steel (1.4305) M16x1.5
7. Options
00
without option
8. Certificate DIN EN 10204, indicate only when required
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Point level, conductive
Number of electrodes
Electrode length
Temperature sensor
Process temperature
Accessories
AMD100
Spacer for multi-rod sensors
ACH113
8-pole hygienic connection cable, straight
ACH123
8-pole hygienic connection cable, angular
193
1
Product information Level Conductive
Conductive Point Level
Switch MLR420-1
Dimensions
MLR420-1-1-A-0000-...
MLR420-1-1-A-...
M12x1.5
M12x1.5
Sealing edge
Sealing edge
max.
electrode length
Connection diagrams
M12 device plug, 4-pole
1 point level with switching output
Process connection GHMadapt M12x1.5
Round case, stainless steel type Ø 18 mm
Flexible mounting: compact version
No moving parts in the medium
Sensitivity programmable
Parameters programmable with GHMware
via USB programming adapter EYY120
● Isolation between sensor, case / supply, output
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
NO
Technical data
Compact version
Supply voltage
Power consumption
CE-conformity
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Climatic class
Vibration class
Input
Response time
Output
Electronic
Electrical connection
Isolation
Case
Material
Protection class
Electrode
Electrode length
Process temperature
: 18..30 V DC
: < 3 VA
: EN 61326-1:2013
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Process pressure
:
Min. media conductance :
Process material
:
Process connection
Stud torque
NC
Cable colors: 1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black
:
:
-20..+70 °C
EN 60068-2-38:2009
EN 60068-2-6:2008, GL Test 2
1
0.05..10 s, programmable
NO / NC programmable
transistor PNP, max. 30 V DC / 100 mA
M12 plug
sensor system, case / supply, output
round case, stainless steel type Ø 18
1.4305
IP67 / IP69K
1
4..200 mm
-20..+100 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
-1..+10 bar
> 2µS
1.4404, PEEK, PFA-coated,
FDA conform
M12x1.5 hygienic
5..10 Nm
Order code
1.
MLR420 -
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
1. Process connection
1
M12x1.5
2. Number of electrodes
1
1 electrode
3. Electrode type (rod or cable)
A
rod
4. Electrode length [mm]
0000
stub rod
0200
200
XXXX
customized length (on request)
5. Electrode surface
0
uncoated (standard)
1
black coated, PFA material
6. Electrical connection
0
M12 plug
7. Options
00
without option
8. Certificate DIN EN 10204, indicate only when required
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Accessories
EYY120
USB programming adapter
194
pi-ma-MLR420-1_E V3.02-01
1
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E V4.01-00
Product information Level Conductive
Conductive Point Level
Switch MLR420-2
Dimensions
MLR420-2-1-A-0000-...
G 1/2''
Sealing edge
MLR420-2-1-A-...
1 point level with switching output
Process connection GHMadapt G½'' hygienic
Round case, stainless steel type Ø 18 mm
Flexible mounting: compact version
No moving parts in the medium
Sensitivity programmable
Parameters programmable with GHMware
via USB programming adapter EYY120
● Isolation between sensor, case / supply, output
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
G 1/2''
Technical data
Material
Protection class
Electrode
Electrode length
Process temperature
max.
electrode length
: -20..+70 °C
: EN 60068-2-38:2009
: EN 60068-2-6:2008, GL Test 2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Process pressure
:
Min. media conductance :
Process material
:
Process connection
Stud torque
Sealing edge
: 18..30 V DC
: < 3 VA
: EN 61326-1:2013
Point level, conductive
Compact version
Supply voltage
Power consumption
CE-conformity
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Climatic class
Vibration class
Certifications
EHEDG certificate no.
Input
Response time
Output
Electronic
Electrical connection
Isolation
Case
:
:
28/2011
1
0.05..10 s, programmable
NO / NC programmable
transistor PNP, max. 30 V DC / 100 mA
M12 plug
sensor system, case / supply, output
round case, stainless steel type
Ø 18 mm
1.4305
IP67 / IP69K
1
4..5000 mm
-20..+100 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
-1..+10 bar
> 2µS
1.4404, PEEK, PFA-coated,
FDA conform
food safe according to EHEDG
conform regulation EC 1935/2004 &
10/2011
G½'' hygienic
5..10 Nm
pi-ma-MLR420-2_E V3.02-01 V4.01-00
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E
Connection diagram
M12 device plug, 4-pole
NO
NC
Cable colors:
1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black
195
1
Product information Level Conductive
Order code
1.
MLR430 -
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
1. Process connection
2
G½'' hygienic
2. Number of electrodes
1
1 electrode
3. Electrode type (rod or cable)
A
rod
4. Electrode length [mm]
0000
stub rod
0200
200
0500
500
1000
1000
1500
1500
2000
2000
2500
2500
3000
3000
3500
3500
4000
4000
4500
4500
5000
5000
XXXX
customized length (on request)
5. Electrode surface
0
uncoated (standard)
1
0200 PFA, black coated
0500 PFA, black coated
1000 PFA, black coated
1500 PFA, black coated
2000 PFA, black coated
customized length (on request)
6. Electrical connection
0
M12 plug
1
cable gland, plastic (PA) M16x1.5
2
cable gland, stainless steel type (1.4305)
M16x1.5
7. Options
00
without option
8. Certificate DIN EN 10204, indicate only when required
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Accessories
ACI211
USB programming cable for MLx43x
196
2
pi-ma-MLR430-2_E V3.02-01
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E
V4.01-00
Product information Level Conductive
Conductive Point Level
Switch MLT420-2
Dimensions
MLT420-2-1-A-...
G ½'' hygienic
Sealing edge
max. electrode length
Connection diagram
M12 device plug, 8-pole
Technical data
Compact version
Supply voltage
Power consumption
CE-conformity
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Climatic class
Vibration class
Certifications
EHEDG certificate no.
Input
Response time
Output
Electronic
Electrical connection
Isolation
Case
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Material
Protection class
Electrode
Electrode length
Temperature sensor
Process temperature
:
:
:
:
:
:
: 18..30 V DC
: < 3 VA
: EN 61326-1:2013
: -20..+70 °C
: EN 60068-2-38:2009
: EN 60068-2-6:2008, GL Test 2
Process pressure
:
Min. media conductance :
Process material
:
Process connection
Stud torque
:
:
28/2011
1
0.05..10 s, programmable
NO / NC programmable
transistor PNP, max. 30 V DC / 100 mA
M12 plug 8-pole
sensor system, case / supply, output
round case, stainless steel type
Ø 18 mm
1.4305
IP67 / IP69K
1
15..1000 mm
RTDv Pt100 class A, isolated
-20..+100 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
-1..+10 bar
> 2µS
1.4404, PEEK, PFA-coated,
FDA conform
food safe according to EHEDG
conform regulation 1935/2004 &
10/2011
G ½'' hygienic
5..10 Nm
pi-ma-MLT420-2_E V3.02-00 V4.01-00
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E
Switching
output
Switching
output
NO
NC
Cable colors:
1 = white, 3 = green
4 = yellow
6 = pink, 7 = blue, 8 = red
: supply voltage
: output
: Pt100 sensor
Order code
1.
MLT420 -
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
Point level, conductive
1 point level with switching output
integrated RTD Pt100 sensor isolated
Process connection GHMadapt G ½'' hygienic
Round case, stainless steel type Ø 18 mm
Flexible mounting: compact version
No moving parts in the medium
Sensitivity programmable
Parameters programmable with GHMware
via USB programming adapter EYY120
● Isolation between sensor, case / supply, output
● Electrode cannot be shortened afterwards
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
1. Process connection
2
G ½'' hygienic
2. Number of Electrodes
1
1 electrode
3. Electrode type
A
rod
4. Electrode length [mm]
0015
15 (min. electrode length)
0040
40
0200
200
0500
500
1000
1000
5. Electrode surface
0
uncoated (standard)
6. Electrical connection
0
M12 plug
7. Options
00
without option
8. Certificate DIN EN 10204, indicate only when required
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Accessories
EYY120
USB programming adapter for MLx42x
ACH113
8-pole hygienic connection cable, straight
ACH123
8-pole hygienic connection cable, angular
197
1
Product information Level Conductive
Conductive Point Level
Switch MLR430-1
Dimensions
MLR430-1-1-A-0000-...
MLR430-1-1-A-...
M12x1.5
M12x1.5
Connection diagram
M12 device plug, 5-pole
1 limit level with 3 switch outputs, freely configurable
Process connection GHMadapt M12x1.5 hygienic
Round case, stainless steel type Ø 59 mm
Flexible mounting: compact version
No moving parts in the medium
Sensitivity programmable
Parameters programmable with GHMware
via USB interface
● Isolation between sensor system, case / supply, output
● Wide range LED indicator
Internal terminal
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Cable colors:
1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black, 5 = grey
Technical data
Compact version
Supply voltage
Power consumption
CE-conformity
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Climatic class
Vibration class
Input
Response time
Output
3 x Electronic
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Electrical connection
:
Isolation
LED indicator
Case
:
:
:
Material
LED-cap
Protection class
Electrode
Electrode length
Process temperature
:
:
:
:
:
:
Process pressure
Min. media conductance
Process material
:
:
:
Process connection
:
Stud torque
: 18..30 V DC
: < 3 VA
: EN 61326-1:2013
-20..+70 °C
EN 60068-2-38:2009
EN 60068-2-6:2008, GL Test 2
1
0.05..10 s, programmable
NO / NC programmable
transistor PNP,
max. 30 V DC / 100 mA
M12x1 plug or cable gland M12x1.5
Polyamide (PA) or stainless steel type
1.4305
sensor system, case / supply, output
red/green programmable
round case, stainless steel type
Ø 59 mm
1.4305
Acrylic glass (PMMA)
IP67 / IP69K
1
4..200 mm
-20..+100 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
-1..+10 bar
> 2µS
1.4404, PEEK, PFA-coated,
FDA conform
M12x1.5
: 5..10 Nm
Order code
1.
MLR430 -
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
1. Process connection
1
M12x1.5 hygienic
2. Number of electrodes
1
1 electrode
3. Electrode type
A
rod
4. Electrode length [mm]
0000
stub rod
0200
200
XXXX
customized length (on request)
5. Electrode surface
0
uncoated (standard)
1
black coated, PFA material
6. Electrical connection
0
M12 plug
1
cable gland, plastic (PA) M12x1.5
2
cable gland, stainless steel type (1.4305)
M12x1.5
7. Options
00
without option
8. Certificate DIN EN 10204 (indicate only when required)
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Accessories
ACI211
USB programming cable for MLx43x
198
pi-ma-MLR430-1_E V3.02-01
1
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E V4.01-00
Product information Level Conductive
Conductive Point Level
Switch MLR430-2
Dimensions
MLR430-2-1-A-0000-...
G 1/2''
Sealing edge
1 point level with 3 switch outputs, freely configurable
Process connection GHMadapt G½'' hygienic
Round case, stainless steel type Ø 59 mm
Flexible mounting: compact version
No moving parts in the medium
Sensitivity programmable
Parameter programmable with GHMware
via USB interface
● Isolation between sensor system, case / supply, output
● Wide range LED indicator
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
MLR430-2-1-A-...
Technical data
: 18..30 V DC
: < 3 VA
: EN 61326-1:2013
: -20..+70 °C
: EN 60068-2-38:2009
: EN 60068-2-6:2008, GL Test 2
:
:
:
:
:
Electrical connection
:
Isolation
LED indicator
Case
:
:
:
Material
LED-cap
Protection class
Electrode
Electrode length
Process temperature
:
:
:
:
:
:
Process pressure
Min. media conductance
Process material
:
:
:
Process connection
Stud torque
:
:
28/2011
1
0.05..10 s, programmable
NO / NC programmable
transistor PNP,
max. 30 V DC / 100 mA
M12 plug or cable gland M16x1.5
polyamide (PA) or stainless steel type
1.4305
sensor system, case / supply, output
red/green programmable
round case, stainless steel type
Ø 59 mm
1.4305
Acrylic glass (PMMA)
IP67 / IP69K
1
4..5000 mm
-20..+100 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
-1..+10 bar
> 2µS
1.4404, PEEK, PFA-coated,
FDA conform
food safe according to EHEDG
conform regulation EC1935/2004 &
10/2011
G½ '' hygienic
5..10 Nm
pi-ma-MLR430-2_E V3.02-01 V4.01-00
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E
G 1/2''
Point level, conductive
Compact version
Supply voltage
Power consumption
CE-conformity
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Climatic class
Vibration class
Certifications
EHEDG certificate no.
Input
Response time
Output
3 x Electronic
Sealing edge
max.
electrode length
Connection diagrams
M12 device plug, 5-pole
Internal terminal
Cable colors: 1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black, 5 = grey
199
1
Product information Level Conductive
Order code
1.
MLR430 -
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
1. Process connection
2
G½'' hygienic
2. Number of electrodes
1
1 electrode
3. Electrode type (rod or cable)
A
rod
4. Electrode length [mm]
0000
stub rod
0200
200
0500
500
1000
1000
1500
1500
2000
2000
2500
2500
3000
3000
3500
3500
4000
4000
4500
4500
5000
5000
XXXX
customized length (on request)
5. Electrode surface
0
uncoated (standard)
1
0200 PFA, black coated
0500 PFA, black coated
1000 PFA, black coated
1500 PFA, black coated
2000 PFA, black coated
customized length (on request)
6. Electrical connection
0
M12 plug
1
cable gland, plastic (PA) M16x1.5
2
cable gland, stainless steel type (1.4305)
M16x1.5
7. Options
00
without option
8. Certificate DIN EN 10204, indicate only when required
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Accessories
ACI211
USB programming cable for MLx43x
200
2
pi-ma-MLR430-2_E V3.02-01
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E
V4.01-00
Product information Level Conductive
Conductive Point Level
Switch MLT430-2
Dimensions
1 point level with 3 switch outputs, freely configurable
integrated RTD Pt100 sensor
Process connection GHMadapt G ½'' hygienic
Round case, stainless steel type Ø 59 mm
Flexible mounting: compact version
No moving parts in the medium
Sensitivity programmable
Parameters programmable with GHMware
via USB interface
● Isolation between sensor system, case / supply, output
● Wide range LED indicator
● Electrode cannot be shortened afterwards
Connection diagrams
Technical data
Compact version
Supply voltage
Power consumption
CE-conformity
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Climatic class
Vibration class
Certifications
EHEDG certificate no.
Input
Response time
Output
3 x Electronic
Electrical connection
Isolation
LED indicator
Case
: 18..30 V DC
: < 3 VA
: EN 61326-1:2013
: -20..+70 °C
: EN 60068-2-38:2009
: EN 60068-2-6:2008, GL Test 2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Material
LED-cap
Protection class
Electrode
Electrode length
Process temperature
:
:
:
:
:
:
Temperature sensor
Process pressure
Min. media conductance
Process material
:
:
:
:
Process connection
Stud torque
:
:
28/2011
1
0.05..10 s, programmable
NO / NC programmable
transistor PNP, max. 30 V DC / 100 mA
M12 plug
sensor system, case / supply, output
red/green programmable
round case, stainless steel type
Ø 59 mm
1.4305
Acrylic glass (PMMA)
IP67 / IP69K
1
15..1000 mm
-20..+100 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
RTD Pt100, class A
-1..+10 bar
> 2µS
1.4404, PEEK, FDA conform
food safe according to EHEDG
conform regulation 1935/2004 &
10/2011
G ½'' hygienic
5..10 Nm
pi-ma-MLT430-2_E V2.02-00 V4.01-00
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E
M12 device plug, 8-pole
Cable colors:
1 = white, 3 = green
4 = yellow
6 = pink, 7 = blue, 8 = red
: supply voltage
: output
: Pt100 sensor
Order code
1.
MLR430 -
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
Point level, conductive
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
1. Process connection
2
G ½'' hygienic
2. Number of electrodes
1
1 electrode
3. Electrode type
A
rod
B
rope (on request)
4. Electrode length [mm]
0015
15 (min. length)
0200
200
0500
500
1000
1000
5. Electrode surface
0
uncoated
6. Electrical connection
0
M12 plug
7. Options
00
without option
8. Certificate DIN EN 10204, indicate only when required
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Accessories
ACI211
USB programming cable for MLx43x
ACH113
8-pole hygienic connection cable, straight
ACH123
8-pole hygienic connection cable, angular
201
1
Product information Level Conductive
Conductive Point Level
Switch MLR430-3
Dimensions
MLR430-3-4-A-...
G 1''
Sealing edge
4 point levels with 3 switch outputs, freely configurable
Process connection GHMadapt G1'' hygienic
Round case, stainless steel type Ø 59 mm
Flexible mounting: compact version
No moving parts in the medium
Sensitivity programmable
Parameters programmable with GHMware
via USB interface
● Isolation between sensor system, case / supply, output
● Wide range LED indicator
max.
electrode length
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Position of electrodes
Technical data
Compact version
Supply voltage
Power consumption
CE-conformity
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Climatic class
Vibration class
Certifications
EHEDG certificate no.
Input
Response time
Output
3 x Electronic
Electrical connection
: 18..30 V DC
: < 3 VA
: EN 61326-1:2013
: -20..+70 °C
: EN 60068-2-38:2009
: EN 60068-2-6:2008, GL Test 2
:
:
:
:
:
:
28/2011
1..4
selectable form 0.05..10 s
NO / NC programmable
transistor PNP, max. 30 V DC, 100 mA
M12 plug or cable gland M16x1.5
Polyamide (PA) or stainless steel type
1.4305
Isolation
: sensor system, case / supply, output
LED indicator
: red/green programmable
Case
: round case, stainless steel type
Ø 59 mm
Material
: 1.4305
LED-cap
: Acrylic glass (PMMA)
Protection class
: IP67 / IP69K
Electrode
: max. 4
Electrode length
: 15..5000 mm
Process temperature
: -20..+100 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
Process pressure
: -1..+10 bar
Min. media conductance : > 2µS
Process material
: 1.4404, PEEK, PFA-coated,
FDA conform
food safe according to EHEDG
conform regulation EC 1935/2004 &
10/2011
Process connection
: G1'' hygienic
Stud torque
: 10..20 Nm
202
pi-ma-MLR430-3_e V3.02-01
Connection diagrams
M12 device plug, 5-pole
Internal terminal
Cable colors:
1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black, 5 = grey
1
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E V4.01-00
Product information Level Conductive
Order code
1.
MLR430
-
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
Point level, conductive
1. Process connection
3
G1'' hygienic
2. Number of electrodes
2
2 electrodes
3
3 electrodes
4
4 electrodes
3. Electrode type (rod or cable)
A
rod
4. Electrode length [mm]
0200
200
0500
500
1000
1000
1500
1500
2000
2000
2500
2500
3000
3000
3500
3500
4000
4000
4500
4500
5000
5000
XXXX
customized length (on request)
5. Electrode surface
0
uncoated (standard)
1
0200 PFA, black coated
0500 PFA, black coated
1000 PFA, black coated
1500 PFA, black coated
2000 PFA, black coated
customized length (on request)
6. Electrical connection
0
M12 plug
1
cable gland, plastic (PA) M16x1.5
2
cable gland, stainless steel type (1.4305)
M16x1.5
7. Options
00
without option
8. Certificate DIN EN 10204, indicate only when required
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Accessories
AMD100
Spacer for multi-rod sensors
ACI211
USB programming cable for MLx43x
2
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E
V4.01-00
203
pi-ma-MLR430-3_e V3.02-01
Product information Level Conductive
Conductive Point Level
Switch MLT430-3
Dimensions
MLT430-3-4-A-...
Position of electrodes
G 1'' hygienic
E2 = Rod with integr. Pt100 Sensor
Note:
Electrode cannot be shortened
afterwards.
Sealing edge
max.
electrode length
Connection diagrams
M12 device plug, 8-pole
4 point levels with 3 switch outputs, freely configurable
integrated RTD Pt100, isolated
Process connection GHMadapt G 1'' hygienic
Round case, stainless steel type Ø 59 mm
Flexible mounting: compact version
No moving parts in the medium
Sensitivity programmable
Parameter programmable with GHMware
via USB interface
● Isolation between sensor system, case / supply, output
● Wide range LED indicator
● Electrode E2 cannot be shortened afterwards
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Technical data
Compact version
Supply voltage
Power consumption
CE-conformity
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Climatic class
Vibration class
Certifications
EHEDG certificate no.
Input
Response time
Output
3 x Electronic
Electrical connection
Isolation
LED indicator
Case
S1..S3 switching outputs
Cable colors:
1 = white, 3 = green
: Supply voltage
2 = brown, 4 = yellow, 5 = grey
: Outputs S1 , S2, S3
6 = pink, 7 = blue, 8 = red
: Pt100 sensor
Order code
: 18..30 V DC
: < 3 VA
: EN 61326-1:2013
: -20..+70 °C
: EN 60068-2-38:2009
: EN 60068-2-6:2008, GL Test 2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
28/2011
1..4
selectable from 0.05..10 s
NO / NC programmable
transistor PNP, max. 30 V DC, 100 mA
M12 plug, 8-pole
sensor system, case / supply, output
red/green programmable
round case, stainless steel type
Ø 59 mm
LED-cap
: Acrylic glass (PMMA)
Material
: 1.4305
Protection class
: IP67 / IP69K
Electrode
: max. 4
Electrode length
: 15..1000 mm
Temperature sensor
: Pt100 class A, isolated
Process temperature
: -20..+100 °C, 140 °C < 30 min
CIP-/SIP-capable
Process pressure
: -1..+10 bar
Min. media conductance : > 2µS
Process material
: 1.4404, PEEK, FDA conform
food safe according to EHEDG
conform regulation 1935/2004 &
10/2011
Process connection
: G 1'' hygienic
Stud torque
: 10..20 Nm
204
pi-ma-MLT430-3_e V2.02-00
1.
MLT430
-
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
1. Process connection
3
G 1'' hygienic
2. Number of electrodes
2
2 electrodes
3
3 electrodes
4
4 electrodes
3. Electrode type
A
rod
4. Electrode length [mm]
0015
15 (min. length)
0200
200
0500
500
1000
1000
5. Electrode surface
0
uncoated
6. Electrical connection
0
M12 plug
7. Options
00
without option
8. Certificate DIN EN 10204, indicate only when required
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
Accessories
AMD100
Spacer for multi-rod sensors
ACI211
USB programming cable for MLx43x
ACH113
8-pole hygienic connection cable, straight
ACH123
8-pole hygienic connection cable, angular
1
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E V4.01-00
Product information Level Conductive
Conductive Point Level
Switch MLR120
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Processor controlled switching device
Up to 2 electrodes or point sensors
Sensitivity adjustable
Switch-on delay adjustable
Wide range power supply 18..230 V AC/DC
2 alarm outputs, relay SPDT
Case width 22.5 mm
DIN rail mounting TS35 according to DIN EN 60715
Dimensions
Connection diagram
Power supply
Supply voltage
Power consumption
Ambient temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
Condensation
CE-conformity
Input
Electrodes
Switching point
Response time
Min. media conductance
Measuring voltage
Outputs
2 relay SPDT
Indicators
Case
Weight
Connection
Protection class
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
18..253 V AC/DC
< 2 VA
-10..55 °C
-40..+60 °C
< 95 %
not allowed
EN 61326-1:2013
:
:
:
:
:
2
selectable from 0.05..500 kΩ
selectable from 1..10 s
> 2 µS
< 5 V AC
: < 250 V AC < 50 VA < 2 A, ohmic load
< 100 V DC < 50 W < 2 A, ohmic load
: LED green (operating)
LED red (limit CH1 + CH2)
: Polyamide (PA) 6.6, UL94V-0
DIN rail mounting TS35
according to DIN EN 60715
: approx. 200 g
: slide-in screw terminals
with pressure plates
0.14..2.5 mm² (AWG 26..14)
: IP20, acc. to BGV A3
pi-ma-MLR120_e V3.02-00 V4.01-00
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E
Point level, conductive
Technical data
Order code
1.
MLR120 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
Measuring input
0
2 electrodes
Output
0
2 relays
Supply voltage
0
18..253 V AC/DC
Options
00
without option
01
fast switching ≥ 50 ms
Certificate DIN EN 10204, indicate only when required
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
205
1
Product information Level Conductive
Conductive Point Level
Switch MLR157
Dimensions
Connection diagram
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Processor controlled switching device
Programming via Touch-Screen and USB interface
Up to 4 electrodes or point level sensors
Sensitivity programmable
Switch-on delay programmable
Temperature input RTD Pt100
Wide range power supply 18..253 V AC/DC
5 alarm outputs, relay SPDT and transistor
Analog output 0/4..20 mA; 0/2..10 V DC
Case width 50 mm
DIN rail mounting TS35 according to DIN EN 60715
Technical data
Power supply
Supply voltage
Power consumption
Ambient temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
Condensation
CE-conformity
Input
Electrodes
Switching point
Response time
Min. media conductance
Measuring voltage
Temperature input
Ext. programming
Output
Switching outputs
relay SPDT
Electronic
Analog output
Case
Weight
Connection
Protection class
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
18..253 V AC/DC
< 5 VA
-10..+55 °C
-40..+60 °C
< 95 %
not allowed
EN 61326-1:2013
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
4
selectable from 0.05..500 kΩ
selectable from 0.05..10 s
> 2 µS
< 5 V AC
Pt100
via USB interface
: 3 x relay; 2 x electronic PNP/NPN
: < 250 V AC < 50 VA < 2 A ohmic load
< 100 V DC < 50 W < 2 A ohmic load
: transistor PNP, max. 32 V DC, 50 mA
: 0/4..20 mA burden ≤ 500 Ω,
0/2..10 V burden > 500 Ω, isolated
output burden depending
: Polyamide (PA) 6.6, UL94V-0
DIN rail mounting TS35
acc. to DIN EN 60715
: approx. 200 g
: slide-in screw terminals
with pressure plates
0.14..2.5 mm² (AWG 26..14)
: IP20, acc. to BGV A3
206
pi-ma-MLR157_e V3.02-00
Order code
1.
MLR157 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
Measuring input
0
4 electrodes + 1 RTD Pt100
Outputs
0
3 relays, 2 transistors
Supply voltage
0
18..253 V AC/DC
Options
00
without option
Certificate DIN EN 10204, indicate only when required
WZ2.2
factory certification 2.2
1
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E V4.01-00
Product information Level Conductive
Programming Adapter
EYY120
Dimensions
Operation example
Laptop
● Universal adapter
● Suitable for all conductive and capacitive point-level
switches series MLX42(9)X
● USB 2.0 compatible
Characteristics
EYY120
The programming adapter fulfills all requirements for the configuration of point level switches series MLX42(9)X. Selectable parameters include measuring range (sensitivity for conductive switches),
response time, switching mode, operating mode and designation of
the measuring device.
Ordering code
Point level, conductive
A free download of the GHMware Programming Software can be
found on our website at:
www.ghm-messtechnik.de/downloads/ghm-software.
MLC42(9)
1.
EYY -
Technical Data
Power supply
Supply voltage
Power consumption
: USB Bus
: 1.5 W
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
Bedewing
:
:
:
:
CE-conformity
: EN 55022: 2011-12
EN 55024: 2011-09
: USB2.0
: 5-pole round plug M12x1
: PUR cable 1.5 m
: ABS, grey
Electrical connection
Sensor connection
Connection cable
Case
1. Design type
120
Input USB 2.0
-10..+55 °C
-40..+60 °C
< 95 %
not permissible
pi-ma-EYY120-E V2.00-00 V4.01-00
pi-ma-Level-conductive-hd_E
207
1
208
Hygienic Design
Page
Level, potentiometric
Level, potentiometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
209
210
www.ghm-group.de
Hygienic Design
Potentiometric level measurement
TYPE EL - CLASS I
DECEMBER 2012
Level, potentiometric
Product information
Product information Potentiometric level measurement
Characteristics
Areas of application
System
○ Continuous level measurement in
○ Level measurement according to the potentiometric
measurement process
Evaluation
○ Display, Switching, Measuring
Process connection
tanks and containers
○ Food and beverage industry
○ Chemical industry
○ Mechanical engineering
○ G ½, G 1
○ Thermal plants
Media
○ Pharmaceutical industry
○ Fluids, viscous media
○ Cosmetics industry
Pressure range
○ Biotechnology
○ -1..+10 bar
Media temperature
○ 20 to +100°C, CIP/SIP capable, 140°C < 30 min
Function
Benefits
In this measurement process, microcontroller-operated electronics
drive alternating current at 500 Hz through the probe tube, which is
electrically insulated from the tank or container. This causes a linear
voltage drop over the entire length of the probe tube. If the sensor is
immersed in a conductive fluid, an electrical connection to the tank
wall (MLP43x-OR) or reference electrode (MLP43x-MR) is established. The voltage potential created in the process is proportional
to the level. This voltage is supplied to a highimpedance amplifier.
The sensor microcontroller converts the voltage into digital signals
using a high-resolution AD converter.
The voltage fed via the probe tube is also measured for increased
precision. The microcontroller calculates the ratio of the immersed
length to the overall probe tube length. This ratio, combined with
the high-impedance voltage tap, explains the independence with
respect to the conductivity of the medium. Disturbances are digitally
filtered out from the result and then transmitted via a galvanically
isolated connection to the IO microcontroller. This microcontroller
calculates the desired signals for the current output, the two switching outputs and the optionally connected LC display.
The parts coming into contact with the media are made of FDAcompliant material and are CIP/SIP capable. Temporary steam
sterilisation up to 140°C
○ No mechanically moving parts
○ Compact design suitable for food and hygienic applications
○ Independent of pressure, temperature and density changes
○ Hygienic installation by means of weld-on sockets.
○ Maintenance-free
○ EHEDG Certificate 28/2011, FDA compliant
○ Hygienic and elastomer-free seal principle (see page 3)
○ Installation free from gaps and dead space
○ Detection of liquids such as water and beer, as well as viscous
or adhesive media such as honey, yoghurt, chocolate cream
or toothpaste.
○ The measuring range can be freely adjusted over the
entire sensor length.
○ All standard process adapters for installation appropriate for
food applications, such as Varivent, Clamp, etc. are available.
All types in the MLP family of devices are based on the same measuring principle.
212
pi-ma-Füllstand-potentiometrisch_e V2.00-00
Product information Potentiometric level measurement
Installation instructions
Pos. 1:
Normal installation position with strongly adherent media
and levels up to the process adaptation (bridging between
probe tube and tank lid); the variant ‘with probe tube
insulation’ is recommended to guarantee problem-free
function.
Pos. 2:
Overhead installation position; the function ‘Installation
position: from below’ must be selected in the device parameterisation. The device handles the conversion to the
actual level.
Pos. 3:
Oblique installation with a bend of the probe tube. This installation position is also possible. The probe tube should
not be kinked; it should be bent with a minimum radius of
30 mm (use a bending tool). In this variant, a linearisation
of the measurement must take place with an external
device (e.g. digital tank display TA1010 or TA9648, PLC,
etc.).
Note
○ In order to ensure safe function of the system, please use the
GHMadapt process adaptation. We offer appropriate weld-on
aids for correct installation of the weld-on sockets.
○ When installing, please observe the maximum permissible torque
(see product description).
○ The probe tube may not have any electrical contact with the
tank and/or container wall. This would disable the measurement
principle.
○ Cross flows, especially viscous media and stirring units can
subject the probe tube mount to mechanical stress. In such
applications, it must be ensured that the probe tube is installed in
a protected area of the tank or that a surge pipe is used.
○ The process connection thread requires electrical contact with
the metallic container for the version MLP43x-OR.
○ The single-rod variant requires a conductive tank wall. If this
is not provided (i.e. with use of a plastic tank), a two-rod variant
MLR43x-MR should be used. In this variant, the reference elec
trode is integrated in the sensor.
○ The length of the probe tube can be ordered down to the exact
millimetre; subsequent shortening is not possible. The sensor
measures linearly over the entire length of the metallic probe
tube. Only about 8 mm of the lower end of the probe tube are to
be considered dead range.
pi-ma-Füllstand-potentiometrisch_e V2.00-00
213
Level, potentiometric
Hygienic, elastomer-free seal principle
Product information Potentiometric level measurement
Signal outputs
The MLP433 and MLP437 are equipped with the same signal
outputs.
The analogue output is an active current output (0/4..20 mA) with a
wide range of parameterisation options. This includes free definition
of the measurement range over the length of the probe tube, behaviour in the event of errors and the time constant in order to have a
steady average displayed, e.g. with wave movements.
The two switching outputs are adjustable independently of each
other. Depending on requirements, they can be programmed as
PNP, NPN or push-pull outputs. They are short-circuit-proof and
capable of recognising and reporting fault conditions. With the
programmable time behaviour, wave movements of the medium do
not result in uncontrolled switching processes.
MLP433 operating menu
Versions MLP433 and MLP437
The electronics of the two devices differ only in the lid design.
There is one red LED and one green LED under the viewing
window in the centre of the lid with the MLP433 variant. The function of the LEDs is programmable. In the condition as supplied,
‚Green‘ indicates operating voltage and ‚Red‘ indicates a warning
(e.g.: probe tube not immersed). The LEDs can be switched off or
be assigned to switching outputs as necessary in the display menu.
Capacitive keypad
Measurement
Key assignment
(The MinMax values
menu is opened here)
The MLP437 is equipped with a graphic LC display and four capacitive keypads that make it unnecessary to open the device for
parameterisation. In addition to measurements, status information
can be displayed. The backlighting of the display also switches
from white to red if there is an error or warning. The display can be
electronically rotated in 90° increments to ensure that it can be read
in any installation position.
Parameterisation
There is a possibility of parameterisation via the internal USB
interface with both device versions. In the process, the parameters
are read, edited and loaded into the device by the connected PC
with the software GHMware (available free of charge on the GHM
web page). Archiving of the parameters and creation of a list of all
settings can also take place with the software.
All parameters that can be adjusted with GHMware can also be
changed via the LC display and the four capacitive keys.
214
The MLP437 operating menu structure only differs in the points
‚Application‘ and ‚Display‘.
pi-ma-Füllstand-potentiometrisch_e V2.00-00
Product information Potentiometric level measurement
Device overview
Device
MLP433-OR
MLP433-MR
MLP437-OR
MLP437-MR
Process connection
Function
Medium
G½
Continuous level measurement in metallic tanks and
containers with current
and two switching outputs
G1
Continuous level measurement in non-metallic
tanks and containers with
current and two switching
outputs
G½
Continuous level measurement in metallic tanks and
containers with current
outputs, two switching
outputs and LC display
G1
Continuous level measurement in non-metallic tanks
and containers with current outputs, two switching
outputs and LC display
Materials
Page
Casing
Sensor
Fluids,
viscous media,
adhesive media
Stainless steel
1.4305
LED sight
glass
Acrylic glass
(PMMA)
Stainless steel
1.4404
Process
connection
PEEK
216
Fluids,
viscous media,
adhesive media
Stainless steel
1.4305
LED sight
glass
Acrylic glass
(PMMA)
Stainless steel
1.4404
Process
connection
PEEK
217
Flüssigkeiten,
viskose Medien,
anhängende Medien
Stainless steel
1.4305
LC display
viewing window
Acrylic glass
(PMMA)
Stainless steel
1.4404
Process
connection
PEEK
218
Fluids,
viscous media,
adhesive media
Stainless steel
1.4305
LC display
viewing window
Acrylic glass
(PMMA)
Stainless steel
1.4404
Process
connection
PEEK
219
Subject to errors and changes.
Accessories and spare parts:
For connecting lines and process adaptation, refer to the separate product information GHMadapt/Accessories.
USB adapter cable ACI211 for programming of the MLP43X, see price list GHMadapt/Accessories.
Level, potentiometric
AMD200 and AMD201 spacer for probe tubes
pi-ma-Füllstand-potentiometrisch_e V2.00-00
215
Product information Potentiometric level measurement
Potentiometric level meter
Dimensions
MLP433-OR
Sealing edge for
process at 100 mm
L= Max. Probe tube length
Immersion length
EL= L + 11mm
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Continuous level measurement
Suitable for metallic tanks and containers
Process connection GHMadapt G ½“ hygienic
Flexible installation, compact version
No moving parts in the measured fluid
2 switching outputs, analogue output
Wide view LED status display
Parameterisation with GHMware via USB interface
without probe tube insulation
with probe tube insulation
Wiring
M12 plug
internal terminal and USB mini B jack
Technical data
CE conformity
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Climate class
Vibrations
Approvals
Sensor
Probe tube length
(Measuring range)
Process temperature
: 18..30 V DC, max. 130 mA
: M12 plug connector or
cable gland M16x1,5
Polyamide (PA) or stainless steel (1.4305)
: EN 61326-1:2013
: -20..+60 °C
: EN 60068-2-38:2009
: EN 60068-2-6:2008, GL Test 2
: EHEDG Certificate no.: 28/2011
: 100..999 mm (Ø 6 mm),
1000..2500 mm (Ø 10 mm)
: -20..+100 °C, 140 °C < 30 min.
CIP- / SIP capable
Process pressure
: -1..10 bar
Process material
: 1.4404, PEEK, FDA compliant,
Suitable for foodstuffs in accordance
with EHEDG
Process connection
: G ½“ hygienic
Torque
: 5..10 Nm
Min. media conductivity : 1µS < 20 µS, ≥ 20µS
Measuring accuracy
: < 3% < 0.5 % of measuring range
Linearity
: < 2% < 0.3 % of measuring range
Output
Analogue output
: Active, 0/4..20 mA, Resistance < 600 Ω
Damping
: Programmable from 0.05..10 s
Switching outputs
: Transistor PNP / NPN programmable,
max. 30 V / 100 mA
Response time
: Programmable from 0.01..10 s
Galvanic isolation
: Sensor, power supply/outputs
LED status message : 3 colours, programmable
Housing
: Round stainless steel housing Ø 59 mm
Material
: 1.4305
LED viewing window : Acrylic glass (PMMA)
Protection class
: IP67 / IP69K
Accessories
ACI211
USB connection cable
APH process adaptation, ACH connection lines
see separate product information GHMadapt / Accessories
216
pi-ma-MLP433-OR_e V1.02-02
Cable colours M12 plug: 1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black, 5 = grey
Order code
1
MLP433 - OR -
2.
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
9.
-
1. Type
OR
Without reference electrode
2. Process connection
2
G½“ hygienic
3. Probe tube material
0
stainless steel (316L) 1.4404
1
stainless steel (316L) 1.4435
4. Probe tube diameter
06
6 mm
10
10 mm
5. Immersion length (length specification to 1 mm)
0100..0500 100 to 500 mm
●
0501..0999 501 to 999 mm
●
0500..1500 500 to 1500 mm
●
1501..2500 1501 to 2500 mm
●
6. Probe tube insulation
0
without insulation
1
with PFA-insulation (For installation from top)
7. Electrical connection
0
M12-plug (standard)
1
cable gland M16x1.5; polyamide (PA)
2
cable gland M16x1,5; stainless steel (1.4305)
8. Options
00
without option
9. Certificate according to DIN EN 10204. Please specify
only if required.
WZ2.2
certificate of conformity 2.2
1
pi-ma-Füllstand-potentiometrisch_e V2.00-00
Subject to technical changes
Power supply
Supply voltage
Electrical connection
Product information Potentiometric level measurement
Potentiometric
level meter MLP433-MR
Dimensions
Sealing edge to
prozess at 92 mm
L= Max. Probe tube length
= Immersion length in the
tank
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Continuous level measurement
Suitable for non-metallic tanks and containers
Process connection GHMadapt G 1" hygienic
Flexible installation, compact version
No moving parts in the measured fluid
2 switching outputs, analogue output
Wide view LED status display
Parameterisation with GHMware via USB interface
Wiring
M12 plug
internal terminal and USB mini B jack
Technical data
: -20..+60 °C
: EN 60068-2-38:2009
: EN 60068-2-6:2008, GL Test 2
: EHEDG Certificate no.: 28/2011
: 100..999 mm (Ø 6 mm),
1000..2500 mm (Ø 10 mm)
: Ø 4 mm, independent from range
: -20..+100 °C, 140 °C < 30 min.
CIP- / SIP capable
Process pressure
: -1..10 bar
Process material
: 1.4404, PEEK, FDA compliant, Suitable
for foodstuffs in accordance with EHEDG
Process connection
: G 1" hygienic
Torque
: 5..10 Nm
Min. media conductivity : 1µS < 20 µS, ≥ 20µS
Measuring accuracy
: < 3% < 0.5 % of measuring range
Linearity
: < 2% < 0.3 % of measuring range
Outputs
Analogue output
: Active, 0/4..20 mA, Resistance < 600 Ω
Damping
: Programmable from 0.05..10 s
Switching outputs
: Transistor PNP / NPN programmable,
max. 30 V / 100 mA
Response time
: Programmable from 0.01..10 s
Galvanic isolation
: Sensor, Power supply/outputs
LED status message : 3 colours, programmable
Housing
: Round stainless steel housing Ø 59 mm
Material
: 1.4305
LED viewing window : Acrylic glass (PMMA)
Protection class
: IP67 / IP69K
Accessories / spare parts
AMD200
AMD201
ACI211
Spacer for probe tube diameter 6 mm
Spacer for probe tube diameter 10 mm
USB connection cable
ACH connection lines, APH process adaptation,
see separate product information GHMadapt/Accessories
pi-ma-MLP433-MR_e V1.01-03
pi-ma-Füllstand-potentiometrisch_e
V2.00-00
Cable colours M12 plug:
1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black, 5 = grey
Order code
1
MLP433 - MR -
2.
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
9.
-
1. Type
MR
Without reference electrode
2. Process connection
3
G1“ hygienic
3. Probe tube material
0
stainless steel (316L) 1.4404
1
stainless steel (316L) 1.4435
4. Probe tube diameter
06
6 mm
10
10 mm
5. Immersion length (length specification to 1 mm)
0100..0500 100 to 500 mm
●
0501..0999 501 to 999 mm
●
0500..1500 500 to 1500 mm
●
1501..2500 1501 to 2500 mm
●
6. Probe tube insulation
0
without insulation
7. Electrical connection
0
M12- plug (standard)
1
cable gland M16x1.5; polyamide (PA)
2
cable gland M16x1,5; stainless steel (1.4305)
8. Option
00
without option
9. Certificate according to DIN EN 10204. Please specify
only if required.
WZ2.2
certificate of conformity 2.2
217
1
Level, potentiometric
CE conformity
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperatur
Climate class
Vibrations
Approvals
Sensor
Probe tube length
(Measuring range)
Reference rod
Process temperature
: 18..30 V DC, max. 130 mA
: M12 plug or cable gland M16x1,5 gland
Polyamide (PA) or stainless steel (1.4305)
: EN 61326-1:2013
Subject to technical changes
Power supply
Supply voltage
Electrical connection
Product information Potentiometric level measurement
Potentiometric level
sensor MLP437-OR
Dimensions
Sealing edge for
process at 108/ mm
L= Max. Probe tube length
Immersion length
EL= L + 11mm
without probe tube insulation
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Continuous level measurement
Suitable for metallic tanks and containers
Process connection GHMadapt G ½“ hygienic
Flexible installation, compact version
No moving parts in the measured fluid
2 switching outputs, analogue output
Parameterisation via local display with capacitive keys and
internal USB interface
with probe tube insulation
Wiring
M12 plug
internal terminal and USB mini B jack
Technical data
CE conformity
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Climate class
Vibrations
Approvals
Sensor
Probe tube length
(Measuring range)
Process temperature
: 18..30 V DC, max. 130 mA
: M12 plug or cable M16x1,5 gland
Polyamide (PA) or stainless steel (1.4305)
: EN 61326-1:2013
: -20..+60 °C
: EN 60068-2-38:2009
: EN 60068-2-6:2008, GL Test 2
: EHEDG Certificate no.: 28/2011
: 100..999 mm (Ø 6 mm),
1000..2500 mm (Ø 10 mm)
: -20..+100 °C, 140 °C < 30 min.
CIP- / SIP capable
Process pressure
: -1..10 bar
Process material
: 1.4404, PEEK, FDA compliant,
Suitable for foodstuffs in accordance with
EHEDG,compliant to regulation
1935/2004 & 10/2011
Process connection
: G ½“ hygienic
Torque
: 5..10 Nm
Min. media conductivity : 1µS < 20 µS, ≥ 20µS
Measuring accuracy
: < 3% < 0.5 % of measuring range
Linearity
: < 2% < 0.3 % of measuring range
Output
Analogue output
: Active, 0/4..20 mA, Resistance < 600 Ω
Damping
: Programmable from 0.05..10 s
Switching outputs
: Transistor PNP / NPN programmable,
max. 30 V / 100 mA
Response time
: Programmable from 0.01..10 s
Galvanic isolation
: Sensor, Power supply/outputs
Display
: Graphic LC display, white/red backlighting
Keys
: 4 capacitive keypads
Housing
: Round stainless steel housing Ø 59 mm
Material
: 1.4305
Viewing window
: Acrylic glass (PMMA)
Protection class
: IP67 / IP69K
Accessories
ACI211
USB connection cable
APH process adaptation, ACH connection lines
see separate product information GHMadapt / Accessories
218
pi-ma-MLP437-OR_e V1.02-02
Cable colours M12 plug: 1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black, 5 = grey
Order code
1
MLP437 - OR -
2.
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
9.
-
1. Type
OR
Without reference electrode
2. Process connection
2
G½“ hygienic
3. Probe tube material
0
stainless steel (316L) 1.4404
1
stainless steel (316L) 1.4435
4. Probe tube diameter
06
6 mm
10
10 mm
5. Immersion length (length specification to 1 mm)
0100..0500 100 to 500 mm
●
0501..0999 501 to 999 mm
●
500..1500 500 to 1500 mm
●
1501..2500 1501 to 2500 mm
●
6. Probe tube insulation
0
without insulation
1
with PFA-insulation (For installation from top)
7. Electrical connection
0
M12- plug (standard)
1
cable gland M16x1,5; polyamide (PA)
2
cable gland M16x1,5; stainless steel (1.4305)
8. Options
00
without option
9. Certificate according to DIN EN 10204. Please specify
only if required.
WZ2.2
certificate of conformity 2.2
1
pi-ma-Füllstand-potentiometrisch_e V2.00-00
Subject to technical changes
Power supply
Supply voltag
Electrical connection
Product information Potentiometric level measurement
Dimensions
Sealing edge for
process at 100 mm
L= Max. Probe tube diameter
= Immersion length in the
tank
●
●
●
●
●
●
Suitable for non-metallic tanks and containers
Process connection GHMadapt G 1" hygienic
Flexible installation, compact version
No moving parts in the measured fluid
2 switching outputs, analogue output
Parameterisation via local display & internal USB interface
Wiring
M12 plug
internal terminal and USB mini B jack
Technical data
: -20..+60 °C
: EN 60068-2-38:2009
: EN 60068-2-6:2008, GL Test 2
: EHEDG Certificate no.: 28/2011
: 100..999 mm (Ø 6 mm),
1000..2500 mm (Ø 10 mm)
: Ø 4 mm, independent from range
: -20..+100 °C, 140 °C < 30 min.
CIP- / SIP capable
Process pressure
: -1..10 bar
Process material
: 1.4404, PEEK, FDA compliant,
Suitable for foodstuffs in accordance with
EHEDG, conform regulation
1935/2004 & 10/2011
Process connection
: G 1" hygienic
Torque
: 5..10 Nm
Min. media conductivity : 1µS < 20 µS, ≥ 20µS
Measuring accuracy
: < 3% < 0.5 % of measuring range
Linearity
: < 2% < 0.3 % of measuring range
Output
Analogue output
: Active, 0/4..20 mA, Resistance < 600 Ω
Damping
: Programmable from 0.05..10 s
Switching outputs
: Transistor PNP / NPN programmable,
max. 30 V / 100 mA
Response time
: Programmable from 0.01..10 s
Galvanic isolation
: Sensor, Power supply/outputs
Display
: Graphic LC display, white/red backlighting
Keys
: 4 capacitive keypads
Housing
: Round stainless steel housing Ø 59 mm
Material
: 1.4305
LED viewing window : acrylic glass (PMMA)
Protection class
: IP67 / IP69K
Accessories / spare parts
AMD200
AMD201
ACI211
Spacer for probe tube diameter 6 mm
Spacer for probe tube diameter 10 mm
USB connection cable
Cable colours M12 plug:
1 = brown, 2 = white, 3 = blue, 4 = black, 5 = grey
Order code
1
MLP437 - MR -
2.
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
7.
-
8.
-
9.
-
1. Type
MR
with reference electrode
2. Process connection
3
G1“ hygienic
3. Probe tube material
0
stainless steel (316L) 1.4404
1
stainless steel (316L) 1.4435
4. Probe tube diameter
06
6 mm
10
10 mm
5. Immersion length (length specification to 1 mm)
0100..0500 100 to 500 mm
●
0501..0999 501 to 999 mm
●
500..1500 500 to 1500 mm
●
1501..2500 1501 to 2500 mm
●
6. Probe tube insulation
0
without insulation
7. Electrical connection
0
M12- plug (standard)
1
cable gland M16x1.5; polyamide (PA)
2
cable gland M16x1,5; stainless steel (1.4305)
8. Option
00
without option
9. Certificate according to DIN EN 10204. Please specify
only if required.
WZ2.2
certificate of conformity 2.2
ACH connection lines, APH process adaptation,
see separate product information GHMadapt/Accessories
pi-ma-Füllstand-potentiometrisch_e
V2.00-00
pi-ma-MLP437-MR_e V1.02-03
219
1
Level, potentiometric
CE conformity
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Climate class
Vibrations
Approvals
Sensor
Probe tube length
(Measuring range)
Reference rod
Process temperature
: 18..30 V DC, max. 130 mA
: M12 plug or cable gland M16x1,5
Polyamide (PA) or stainless steel (1.4305)
: EN 61326-1:2013
Subject to technical changes
Power supply
Supply voltage
Electrical connection
220
Hygienic Design
Page
Level, hydrostatic
Level, hydrostatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
221
222
Product information Level, hydrostatic
DMP 331P
Industrial
Pressure Transmitter
Process Connections With
Flush Welded Stainless Steel
Diaphragm
accuracy according to IEC 60770:
standard: 0.35 % FSO
option: 0.25 % FSO
Nominal pressure
The pressure transmitter DMP 331P was
designed for use in the food / beverage and
pharmaceutical industry. The compact design
with hygienic versions makes it possible to
achieve an outstanding performance in terms of
accuracy, temperature behavior and long term
stability.
from 0 ... 100 mbar up to 0 ... 40 bar
Output signals
2-wire: 4 ... 20 mA / 3-wire: 0 ... 10 V
others on request
The modular construction concept allows a
combination of various process connections with
different filling fluids and a cooling element.
Several electrical connections complete the
profile of DMP 331P.
Special characteristics
►
►
►
hygienic version
diaphragm with low
surface roughness
CIP / SIP cleaning up to 150 °C
vacuum resistant
Preferred areas of use are
Optional versions
►
IS-version
Ex ia = intrinsically safe for gases and
dust
►
SIL 2
according to IEC 61508 / IEC 61511
►
Diaphragm in
®
Hastelloy or Tantalum
►
cooling element for media
temperatures up to 300 °C
Food and Beverage
Pharmaceutical Industry
Material and test certificates
►
inspection certificate 3.1
according to EN 10204
►
test report 2.2
according to EN 10204
Level, hydrostatic
►
74-06
BD SENSORS GmbH
BD-Sensors-Straße 1
D - 95199 Thierstein
Tel
Fax
GHM Messtechnik GmbH | Sales Center | Training Center | Headquarters of the GHM Group
Schloßstraße 6
 +49 - 7354 - 937233 - 0
+49 (0) 92 35 / 98 11- 0
www.bdsensors.com
88453 Erolzheim
 www.ghm-messtechnik.de
+49 (0) 92 35 / 98 11- 11
info@bdsensors.de
Germany
 info@ghm-messtechnik.de
223
DMP 331P
Product information Level, hydrostatic
Industrial Pressure Transmitter
Input pressure range 1
Nominal pressure gauge
Nominal pressure abs.
Overpressure
Burst pressure ≥
Nominal pressure
gauge / abs.
Overpressure
Burst pressure ≥
Vacuum resistance
1
Technical Data
[bar]
[bar]
[bar]
[bar]
-1…0
5
7.5
0.10
0.5
1.5
0.16
1
1.5
0.25
1
1.5
0.40
0.40
2
3
0.60
0.60
5
7.5
1
1
5
7.5
[bar]
2.5
4
6
10
16
25
40
40
50
80
120
80
120
105
210
[bar]
[bar]
10
20
40
15
25
50
PN > 1 bar: unlimited vacuum resistance
PN ≤ 1 bar: on request
1.6
1.6
10
15
consider the pressure resistance of fitting and clamps
Output signal / Supply
Standard
Option IS-protection
Options 3-wire
2-wire:
2-wire:
3-wire:
Performance
Accuracy 2
standard:
option:
Permissible load
Influence effects
Long term stability
Response time
2
4
4
0
0
...
...
...
...
20 mA
20 mA
20 mA
10 V
/
/
/
/
VS
VS
VS
VS
= 8 ...
= 10 ...
= 14 ...
= 14 ...
32 VDC
28 VDC
30 VDC
30 VDC
nominal pressure < 0.4 bar:
nominal pressure ≥ 0.4 bar:
nominal pressure ≥ 0.4 bar:
SIL-version: VS = 14 … 28 VDC
SIL-version: VS = 14 … 28 VDC
≤ ± 0.5 % FSO
≤ ± 0.35 % FSO
≤ ± 0.25 % FSO
current 2-wire: Rmax = [(VS – VS min) / 0.02 A] Ω
current 3-wire: Rmax = 500 Ω
voltage 3-wire: Rmin = 10 kΩ
supply: 0.05 % FSO / 10 V
load: 0.05 % FSO / kΩ
≤ ± 0.1 % FSO / year at reference conditions
2-wire: < 10 msec
3-wire: ≤ 3 msec
accuracy according to IEC 60770 – limit point adjustment (non-linearity, hysteresis, repeatability)
Thermal effects (Offset and Span) 3 / Permissible temperatures
Nominal pressure PN
[bar]
-1 … 0
< 0.40
≥ 0.40
Tolerance band
[% FSO]
≤ ± 0.75
≤ ± 1,5
≤ ± 0.75
in compensated range
[°C]
-20 ... 85
0 ... 50
-20 ... 85
Permissible temperatures 4
medium:
-40 ... 125 °C for filling fluid silicone oil
-10 ... 125 °C for filling fluid food grade oil
electronics / environment:
-40 ... 85 °C
storage: -40 ... 100 °C
filling fluid silicone oil
overpressure: -40 … 300 °C
vacuum: -40 ... 150 °C5
Permissible temperature medium
for cooling element 300°C
filling fluid food grade oil
overpressure: -10 ... 250 °C
vacuum: -10 ... 150 °C5
3
4
5
an optional cooling element can influence thermal effects for offset and span depending on installation position and filling conditions.
max. temperature of the medium for nominal pressure gauge > 0 bar: 150 °C for 60 minutes with a max. environmental temperature of 50 °C
also for Pabs ≤ 1 bar
Electrical protection
Short-circuit protection
Reverse polarity protection
Electromagnetic
compatibility
Mechanical stability
Vibration
according to DIN EN 60068-2-6
Shock
according to DIN EN 60068-2-27
Filling fluids
Standard
Options
Materials
Pressure port
Housing
Option compact field housing
Seals (media wetted)
Standard
Optional
Diaphragm
Standard
Optional
Media wetted parts
pressure and level
224
permanent
no damage, but also no function
emission and immunity according to EN 61326
G 1/2": 20 g RMS (25 ... 2000 Hz)
others: 10 g RMS (25 … 2000 Hz)
G 1/2": 500 g / 1 msec
others: 100 g / 1 msec
silicone oil
food grade oil, compliant with 21CFR178.3570
(Mobil SHC Cibus 32; Category Code: H1; NSF Registration No.: 141500)
others on request
stainless steel 1.4404 (316 L)
others on request
stainless steel 1.4404 (316 L)
stainless steel 1.4305 (303), cable gland brass, nickel plated
others on request
FKM (recommended for medium temperatures ≤ 200 °C)
FFKM (recommended for medium temperatures > 200 °C)
Clamp, dairy pipe, Varivent®: without
others on request
stainless steel 1.4435 (316 L)
Hastelloy® C-276 (2.4819)
pressure port, seal, diaphragm
Tantalum on request
GHM Messtechnik GmbH | Sales Center | Training Center | Headquarters of the GHM Group
Schloßstraße 6
 +49 - 7354 - 937233 - 0
88453 Erolzheim
 www.ghm-messtechnik.de
Germany
 info@ghm-messtechnik.de
DMP 331P
Product information Level, hydrostatic
Industrial Pressure Transmitter
Technical Data
Explosion protection (only for 4 … 20 mA / 2-wire)
IBExU 10 ATEX 1068 X / IECEx IBE 12.0027X
Approvals
DX 19-DMP 331P
zone 0:
II 1G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
zone 20: II 1D Ex ia IIIC T 85°C Da
Ui = 28 V, Ii = 93 mA, Pi = 660 mW, Ci ≈ 0 nF, Li ≈ 0 µH,
Safety technical maximum values
the supply connections have an inner capacity of max. 27 nF to the housing
Ambient temperature range
in zone 0:
-20 ... 60 °C with patm 0.8 bar up to 1.1 bar
in zone 1 or higher:
-20 ... 70 °C
Connecting cables
cable capacitance:
signal line/shield also signal line/signal line: 160 pF/m
(by factory)
cable inductance:
signal line/shield also signal line/signal line: 1µH/m
Miscellaneous
Option SIL6 2
according to IEC 61508 / IEC 61511
Current consumption
signal output current:
max. 25 mA
signal output voltage:
max. 7 mA
Weight
min. 200 g (depending on process connection)
Installation position
any (standard calibration in a vertical position with the pressure port connection down;
differing installation position for PN ≤ 2 bar have to be specified in the order)
> 100 x 106 pressure cycles
EMC Directive: 2014/30/EU
94/9/EG
Operational life
CE-conformity
ATEX Directive
6
only for 4 … 20 mA / 2-wire
Wiring diagrams
2-wire-system (current)
3-wire-system (current / voltage)
supply +
p
supply +
p
VS
VS
I
supply –
supply –
I/U
A/V
signal +
Pin configuration
1
2
3
Binder 723
(5-pin)
3
4
1
M12x1 / metal
(4-pin)
1
2
3
ground pin
5
4
ISO 4400
Electrical connection
Supply +
Supply –
Signal  (only 3-wire)
Shield
field
housing
IN +
IN OUT+
cable colours
(DIN 47100)
wh (white)
bn (brown)
gn (green)
ye/gn
(yellow / green)
Electrical connections (dimensions in mm)
standard
Binder Series 723
(IP 67)
M12x1 4-pin
(IP 67)
cable outlet with PVC cable
(IP 67) 7
Level, hydrostatic
ISO 4400
(IP 65)
option
compact field housing
(IP 67)

7
8
cable outlet, cable with ventilation tube
(IP 68) 8
universal field housing stainless steel 1.4404 (316 L) with cable gland M20x1.5 (ordering code 880)
and other versions on request
standard: 2 m PVC cable without ventilation tube (permissible temperature: -5 … 70°C)
different cable types and lengths available, permissible temperature depends on kind of cable
GHM Messtechnik GmbH | Sales Center | Training Center | Headquarters of the GHM Group
Schloßstraße 6
 +49 - 7354 - 937233 - 0
www.bdsensors.com
88453 Erolzheim
 www.ghm-messtechnik.de
Germany
 info@ghm-messtechnik.de
225
DMP 331P
Product information Level, hydrostatic
Industrial Pressure Transmitter
Technical Data
Mechanical connection (dimension in mm)
Option
G1/2" flush DIN 38529
G 3/4" flush DIN 3852
with ISO 4400
G1" flush DIN 3852
with ISO 4400
Option
G1/2" flush
with radial o-ring
9
G1" flush
with radial o-ring (PN ≤ 2 bar)
G1" cone
with ISO 4400
cooling element 300 °C
74-06
74-06
®
Varivent
PN ≤ 25 bar
dairy pipe (DIN 11851)
with ISO 4400
size
A
B
PN
[bar]
dimension in mm
DN 25 DN 40 DN 50
23
32
45
44
56
68.5
≥ 0,25 ≥ 0,25 ≥ 0,25
≤ 40
≤ 40
≤ 25
Clamp (DIN 32676)
with ISO 4400
size
A
B
PN
[bar]
dimension in mm
¾“
DN 25 DN 32
14
23
32
25
50.5
50.5
≥4
≥ 0,25
≤ 16
≤8
≤ 16
* higher pressure ranges on request
 SIL- and SIL-Ex version: total length increases by 26.5 mm!
 metric threads and other versions on request
9
possible only for PN ≥ 1 bar
DN 50
45
64
≤ 16
© 2016 BD|SENSORS GmbH – The specifications given in this document represent the state of engineeringat the time of publishing. We reserve the right to make modifications to the specifications and materials.
Standard
DMP331P_E_200416
Tel
+49
92 35 / 98 11- 0
pressure
and(0)
level
Fax
+49 (0) 92 35 / 98 11- 11
226
GHM Messtechnik GmbH | Sales Center | Training Center | Headquarters of the GHM Group
Schloßstraße 6
 +49 - 7354 - 937233 - 0
www.bdsensors.com
88453 Erolzheim
 www.ghm-messtechnik.de
info@bdsensors.de
Germany
 info@ghm-messtechnik.de
Product information Level, hydrostatic
Ordering code DMP 331P
DMP 331P
-
Input
Output
4 … 20 mA / 2-wire
0 … 20 mA / 3-wire
0 … 10 V / 3-wire
Intrinsic safety 4 … 20 mA / 2-wire
SIL2 4 … 20 mA / 2-wire
SIL2 with Intrinsic safety 4 … 20 mA / 2-wire
customer
Accuracy
standard for PN ≥ 0.4 bar
0.35 %
standard for PN < 0.4 bar
0.5 %
option for PN ≥ 0.4 bar
0.25 %
customer
Electrical connection
Male and female plug ISO 4400
Male plug Binder series 723 (5-pin)
Cable outlet with PVC-cable
Cable outlet
Male plug M12x1 (4-pin) / metal
Compact field housing stainless steel
stainless steel 1.4305
customer
Mechanical connection
G1/2" with flush
welded diaphragm (DIN 3852)
G3/4" with flush
welded diaphragm (DIN 3852)
G1" with flush
welded diaphragm (DIN 3852)
G1" DIN 3852 with rad. o-ring
and flush diaphragm
G1/2" DIN 3852 with rad. o-ring
and flush diaphragm
G 1" cone
Clamp DN 25 / 1" (DIN 32676) / 3A
Clamp DN 32 / 1 1/2" (DIN 32676) / 3A
Clamp DN 50 / 2" (DIN 32676) / 3A
Clamp 3/4" (DIN 32676) / 3A
Dairy pipe DN 25 (DIN 11851)
Dairy pipe DN 40 (DIN 11851)
Dairy pipe DN 50 (DIN 11851)
Varivent® DN 40/50 / 3A
customer
Diaphragm
Stainless steel 1.4435 (316L)
Tantalum
-
-
-
Filling Fluids
Special version
-
-
-
5 0 0
5 0 1
1
1
1
2
4
6
1
1
2
4
6
1
1
2
4
X
9
1
1
0
6
5
0
0
0
6
5
0
0
0
6
5
0
1
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
9
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
9
consult
1
2
3
E
1S
ES
9
consult
3
5
2
9
consult
1
2
T
T
M
2
3
0
0
A
R
1
0
0
0
0
0
8 5 0
4
consult
9 9 9
Z 0 0
5
Z 3 0
Z 3 1
Z 5 7
6
5
Z 6 1
4
K
C
C
C
C
M
M
M
P
9
4
4
3
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
4
9
1
1
2
3
9
3
5
6
1
9
consult
1
T
H
9
Hastelloy ® C-276 (2.4819)
customer
Seals
for clamp, dairy pipe, Varivent®:
for inch thread - standard:
for inch thread - option:
-
without
FKM
FFKM
customer
consult
consult
0
1
7
9
silicone oil
food grade oil (FDA) / 3A
customer
consult
1
2
9
standard
with cooling element up to 300°C / 3A
customer
consult
0 0 0
2 0 0
9 9 9
consult
absolute pressure possible from 0.4 bar
standard: 2 m PVC cable without ventilation tube (permissible temperature: -5 … 70°C), others on request
cable with ventilation tube (code TR0 = PVC cable), different cable types and lengths available, price without cable
The cup nut has to be mounted by production of pressure transmitter with electrical connection field housing and mechanical connection dairy pipe.
The cup nut has to be ordered as separate position.
possible only for PN ≥ 1 bar
possible only for PN ≤ 2 bar
®
®
Varivent is a brand name of GEA Tuchenhagen GmbH, Hastelloy is a brand name of Haynes International Inc.
06.05.2015
GHM Messtechnik GmbH | Sales Center | Training Center | Headquarters of the GHM Group
Schloßstraße 6
 +49 - 7354 - 937233 - 0
88453 Erolzheim
 www.ghm-messtechnik.de
Germany
 info@ghm-messtechnik.de
227
Level, hydrostatic
gauge
absolute
[bar]
0.10
0.16
0.25
0.40
0.60
1.0
1.6
2.5
4.0
6.0
10
16
25
40
-1 … 0
customer
-
© 2015 BD|SENSORS GmbH - The specifications given in this document represent the state of engineering at the time of publishing. We reserve the right to make modifications to the specifications and materials.
Pressure
228
Hygienic Design
Page
Turbidity
Turbidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
229
230
www.ghm-group.de
Product information
Turbidity
Hygienic Design
Turbidity
Product information Turbidity
Characteristics
Application
System
○ Continuous turbidity measurement
○ Optical Turbidimeter
○ Brewery
Processing
○ Diary
○ Indication, switching, measuring
Process connection
○ Welded nozzle, Milk-pipe connection
Media
○ Liquids, viscous media
Pressure range
○ Food- and beverage industry
○ Machine building
○ Pharmacy industry
○ Cosmetic industry
○ Biotechnology
○ -1..+10 bar
Media temperature
○ 0..+90°C, CIP-/SIP-capable, 120°C < 30 min
232
pi-ma-Truebung_e V1.00-00
Product information Turbidity
Function
Advantage
The turbidity measurement method is based on the optical principle
of light scattering . The device emits a light beam . This applies to
particles in the fluid and parts of the light will be reflected (scattered) . In the opposite to the light source is a light sensor, receiving
with increasing scattering ( higher proportion of particles → greater
turbidity ) less and less light . The following images show the effect :
The parts coming into contact with the media complies with FDA
requirements and are CIP-/SIP capable. Steam sterilization for a
short time – up to 120°C.
○ No mechanical moving parts
○ Compact construction design for food and hygiene compliance
○ Independent of pressure, temperature and density changes
○ Maintenance-free
○ Installation without gaps and cavity-free
○ Detection of liquids such as milk or beer
Mounting
The following notes must be observed :
○ The measuring tube must be completely filled
○ Air bubbles and foam formation should be avoided
○ The installation near inspection glasses should be avoided
○ No sedimentation in the near of the optic itself
Installation
The following instructions must be observed:
○ The measuring tube must be completely filled
○ Air bubbles and foaming must be prevented.
○ Installation near viewing glasses must be avoided.
○ Sediments may not deposit near the lens.
From knowledge of the emitted and the received light, the integrated microcontroller computes the turbidity as a percentage of the
maximum measurement value. This value can be converted with an
integrated conversion table into a material-specific concentration
values, or in the formazine based unit FAU. The values for the current output, the two switching outputs and the optional connected
LC display derived from this result.
There are a variety of parameters in the operating menu to fit the
turbidimeter for the best result in the application. For instance :
because of the programmable time behavior, short-term disturbances in the medium courses no uncontrolled switching operations or
troubled measured values at the current output.
As an example, measurement diagrams for various dairy products
Position
Characteristic

Danger – bubbles or partly filled pipe

Ideal – good measurement result

Ideal – good measurement result

Danger – open line section

Danger – bubbles or partly filled pipe
Turbidity
Mistakes reserved, technical specifications subject to change
without notice.
pi-ma-Truebung_e V1.00-00
233
Product information Turbidity
Turbidimeters
MAT433 / MAT437
● Wide measuring range for scanning high turbidity level
● Absorption turbidity measurement according to
EN ISO 27027
● 2 switch outputs, function programmable
● Analog output 0/4..20 mA
● Parametrization via GHMware and
internal mini USB interface
● Wide view LED status display (MAT433)
● Graphic LC-Display with capacitive buttons (MAT437)
Characteristics
The turbidimeters MAT433 and MAT437 are used for phase detection in food and beverage industry. The absorption measurement
principle according to EN ISO 27027 is designed to measure very
high turbiditys. The turbidity is output as a percentage of the maximum measurement value. This value can be converted with an integrated conversion table into material-specific concentrations or
into the formazine based unit FAU.
Technical data
Power supply
Supply voltage
Electrical connection
CE-conformity
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Climatic class
Vibration class
Sensor
Measuring range
Accuracy
Process temperature
Process pressure
Process material
Process connection
Outputs
Analog output
Switching outputs
Response time
Display MAT433
Display MAT437
Case
Material
LED / LCD window
Protection class
: 18..30 V DC, max. 3 W
: M12 plug or cable gland M16x1.5
polyamide (PA) or stainless steel (1.4305)
: EN 61326-1:2013
: -10..+60 °C
: EN 60068-2-38:2009
: EN 60068-2-6:2008, GL test 2
: 0…100 % Absorption, scalable in material
specific concentration units, 0…4000 FAU
: +/- 2 %
: 0..+90 °C, 120 °C < 30 min
: 0..10 bar
: 1.4404, sapphire glass
: welded connection acc. EN 10357:2013
series A (former DIN 11850, series2),
Milk pipe thread acc. DIN 11851
(optional)
: active 0/4..20 mA, burden < 600 Ω
: 2 x transistor PNP / NPN programmable
max.30 V DC, 100 mA
: programmable 0,01 .. 10 s
: LED's, 3 colors, programmable
: Graphic LC-Display, lighted white/red
4 capacitive buttons
: round stainless steel housing Ø 59 mm
: 1.4305
: acrylic glass (PMMA)
: IP67 / IP69K
234
pi-ma-MAT43X_e V0.00-01
Dimensions
Dimensions MAT433
DN
H1 H ges D [mm]
[mm] [mm] DIN EN
10357
Series A
DN25
112
DN40
118
DN50
124
DN65
132
DN80 139,5
DN100 149
191
203
215
231
246
265
29x1,5
41x1,5
53x1,5
70x2
85x2
104x2
Dimensions MAT437
DN
H1 H ges D [mm]
[mm] [mm] DIN EN
10357
series A
DN25
120
DN40
126
DN50
132
DN65
140
DN80 147,5
DN100 157
199
211
223
239
254
273
29x1,5
41x1,5
53x1,5
70x2
85x2
104x2
L [mm]
VARINLINE® housing with
welded nozzle
L [mm]
milk-pipe
thread nozzle
DIN 11851
180
180
180
250
250
250
238
246
250
330
340
358
L [mm]
VARINLINE® housing with
welded nozzle
L [mm]
milk-pipe
thread nozzle
DIN 11851
180
180
180
250
250
250
238
246
250
330
340
358
Connection diagrams
M12 plug
Terminal clamps
and USB Mini-B plug
Cable colors (plug):
1 = brown
2 = white
3 = blue
4 = black
5 = gray
1
pi-ma-Truebung_e V1.00-00
Product information Turbidity
Displays
Order Code
1.
2.
MAT433 -
-
3.
-
4.
5.
-
-
6.
-
1. Nominal diameter
025
DN25
040
DN40
050
DN50
065
DN65
080
DN80
100
DN100
2. Optical path length
06
6 mm
3. Process connection
1
Welded nozzle (incl. VARINLINE® housing)
2
Process connection according to APT article
4. Electrical connection
0
M12-plug (standard)
1
Cable gland M16x1,5; polyamide (PA)
2
Cable gland M16x1,5; stainless steel (1.4305)
5. Optionen
00
Without Options
6. Certificate acc. DIN EN 10204. Specify when requested
WZ2.2
Certificate of conformity 2.2
1.
MAT437 -
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
6.
-
1. Nominal diameter
025
DN25
040
DN40
050
DN50
065
DN65
080
DN80
100
DN100
2. Optical path length
06
6 mm
3. Process connection
1
Welded nozzle (incl. VARINLINE® housing)
2
Process connection according to APT article
4. Electrical connection
0
M12-plug (standard)
1
Cable gland M16x1,5; polyamide (PA)
2
Cable gland M16x1,5; stainless steel (1.4305)
5. Options
00
Without Options
6. Certificate acc. DIN EN 10204. Specify when requested
WZ2.2
Certificate of conformity 2.2
Process adaptions
Additional milk-pipe-adapter weld on the VARINLINE®-case of the
MAT43x.
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
1. Process connection
3
Milk pipe DIN11851 two-sided thread nozzle
2. Nominal diameter
3
DN25
4
DN40
5
DN50
6
DN65
7
DN80
8
DN100
3. Optionen
0
Without Options
1
Two-sided cone nozzle with union nut
2
Thread- / cone nozzle with union nut
4. Certificate acc. DIN EN 10204. Specify when requested
WZ2.2
Accessory
ACI211 USB connection cable
ACH connection cable
Certificate of conformity 2.2
Turbidity
1.
APT -
VARINLINE is a registered trademark of GEA Tuchenhagen
GmbH , Büchen , Germany
2
pi-ma-Truebung_e
V1.00-00
235
pi-ma-MAT43X_e V0.00-01
236
Hygienic Design
Page
237
Process pressure
Process pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
238
www.ghm-group.de
Product information
Pressure
PROFIBUS
Product information Pressure
Characteristics
Applications
System
○ Filter and cleanroom technology
○
○
○
○
○
○ Control, measurement and
monitoring technology
Differential pressure
Overload pressure
Vacuum
Absolute pressure
Flow
Metering ranges
○
±0,3 mbar..+1000 bar
○ Medium: air and non-aggressive gases.
Alsofluids
○
-Uses
Evaluation
○
Analog output with unit signals 0/4..20 mA, 0..10 V
Process connection
○
○
○
○
Male thread G 1/4 A...G 1 A,
Female thread G 1
Push-on nipple
Bulkhead fittings
Installation
○
○
Screw-in sensors
Field housing
Pressure transducers
Pressure switch
Function
Function
Pressure transducers were designed to cover the majority of applications in the area of industrial pressure measurement technology.
The field devices are approved for use only with dry non-aggressive
gases. The screw-in sensors can also be used for fluids. Silicon
oil is used as the internal transfer liquid for the screwin sensors.
Vegetable oil is used for the foodstuffs model.
In the membrane and piston models, the pressure is transferred to
a micro switch. The simple mechanical system allows the switching
point to be adjusted by means of an adjustment screw.
Benefits
Benefits
○
○
○
○
○
2
240
Compact construction for field housing
Generous metering ranges
Condensate-resistant models
Foodstuffs model
○
These robust devices require no voltage supply, and are
suitable for air, oil, and water.
Models are available with normally open (n.o) and normally
closed (n.c.) contacts constructed from brass, steel,
and stainless steel.
ghm_pi-ho-sm-pressure_e V3.02-00
Product information Pressure
Pressure Transmitter
Series SA-11
SA-11-0
●
●
●
●
Dimensions
SA-11-1
Measuring range from 0.25..25 bar
Output signal 0..20 mA, 4..20 mA, 0..10 V DC
Certified for EHEDG, 3A and FDA
Max. process temperature -20..150 °C
Clamp
Process connection
Characteristics
The SA-11 pressure transmitter has been specially designed to
meet the requirements of the food, beverage, pharmaceutical and
biotechnology industries. With its resistance to chemical cleaning
liquids and high temperatures, this transmitter is particularly suited
for CIP/SIP cleaning processes. The flush diaphragm is directly
welded to the process connection, thus ensuring a gap-free
connection and eliminating the need for additional sealing gaskets.
The SA-11 pressure transmitter meets the high requirements of
sterile engineering processes and is certified in accordance with
the 3-A Sanitary Standards and the EHEDG.
Tri-Clamp
Clamp
DIN32676
Female
union nut
DIN11851
VARIVENT® Form F
Form N
DIN11851
DN
[mm/inch]
1 ½“
2“
DN32
DN40
DN50
DN25
DN40
DN50
DN25/32
DN50/DN50
VARIVENT®
D
[mm]
50
64
50
50
64
44
56
68,5
50
68
G
Rd52x1/6
Rd65x1/6
Rd78x1/6
Technical data
Power supply
Supply voltage
Process temperature
Ambient temperature
CE-conformity
Certification
Output
Current
Max. burden RA
Voltage
Max. burden RA
Accuracy
Material
Process connection
Surface roughness
Case
System fill fluid
Membrane
Electrical connection
: 10/(14)..30 V DC
: -20..+150 °C
: -20..+80 °C
: EN 61326-1:2013; EN 61326-2-3:2013
: EHEDG, A3, FDA conform
Connection diagram
: 0..20 mA, 3-wire; 4..20 mA, 2-wire
: 2-wire, RA ≤(U+ -10 V) ÷ 0.02 A [Ω]
3-wire, RA ≤(U+ -3 V) ÷ 0.02 A [Ω]
: 0..10 V DC, 3-wire
: >10 kΩ
: 0.5 %
: stainless-steel 1.4435
: Ra <0.4 µm
: stainless-steel 1.4571
: synthetic oil, FDA approved
: gap free connection,
free of dead spaces
: field case (IP68)
or L-connector acc. to
EN 175301-803/A (IP65)
26
pi-ma_SA11_e V1.02-00
241
1
ghm_pi-ho-sm-pressure_e V3.02-00
Process pressure
Continue next page
Product information Pressure
Ordering code
1.
SA-11 -
2.
-
3.
-
4.
-
5.
-
1. Electrical connection
0
L-connector EN175301-803/A, IP65
1
field case, IP68
2. Output
0
0..10 V 3-wire
1
0..20 mA 3-wire
2
4..20 mA 2-wire
3. Process connection
TC15
Tri-Clamp 1 ½”
TC20
Tri-Clamp 2”
NM25
female union nut DN25
NM40
female union nut DN40
NM50
female union nut DN50
CL25
Clamp DN25
CL32
Clamp DN32
CL40
Clamp DN40
CL50
Clamp DN50
WV25
VARIVENT® Form F
WV40
VARIVENT® Form N
4. Options
00
without option
5. Measuring range [bar]
0.25/ 0.4/ 0.6/ 1/ 2.5/ 4/ 6/ 10/ 16/ 25
-1..0/ -1..1/ -1..2/ -1..4/ -1..10
242
2
ghm_pi-ho-sm-pressure_e
V3.02-00
27
pi-ma_SA11_e V1.02-00
243
GHM Messtechnik GmbH – General Terms and Conditions of Business
§ 1 Scope of Application and Definitions
1. These General Terms and Conditions of Business (“GTC”) shall apply exclusively to legal relations between GHM Messtechnik
GmbH (“GHM”), consisting of GHM Greisinger, GHM Honsberg, GHM Martens and GHM IMTRON, and customers. The GTC also apply
to the sale of DELTA Ohm products as a member of the GHM Group via GHM Messtechnik GmbH. Any provisions which deviate from,
contradict or supplement these GTC shall, even upon knowledge thereof, not be recognised and are hereby expressly objected to,
unless there is express and written agreement to the customer’s contradicting terms and conditions of business.
2. A customer within the meaning of these GTC is an entrepreneur (§ 14 BGB), legal person under public law or special fund under
public law which submits an order to GHM or concludes a contract with GHM. GHM does not supply to consumers (§ 13 BGB).
3. GHM reserves the right to change the GTCs for future orders. In this regard, please check the GHM website.
§ 2 Conclusion of Contract
1. The product catalogues issued by GHM as well as other brochures and technical documentation do not constitute an offer to
conclude a contract but rather merely an invitation to the customer to submit a written offer to GHM to conclude a contract.
2. Offers by GHM are subject to confirmation and are non-binding, unless expressly designated as binding by GHM. Contracts are only
concluded by way of written order confirmation by GHM or by way of delivery. Orally issued orders shall only become effective once
confirmed in writing by GHM. Amendments to a concluded contract must be confirmed in writing by GHM in order to be effective.
3. A customer order which qualifies as an offer to conclude a contract may be accepted by GHM within 2 weeks. Acceptance and
dispatch of the ordered products shall have the same effect.
§ 3 Scope of performance obligation
1. The scope of the performance obligation of GHM shall be determined in accordance with the relevant contract. GHM reserves the
right to make changes to technical data as well as changes to form, colour and/or weight within reasonable bounds.
2. GHM is entitled to render partial performance where this is reasonable according to the individual circumstances of the customer.
The invoices issued in this regard are payable independently of the total delivery.
3. Product details and usage criteria in product catalogues, brochures and technical documentation as well as other information
material provided by GHM to the customer and product descriptions are not to be understood as either guarantees of a particular
quality of the products or as a simple agreement as to quality; such quality guarantees and quality agreements must be expressly
agreed in writing.
§ 4 Prices / Payments / Interest on Late Payments / Set-off
1. All prices specified in the product catalogues, brochures and technical documentation as well as other information material issued
by GHM are exclusive of the relevant applicable VAT, unless they are stated to include VAT. Packaging, freight, postage, requested
export certificates as well as any other shipping costs and insurance are additionally to be paid by the customer unless otherwise
agreed.
2. Unless fixed prices are expressly agreed, the specified prices are based on GHM’s production costs at the time of order confirmation. In the event of unforeseeable increases in production costs that are beyond GHM’s control, GHM reserves the right to increase
prices accordingly where the delivery or service is not required to be rendered within 4 months of conclusion of the contract.
3. Unless otherwise agreed in writing, all payments must be made within 30 days of the date of invoice without deduction in full to
the specified payment agent.
4. If payments are deferred or the customer is in default of payment, the statutory interest for late payment between businesses
shall be due (currently 9 percentage points over the relevant base interest rate in accordance with § 288 para 2 BGB). According to §
286 para 3 BGB, default of payment – even without a notice – occurs where the customer does not make payment within 30 days of
the due date for payment and receipt of an invoice or or an equivalent payment schedule.
5. The customer only has rights of set-off or retention to the extent that its claim is legally established or undisputed. In the event of
defective delivery, the counter-rights of the customer in particular in accordance with § 8.2 of these GTC shall remain unaffected.
§ 5 Force Majeure
Unforeseen breakdowns, delayed deliveries or non-delivery by suppliers of GHM (including intra-group suppliers of GHM), shortage
of labour, power or raw materials, strikes, lockouts, difficulties in providing means of transport, traffic disruptions, government
orders, embargoes, boycotts and other events of force majeure shall relieve the party affected thereby of its obligation to supply
or accept the items, as the case may be, for the duration of and to the extent of such hindrance. If, in consequence, delivery or
acceptance is delayed by more than one month, either party may, to the exclusion of all further claims, withdraw from the contract
in respect of the quantities affected by such delivery or acceptance hindrance.
§ 6 Delivery and Transfer of Risk
1. The place of performance and fulfilment is the place from which delivery is effected.
2. In the event that the customer requests that the contractual item is sent to another location, the risk of accidental loss passes to
the customer upon handover of the item to the first freight carrier. This shall also apply if the customer refuses to accept the delivery.
Unless agreed otherwise, GHM is free to select the manner of shipping. The packaging material is to be recycled or properly disposed
of by the customer at its own cost. § 11 shall apply mutatis mutandis.
3. Delivery dates and deadlines are only binding if the contracting parties have made an express agreement to this effect. In case of
doubt, delivery deadlines begin on the date of order confirmation. If there is a temporary hindrance to performance which is beyond
GHM’s control, the delivery dates and deadlines shall be extended correspondingly. This applies in particular in cases of force majeure
within the meaning of § 5. Occurrence of delivery delay by GHM shall be determined in accordance with legal regulations. In any
case a notice by the customer shall however be necessary.
§ 7 Retention of Ownership
1. Until full payment of all of our present and future claims arising out of the ongoing business relationship with the customer
(“secured claims”) we retain ownership of the contractual items. The customer shall handle the contractual items with care and shall
store them safely at no cost.
2. Prior to full payment of the secured claims, the contractual items subject to retention of ownership may not be pledged to third
parties or used as security. The customer shall notify GHM promptly in writing if an application is filed for the initiation of insolvency
proceedings or where third parties have access (e.g. by way of pledges) to the contractual items belonging to GHM.
3. Where the customer is in breach of the contract, in particular in the case of non-payment of the due amount under the contract,
GHM may in accordance with legal regulations withdraw from the contract and/or demand that contractual items be returned on
the basis of the retention of ownership. The demand for return does not simultaneously constitute the withdrawal; GHM is moreover
entitled to make the demand for return and reserve the right to withdraw. If the customer does not pay the due amount under the
contract, GHM may only assert these rights if GHM has given the customer a reasonable deadline to make payment without success
or where such a setting of a deadline is not required in accordance with legal regulations.
4. Until the time of withdrawal in accordance with (c) below, the customer is authorised to continue to sell on and/or to process the
contractual items which are subject to retention of ownership within the ordinary course of business. In such a case the following
supplemental provisions shall apply:
a) The retention of ownership shall extend to the full value of products resulting from the processing or combining of the contractual
items, whereby GHM shall remain the manufacturer. In the event that processing or combining uses third party items which are
subject to ownership rights, the customer hereby transfers to GHM co-ownership in the proportion of the invoice value of the
processed or combined contractual items. GHM hereby accepts the transfer. Otherwise, the same shall apply to the resulting product
as to the contractual items delivered under retention of ownership.
b) The customer hereby assigns to GHM as security any claims against third parties arising out of the onward sale of the contractual
items in their entirety or in the amount of any proportion co-owned by GHM in accordance with the previous paragraph. GHM
hereby accepts the assignment. The obligations of the customer set out in paragraph 2 shall also apply in regard to assigned claims.
c) The customer shall remain authorised to redeem the claim in addition to GHM. GHM is obliged not to redeem the claim as long as
the customer meets its payment obligations to GHM, there is no defect in its ability to perform and GHM does not assert ownership
by exercising a right in accordance with paragraph 3. If this is however the case, GHM may demand that the customer discloses
the claims assigned to GHM and their creditors, provides all necessary information for redemption, hands over the associated
documentation and informs the (third party) creditor of the assignment. Furthermore, in such a case GHM shall be entitled to revoke
the authorisation of the customer for the onward sale and processing of the items subject to retention of ownership.
d) If the realisable value of the security exceeds the claims of GHM by more than 10%, GHM shall at the request of the customer
select and release security.
244
§ 8 Guarantee
1. The customer shall check whether the delivered contractual item is in accordance with the contract and is suitable for the intended
purpose. The obligation to inspect and issue a complaint in accordance with §§ 377, 381 HGB shall also apply to customers who are
not fully vested commercial agents within the meaning of the law. Apparent defects shall be notified to GHM within two weeks and
non-apparent defects promptly after discovery. Damage to packaging is to be noted in the freight paperwork or notified in writing to
the delivery shipping service and to GHM by the 6th day after delivery at the latest.
2. In the case of duly notified defects, at its own choice and taking into consideration the interests of the customer, GHM shall either
rectify the defect or deliver defect-free replacement items. If these measures are not successful after two attempts to rectify, the
customer may exercise its statutory rights. The right of GHM to refuse to rectify in accordance with the statutory requirements shall
remain unaffected.
3. All guarantee claims lapse 12 months after the statutory start date of the prescription period. This deadline does not apply if
the law according to § 438 para 1 number 2 BGB (buildings and items for buildings) and § 634a para 1 no 2 BGB (building faults)
prescribes longer deadlines, or in case of deliberate action, fraudulent concealment of the fault, or if a guarantee of quality has not
been fulfilled.
§ 9 Exchanges and Repairs outside of the Guarantee
1. GHM is not obliged to give an exchange and in the event of custom orders, exchange shall be excluded.
2. Where GHM however voluntarily declares that it will take back a standard item, without any obligation in accordance with
guarantee regulations or any guarantee given, 20% of the purchase price shall be retained where the item is undamaged. In the case
of damaged goods, any additional necessary repair costs shall also be deducted.
3. Where GHM is to perform repairs for the customer which do not follow within the framework of the guarantee or any given
guarantee, the repair item shall be sent back at the cost of the customer. Where a cost estimate is requested by the customer for the
repair, GHM is entitled to additionally invoice this work in the amount actually incurred.
§ 10 Limitation of Liability
1. The liability of GHM for damages, regardless of the legal basis, in particular due to impossibility, delay, defective or incorrect
delivery, breach of contract, breach of obligations in contractual negotiations and unlawful acts (unerlaubte Handlungen) is, to the
extent that this involves culpability (Verschulden), limited in accordance with this § 10.
2. GHM is not liable in the case of simple negligence of its management bodies, legal representatives, employees or other vicarious
agents (Erfüllungsgehilfen), to the extent that this does not relate to a breach of material contractual obligations (vertragswesentliche Pflichten). Material contractual obligations are obligations compliance with which facilitates proper performance of
the contract, so in particular the obligation to deliver in a timely manner, the conformity of the delivered items with the agreed
quality characteristics, as well as advisory, protective and due care obligations, and the protection of life or health of the customer’s
personnel or the protection of its property from material damage.
3. Where GHM is liable in accordance with and on the grounds of § 10.2, such liability shall be limited to damages which GHM
foresaw upon conclusion of the contract as a possible consequence of a breach of contract or which GHM should have foreseen
when exercising due care and attention (verkehrsübliche Sorgfalt). Indirect damages and consequential damages, which are the
consequence of defects in the delivered item, shall only be compensated to the extent they are typically to be expected in the course
of a proper use of the delivered item.
4. In the event of a delivery delay caused by our simple negligence, the amount of default damages which the customer may claim
shall be limited to a maximum of 5 % of the agreed net contract price for each complete week of delivery delay and in total to a
maximum of 20 % of the agreed net contract price.
5. Where we provide technical information or act in a consulting capacity and such information or consulting is not included in the
contractually agreed scope of performance owed by us, this shall take place free of charge and under exclusion of any liability.
6. The aforementioned exclusions and limitations on liability shall apply to the same extent for the benefit of management bodies,
legal representatives, employees or other vicarious agents (Erfüllungsgehilfen) of GHM.
7. The limitations set out in this § 10 shall not apply to liability of GHM for wilful misconduct, for guaranteed quality characteristics,
for damage to life, body or health or in accordance with the German Product Liability Act (ProdHaftG).
8. If the customer sells the delivered item unchanged or after processing, transforming or combining with other items, the customer
shall release us internally from all product liability claims by third parties, to the extent that the customer is responsible for the
circumstances giving rise to the liability.
§ 11 Disposal of Electronic Devices
1. To the extent that electronic devices are the contractual items, the disposal of old devices (§ 3 no 3 ElektroG) used outside private
households (§ 3 no 5 ElektroG) shall be subject to the following paragraphs. For any technical questions, please contact info@
greisinger.de.
2. The customer shall dispose of the delivered electronic devices at the end of their useful lives at its own cost and in accordance
with the relevant legal regulations. The customer shall release GHM from manufacturer obligations under § 19 ElektroG and in that
context from any associated claims by third parties.
3. In the event that delivered devices are transferred to commercial third parties, the customer is obliged to also subject such third
parties in writing to the obligation to properly dispose of the devices at the end of their useful lives, to bear the costs thereof and in
the event of a further transfer, to effect a transfer of the obligation in accordance with this provision.
4. In the event that the customer fails to contractually oblige third parties to undertake proper disposal and to oblige third parties to
pass on the obligation in accordance with § 11.2, the customer shall be obliged to take back the delivered goods at the end of their
useful lives at its cost and to dispose of them properly in accordance with legal regulations. This shall also apply where the obligation
of the third party was not made in writing and the third party disputes contractual assumption of the duty to dispose.
5. GHM’s right to have the customer hold harmless and release GHM will not expire before two years have passed after the final
use of the device. This two-year expiry restriction begins no earlier than the date of GHM receiving a written notification from the
customer of the end of the device’s use. However, the claim to hold harmless and release will expire no later than 30 years after it
comes into existence.
§ 12 Miscellaneous
1. Unless otherwise agreed, the law of the Federal Republic of Germany shall exclusively apply, under the exclusion of the rules
concerning the conflict of laws applicable under that law. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International
Sale of Goods of 11.04.1980 is not applicable.
2. The place of jurisdiction shall be Ulm or at the election of GHM, the competent court at the seat of the customer.
3. In the event that a provision of these GTC or of the contract is or becomes wholly or partly void, ineffective or unenforceable, the
effectiveness and enforceability of all other remaining provisions shall not be affected thereby. The void, ineffective or unenforceable
provision shall be deemed replaced by such effective and enforceable provision which comes as close as possible to the commercial
meaning and purpose of the void, ineffective or unenforceable provision with regard to its object, scope, time, place and scope of
application. This shall apply mutatis mutandis to any gaps in these GTC or the contract.
4. The contractual language shall be German. In the event that interpretation is necessary, only the German version of this text shall
be relevant. Translations into other languages are exclusively for information purposes.
Stand: 05 / 2017
GHM GROUP CORPORATE | GHM Messtechnik GmbH
Amtsgericht Ulm | HRB 730462 | USt-IdNr.: DE286993999 | Geschäftsführung: Dipl.-Ing. (FH) Verfahrens- und Umwelttechnik Johannes Overhues
Sitz der Gesellschaft: Schloßstr. 6 | 88453 Erolzheim | GERMANY | Es gelten unsere AGBs unter www.ghm-group.de/index.php?id=33&L=0
Phone: +49 7354 937233-0 | Fax: +49 7354 93 72 33-88 | info@ghm-group.de | www.ghm-group.de
Volksbank Ulm-Biberach | Swift Code (BIC) ULMVDE66XXX | IBAN DE62 6309 0100 0643 2310 05
Index
Product
Page
A
Accessories .................................................................................... 85
Additional accessories .................................................................... 14
C
Cable Series KH ........................................................................... 142
Cable Series KH ........................................................................... 156
Certicates and Protocols ................................................................ 16
D
DMP 331P .................................................................................... 223
Double-PT100, Ø 18 mm................................................................ 65
Double-PT100, Ø 59 mm................................................................ 62
E
ECI-1 ............................................................................................ 141
ECI-1 ............................................................................................ 155
EYY120 ........................................................................................ 176
EYY120 ........................................................................................ 207
G
GTL 142 .......................................................................................... 28
GTL 162 / 162M, GTL 182 / 182M .................................................. 31
GTL 240 .......................................................................................... 34
GTL 241 .......................................................................................... 40
GTL 244 .......................................................................................... 46
GTL 260 / 260M, GTL 280 / 280 M ................................................. 37
GTL 261 / 261M, GTL 281 / 281M .................................................. 43
GTL 263 / 263M .............................................................................. 50
GTL 264 / 264M, GTL 284 / 284M .................................................. 48
GTL 349 .......................................................................................... 52
GTL 369 / 369M, GTL 389 / 389M .................................................. 54
GTL 459 .......................................................................................... 57
GTL 479 / 479M, GTL 499 / 499M .................................................. 59
GTL 720 / GTL 723 ......................................................................... 68
GTL 737 .......................................................................................... 71
H
HFK12-I / U / F / C ........................................................................ 128
HFK12-S ....................................................................................... 131
HFK12-S ....................................................................................... 153
HFK30 .......................................................................................... 124
HFK30-FIN ................................................................................... 137
HFK35 .......................................................................................... 121
HFK35-FIN ................................................................................... 134
HTK 12-I / U / F .............................................................................. 74
HTK 12-S ........................................................................................ 76
Product
Page
H
HTK 30 ........................................................................................... 79
HTK 35 ........................................................................................... 82
Hygienic connection cable .............................................................. 17
Hygienic connection cable .............................................................. 18
M
MAT433 / MAT437 ........................................................................ 234
MFI447 ........................................................................................... 95
MLC420 / 422 ............................................................................... 167
MLC430 ........................................................................................ 168
MLC433 ........................................................................................ 170
MLC437 ........................................................................................ 172
MLC490 / 492 ............................................................................... 174
MLP433-MR ................................................................................. 217
MLP433-OR.................................................................................. 216
MLP437-MR ................................................................................. 219
MLP437-OR.................................................................................. 218
MLR120 ........................................................................................ 205
MLR157 ........................................................................................ 206
MLR420-1 ..................................................................................... 194
MLR420-2 ..................................................................................... 195
MLR430-1 ..................................................................................... 198
MLR430-2 ..................................................................................... 199
MLR430-3 ..................................................................................... 202
MLT420-2 ..................................................................................... 197
MLT430-2 ..................................................................................... 201
MLT430-3 ..................................................................................... 204
Mounting notes ............................................................................... 12
P
Process adapter ............................................................................. 15
Process adapter ........................................................................... 143
Process adapter ........................................................................... 157
S
SA-11 ............................................................................................ 241
SLR420-1 ..................................................................................... 186
SLR420-2 ..................................................................................... 187
SLR430-1 ..................................................................................... 189
SLR430-2 ..................................................................................... 190
SLR430-3 ..................................................................................... 192
SLT420-2 ...................................................................................... 188
SLT430-2 ...................................................................................... 191
SLT430-3 ...................................................................................... 193
W
Welding fitting ................................................................................. 16
Welding sleeve ............................................................................... 13
245
Sales Germany
Sales Director
Germany & Austria
Thomas Stumpe
Phone +49 7354 937233-111
Mobile +49 172 4346882
Branch sales
Measurement Data
Acquisition & Industrial
electronics
Branch sales
Electronic &
Automation Technology
Branch sales
Measurement Data
Acquisition & Industrial
electronics
Torsten Obermann
Sebastian Behnke
Dieter Schubert
Phone +49 7354 937233-306
Mobile +49 172 4343551
t.obermann@ghm-messtechnik.de
Phone +49 40 67073-211
Mobile +49 151 12097947
s.behnke@ghm-messtechnik.de
Mobile +49 151 12097415
d.schubert@ghm-messtechnik.de
NORD
Regional Sales Manager
WEST
Regional Sales Manager
SÜD
40000 - 41999
45000 - 50999
52000 - 52999
17000 - 25999
Regional Sales Manager
70000 - 79999
88000 - 89999
Hans-Joachim Petermann
Jürgen Kersten
Peter Schwindt
Phone +49 40 67998410
Mobile +49 172 4346881
h.petermann@ghm-messtechnik.de
Phone +49 2152 8090795
Mobile +49 172 5298587
j.kersten@ghm-messtechnik.de
Mobile +49 0170 6811147
p.schwindt@ghm-messtechnik.de
NORD
Regional Sales Manager
WEST
Regional Sales Manager
SÜD
35000 - 36999 53000 - 53999
42000 - 42999 57000 - 59999
44000 - 44999
51000 - 51999
29000 - 34999
37000 - 39999
Junior
Regional Sales Manager
80000 - 89000
94000 - 94999
Jörg Winter
Stefan Müller
Fabian Graf
Mobile +49 172 4346880
j.winter@ghm-messtechnik.de
Phone +49 202 6093374
Mobile +49 171 4108173
s.mueller@ghm-messtechnik.de
Phone +49 7354 937233-125
Mobile +49 157 87131381
f.graf@ghm-messtechnik.de
NORD
Regional Sales Manager
00000-16999
98000-99999
WEST
Regional Sales Manager
54000 - 56999
60000 - 60999
63000 - 69999
SÜD
Regional Sales Manager
90000 - 93999
95000 - 97999
Sebastian Behnke
Christian Rösner
Dieter Schubert
Phone +49 40 67073-211
Mobile +49 151 12097947
s.behnke@ghm-messtechnik.de
Phone +49 7354 937233-0
Mobile +49 151 12098192
c.roesner@ghm-messtechnik.de
Mobile +49 151 12097415
d.schubert@ghm-messtechnik.de
246
Our International Area Sales Management Team
Mina Kamal
Teamleader Export
Feifan Jin
Area Sales Manager
Parimal Sharma
Area Sales Manager
Peter Wüster
Area Sales Manager
Andrea Casati
Office Italy / Delta OHM S.r.l.
GHM GROUP – Headquarters
Schloßstraße 6
88453 Erolzheim
GERMANY
GHM GROUP – Headquarters
Schloßstraße 6
88453 Erolzheim
GERMANY
GHM GROUP – Headquarters
Schloßstraße 6
88453 Erolzheim
GERMANY
GHM GROUP – Honsberg
Tenter Weg 2-8
42897 Remscheid
GERMANY
GHM Messtechnik GmbH
Via G. Marconi 5
35030 Caselle di Selvazzano
ITALY
Phone +49 7354 937233- 409
m.kamal@ghm-messtechnik.de
Phone +49 7354 937233- 405
f.jin@ghm-messtechnik.de
Phone +49 7354 937233- 403
p.sharma@ghm-messtechnik.de
Phone +49 2191 96 72-35
p.wuester@ghm-messtechnik.de
Phone +39 049 89 77150
a.casati@ghm-messtechnik.de
Area:
Africa, Arabic States, Israel,
Turkey, Greece, Switzerland,
Spain, Portugal
Area:
China, Japan, South Korea,
South-East Asia
Area:
Russia, Easter Europe, USA,
New Zealand
Area:
Scandinavia, UK, Ireland
Area:
Italy
Language:
English
Language:
Chinese, German, English
Language:
English, Hindi, German
Language:
German, English
Language:
Italian, English
GHM Sales Subsidiaries & GHM Foreign Sales
Occo Andriessen
Managing Director
Michal Doubek
Managing Director
Erling Mathiesen
Managing Director
Jan Grobler
Managing Director
Alban Jouanillou
Managing Director
Netherlands
Czech Republic /
Slovakia
Denmark
South Africa
France
GHM Meettechniek BV
Zeeltweg 30
3755 KA Eemnes
NETHERLANDS
GHM Greisinger s.r.o.
Ovci hajek 2 / 2153
158 00 Prague 5
Nove Butovice
CZECH REPUPLIC
GHM Maaleteknik ApS
Maarslet Byvej 2
8320 Maarslet
DENMARK
GHM Messtechnik
SA (PTY) Ltd
16 Olivier Street
Verwoerdpark, Alberton 1453
SOUTH AFRICA
GHM GROUP France SAS
Parc des Pivolles,
9 Rue de Catalogne
69150 Décines-Charpieu (Lyon)
FRANCE
Phone +31 35 53805- 40
Fax
+31 35 53805- 41
info@ghm-nl.com
www.ghm-nl.com
Phone +420 251 613-828
Fax
+420 251 612-607
info@greisinger.cz
www.greisinger.cz
Phone +45 6464 92-00
Fax
+45 6464 92-01
info@ghm.dk
www.ghm.dk
Phone +27 74 4590040
j.grobler@ghm-sa.o.za
www.ghm-sa.co.za
Phone +33 4 72 37 45 30
a. jouanillou@ghm-group.fr
www.ghm-group.fr
Rafael Molina
Managing Director
Michaela Zavan
Site Manager
Alessandro Perego
Managing Director
Alfred Fröstl
Area Sales Manager Austria
Sales
Brazil
Italy
Italy
Austria
GHM Do Brasil Ltda
R. Comendador Tórlogo
Dauntre, 74, cj 06
Cambuí, Campinas
SP, 13025-270
BRAZIL
Delta OHM S.r.l.
Via Marconi 5
35030 Caselle di Selvazzano
Padova (PD)
ITALY
Valco srl
Via Rovereto 9/11
20014 S. Ilario di Nerviano
Milano (MI)
ITALY
GHM Messtechnik GmbH
Breitenseer Straße 76/1/36
1140 Wien
AUSTRIA
Phone +39 049 8977150
Fax
+39 049 635596
www.deltaohm.com
info@deltaohm.com
Phone +39 0331 535920
Fax
+39 0331 535442
valco@valco.it
www.valco.it
Phone +43 660 7335603
a.froestl@ghm-messtechnik.de
Phone +39 0331 535920
Fax
+39 0331 535442
r.molina@ghm-messtechnik.de
247
Headquarter
GHM Messtechnik GmbH
GHM GROUP CORPORATE
Schloßstraße 6
88453 Erolzheim | GERMANY
Phone +49 7354 937233-0
info@ghm-group.de
www.ghm-group.de
Centers of Competences
GHM Messtechnik GmbH
GHM GROUP – Greisinger
Hans-Sachs-Straße 26
93128 Regenstauf | GERMANY
Phone +49 9402 9383-0
info@greisinger.de | www.greisinger.de
GHM Messtechnik GmbH
GHM GROUP – Honsberg
Tenter Weg 2-8
42897 Remscheid | GERMANY
GHM Messtechnik GmbH
GHM GROUP – Martens
Kiebitzhörn 18
22885 Barsbüttel | GERMANY
GHM Messtechnik GmbH
GHM GROUP – Imtron
Carl-Benz-Straße 11
88696 Owingen | GERMANY
Delta OHM S.r.l. a socio unico
GHM GROUP – Delta OHM
Via Marconi 5
35030 Caselle di Selvazzano
Padova (PD) | ITALY
Phone +39 049 8977150
info@deltaohm.com
www.deltaohm.com
Valco srl
GHM GROUP – VAL.CO
Via Rovereto 9/11
20014 S. Ilario di Nerviano
Milano (MI) | ITALY
Phone +39 0331 53 59 20
valco@valco.it
www.valco.it
Austria
GHM Messtechnik GmbH
Office Austria
Breitenseer Str. 76/1/36
1140 Vienna | AUSTRIA
Phone +43 660 7335603
a.froestl@ghm-messtechnik.de
Brazil & Latin America
GHM Messtechnik do Brasil Ltda
Av. José de Souza Campos, 1073, cj 06
Campinas, SP
13025 320 | BRAZIL
Phone +55 19 3304 3408
info@grupoghm.com.br
Czech Republic / Slovakia
GHM Greisinger s.r.o.
Ovci hajek 2 / 2153
158 00 Prague 5
Nove Butovice | CZECH REPUPLIC
Phone +420 251 613828
Fax
+420 251 612607
info@greisinger.cz | www.greisinger.cz
Denmark
GHM Maaleteknik ApS
Maarslet Byvej 2
8320 Maarslet | DENMARK
Phone +45 646492- 00
Fax
+45 646492- 01
info@ghm.dk | www.ghm.dk
France
GHM GROUP France SAS
Parc des Pivolles
9 Rue de Catalogne
69150 Décines-Charpieu (Lyon) | FRANCE
Phone +33 4 72 37 45 30
a.jouanilou@ghm-group.fr
India
GHM Messtechnik India Pvt Ldt.
209 | Udyog Bhavan | Sonowala Road
Gregaon ( E ) | Mumbai - 400 063
INDIA
Phone +91 22 40236235
info@ghmgroup.in | www.ghmgroup.in
Italy for Greisinger & Delta OHM
GHM GROUP – Delta OHM
Via Marconi 5
35030 Caselle di Selvazzano
Padova (PD) | ITALY
Phone +39 049 8977150
a.casati@ghm-messtechnik.de
Italy for Honsberg, Martens, Val.co
GHM GROUP – Val.co
Via Rovereto 9/11
20014 S. Ilario di Nerviano
Milano (MI) | ITALY
Phone +39 0331 53 59 20
alessandro.perego@valco.it
Netherlands
GHM Meettechniek BV
Zeeltweg 30
3755 KA Eemnes | NETHERLANDS
Phone +31 35 53805-40
Fax
+31 35 53805-41
info@ghm-nl.com | www.ghm-nl.com
South Africa
GHM Messtechnik SA (Pty) Ltd
16 Olivier Street
Verwoerdpark, Alberton 1453
SOUTH AFRICA
Phone +27 74 4590040
j.grobler@ghm-sa.co.za
...and more than
100 qualified distributors!
Visit us at: www.ghm-group.de
01 / 2018 / de
GHM GROUP International